diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/55444-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55444-0.txt | 8478 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 8478 deletions
diff --git a/old/55444-0.txt b/old/55444-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 90e6258..0000000 --- a/old/55444-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8478 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Chautauquan, Vol. 05, July 1885, No. 10, by -The Chautauquan Literary and Scientific Circle - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: The Chautauquan, Vol. 05, July 1885, No. 10 - -Author: The Chautauquan Literary and Scientific Circle - -Editor: Theodore L. Flood - -Release Date: August 27, 2017 [EBook #55444] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CHAUTAUQUAN, JULY 1885 *** - - - - -Produced by Emmy, Juliet Sutherland and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - - - - - THE CHAUTAUQUAN. - - _A MONTHLY MAGAZINE DEVOTED TO THE PROMOTION OF TRUE CULTURE. - ORGAN OF THE CHAUTAUQUA LITERARY AND SCIENTIFIC CIRCLE._ - - VOL. V. JULY, 1885. No. 10. - - - - -OFFICERS OF THE CHAUTAUQUA LITERARY AND SCIENTIFIC CIRCLE. - - -_President_, Lewis Miller, Akron, Ohio. _Chancellor_, J. H. Vincent, -D.D., New Haven, Conn. _Counselors_, The Rev. Lyman Abbott, D.D.; -the Rev. J. M. Gibson, D.D.; Bishop H. W. Warren, D.D.; Prof. W. C. -Wilkinson, D.D.; Edward Everett Hale. _Office Secretary_, Miss Kate -F. Kimball, Plainfield, N. J. _General Secretary_, Albert M. Martin, -Pittsburgh, Pa. - - - - -Contents - -Transcriber’s Note: This table of contents of this periodical was created -for the HTML version to aid the reader. - - Some Damascene Pictures 559 - The Boston Museum of Fine Arts - Second Paper 562 - Sanitary Conditions of Summer Resorts 564 - Wayside Homes 567 - Sunday Readings - [_July 5_] 570 - [_July 12_] 570 - [_July 19_] 570 - [_July 26_] 571 - “We Salute Thee, and Live” 571 - A Group of Mummies 572 - A Trip to Mt. Shasta 573 - Reassurement 576 - Will It Pay? 577 - Geography of the Heavens for July 578 - How Air Has Been Liquefied 579 - American Decorative Art 582 - Some Modern Literary Men of Germany 585 - Historic Niagara 586 - Two Fashionable Poisons 589 - Our C. L. S. C. Column 591 - Glimpses of the Chautauqua Program 592 - Local Circles 593 - The C. L. S. C. Classes 600 - The Summer Assemblies 603 - Editor’s Outlook 606 - Editor’s Note-Book 609 - Talk About Books 611 - Chautauqua in Japan 612 - Program of Popular Exercises 613 - Special Notes 616 - - - - -SOME DAMASCENE PICTURES. - -BY BISHOP JOHN F. HURST, D.D. - - -One is forcibly struck with the Damascene bazars. They thread the old -city in all directions. Some of them are new, and some very old. The most -of them are covered ways, where either side is divided into small booths, -or shops. The bazar has its specialty—the brass bazar, the silversmith -bazar, the goldsmith bazar, the shoe bazar, the silk bazar, and all the -rest. Then there is another order of division, such as the Greek bazar -and the Frank bazar. There is sometimes, however, a breaking up of all -orders, for goods of very varied character you can sometimes get in the -same bazar. The oldest of these quaint marts date back many centuries, -and are mere holes, or rickety houses, where buying and selling have -been going on for many a generation. The venders love these old places. -I imagine their fathers, and even remote ancestors sat in the same spot, -and did business in much the same way, and chaffed about the prices in -quite as much hyperbole, four or five centuries ago, as their children -do to-day, when a Frank drops into the busy way, and halts, and asks a -question concerning the beautiful wares. - -The love is for the old. No Damascene wants to change to the new. The -smooth floor and familiar shelves of his booth he could not give up to -another for many a bright _bishlik_. - -Not long since the Pasha of Damascus, who had been long making vain -efforts to get the shop-keepers of a stretch of the bazar in the “street -that is called straight,” to pull down their booths and put up new ones, -had to give up the task as hopeless. Finally he ordered that, at a given -signal, one night, the bazar should be set fire to in a number of places. -His officers did their duty well. They knew what they were about. The -result was that long reaches of this one bazar were burned to the ground. -The wares went up in smoke with the tinder which enclosed them. - -“What could the people do?” I asked my informant. - -“Do? Why, nothing at all.” - -“Were they insured? Did they get any compensation back again for the -destruction of their property?” - -“Not in the least. The Pasha had the power. No questions were asked. The -consequence is, that, as you see, new bazars are building in various -places. Soon they will be occupied by gay, oriental wares, and things -will go on quite the same as before. Only there will be more light and -fresher air.” - -Among the specialties sold in the Damascene bazars we may mention silk -goods, first of all. They are combined with cotton, and woven into -various patterns for dress and furniture. They defy all competition the -world over. The patterns are exquisite. No wonder this artistic weaving -has given the city’s name, or damask, to such fabrics for all time. -Curtains and all manner of stuffs are woven, and are here displayed in -such combinations as to bewilder any but Orientals. I saw, during my -stay, the places where these fine silks are woven. There are no great -shops, no few places where they come from. They are produced in small -houses, in obscure and ill-odorous streets, and by thousands of hands, -young and old. It is the toil of the poor, the young, and the infirm, in -sunless cellars and obscure corners which brings out these sunny silks -and beautiful designs. Queens send here from afar to buy them. There, in -the hotel, I saw the Crown Prince of Austria and his fair-haired Belgian -bride. Before twenty-four hours will have passed they will be buying -these silks of Damascus, and in less than six months Stephanie will be -wearing them at a court dinner. When she becomes Empress she will be -having more of them, and her favorite rooms will likely be hung with the -rich stuffs sent direct from these busy bazars, but coming first from -dingy homes and little rickety looms. - -Yes, one learns an easy lesson here, in these oriental countries, of -the contrast between the hand that weaves and the body that wears the -stuffs that adorn the world’s gayest places. In Agra, behind the barred -gate, I saw the chained prisoners of the jail weaving most patiently one -rich India carpet for the ex-Empress Eugenie, and another, of different -figure, but even more rich, for Queen Victoria. It takes about six months -for the workers to finish their work. As they weave, one hears the clank -of the chains about their feet. But, in the later years, when those great -carpets will still delight the eye, few will ever think of the places -where the fine wool from Cashmere was woven into such pleasing shapes. - - -DAMASCENE TRADITIONS. - -There is nothing in the way of safe tradition in Damascus. They will show -you—yes, what will they not show you? I let them tell me everything, -and have given no interdict to our dragoman. He is to tell me all the -wildest traditions he pleases, and take me to every sacred spot, and I -am to listen. No wonder he has brought me to the house of Ananias, the -good friend of the blind Saul, before he became the far-seeing apostle to -the Gentiles. We had to leave our carriage and go through several narrow -and dirty streets, and got thoroughly wearied by the walk, and then had -to wait for a key, and be surrounded by begging children, and be pounded -between donkeys with heavily-burdened panniers, and be led down a damp -stairway into the darkness, to find the way to the house of Ananias. - -There is no harm in asking questions. So, to the question as to how they -know this is where he lived, the answer came: - -“Until lately, nobody knew where Ananias lived. But some years ago a -learned man from the west came here and told us this was the place, and -so it must be true.” - -Now, I take this comfort: Ananias lived somewhere in Damascus, and there -is as much probability that he lived here as anywhere else. That is -enough for me. Why should we disturb things of such little moment? - -But there is not much room for doubting the neighborhood of the place -where Paul entered the city. It was the gate nearest the southern side -of the city. The old Roman road northward terminated at the gate. It is -probable that no change has taken place in the road, and that it follows -just the general line, and even the curves, that it did in the remote -period. On this southern side of Damascus there has been but little -change in the wall from Paul’s day to ours. You can see at a glance that -all the lower part of the wall is of Roman work. The blocks are large, -clear cut, and brought into closest brotherhood without a grain of -mortar. The joining is still perfect. It was the wall of Paul’s time, and -only the upper part has been torn down and rebuilt. It is as easy to see -the difference between Roman and Turkish workmanship as to trace the line -between a Moslem mosque and the Theseum in Athens. - -They will show you, in Damascus, the very place where Paul was let down -from the wall in a basket. Let them enjoy their definite locality! But -I did get, very near the alleged spot, an idea which I had never had -before—that there was a mode of building which favored the letting down -of any one from the top of the wall. One can see, in several places on -this same southern side of Damascus, that people live in houses adjusted -on the top of the wall itself. I saw one of these diminutive houses which -projected over the wall so far that one might well wonder why it did not -fall down to the earth. What more natural thing than that Paul was let -down from just such a place. There was not a gate in the wall near by, -and nothing was more natural and easy than to aid his escape in this way. - -I lingered some time about the Roman gateway. It is an enchanting spot. -The great blocks of stone, the pillars, the archway, the smooth stones, -over which you walk to reach it, the general curve of the wall, tell -of the Roman times, and bring you face to face with the little church -in Damascus which was soon to set the whole eastern and western world -ablaze by its leading of Paul to the light. Along all the ways, out by -this Roman gate, the people were twisting silk, and getting it ready -for the loom. It was of hard fiber, yellow, rich, and glistening in the -afternoon shimmer of the sun, as it came back from the pink sides of -the Anti-Libanus mountains. There was no available spot which was not -utilized by long stretches of the silk cord. It was drawn off in all -directions, and we had to walk carefully to keep from stumbling against -the twister’s twist. - - -THE CAMELS. - -Not very far from the Roman gate was the great camel space. It was the -point of departure for caravans to Palmyra, Mecca, and the whole eastern -world. Here were hundreds of camels. They seemed to be waiting for the -finishing burdens. Some were already loaded, and were pausing for the -rest. I know not how long it requires for the completing of a caravan. -But it seems that when some camels are loaded they are taken to the -outside space, and are kept watch over until all of the others are ready. -It must be no small or brief matter to get a caravan ready. Then, when -the last camel is laden, and he takes his place in the caravan, and the -signal is given to move on, what a commotion it makes! Friends come down -to see their friends off. It is the moving off of many people, and of -vast treasures of merchandise. Merchants and travelers, and many others -who wish to go to the distant places across the desert, for any purpose -whatever, go with the caravan. It is the safest way, for the train is -guarded, and has, I imagine, the protection of the government. There is -something singularly poetical, as well as practical, in the moving of the -caravan. It is a thing which does not occur every day. Much commercial -gain depends upon its safe conduct and arrival. The camels must be of -just the right kind to endure the long journey and the great fatigue. -The gait is slow and dull. There is the dreariest monotony. Yet this is -the way these people have been traveling and doing business, and keeping -up the connections for all these long ages. As things now seem, it would -appear to be ages still before the railway, or even the wagon, will take -the place of the much-enduring camel, the ship of the desert. - - -BUCKLE’S GRAVE. - -Close beside the space allotted for the camels which make the long -caravans for Damascus, I came across the little English cemetery. It is -a quiet spot, surrounded by a high wall. The gate was locked, and there -was no way of getting within it. I could not tell where the key was to be -found; wherever it was, it was a long distance off, in the heart of the -city. So, by the aid of our dragoman, I succeeded in climbing to the top -of the wall, and seeing the one grave in which I was most interested—that -of Henry Thomas Buckle, the author of the “History of Civilization.” -Buckle had wearied himself out with literary work. His methods were not -the most wise nor expeditious. He was an indefatigable gleaner of facts, -and a patient gatherer of notes from all quarters, and he piled up his -note-books in great heterogeneous masses. He seems to have had but little -help, and not to have husbanded his strength. So, like many men who -begin to rest when it is all too late, he went off on distant travel. He -reached Damascus. His mind must have kindled afresh as he saw this city -of weavers and strange oriental combinations, and the thought of the long -and hoary history of the place. But he was too weary to think longer. He -lay down to die, and here he rests, under the shadow of the thick and -high walls of a little graveyard, where only seldom an Anglo-Saxon comes -to visit the sacred place. The accumulation of years is beginning to tell -upon the inscription. But it is still very legible, and gives the record -of his brief and toiling life. - -There is something singularly touching in this little graveyard. There -are only a few graves, yet among them, besides Buckle’s, are several -English noblemen and titled ladies. The inscriptions repeat the story of -love and tears, as everywhere else. None who come here expect to die. -But the difficulties of removal are great. There are great and long -settled superstitions against the transportation of the dead in all these -eastern countries. The best way is to let our friends lie where they -fall, and to care for the perpetual beauty of their resting place. The -little graveyards of the Anglo-Saxons in all the eastern cemeteries make -a strange appeal to the sympathies. I have seen many of them, and always -they teach a new lesson of the suddenness of death, of the pilgrimage -which we call life, and of the burning love of those who remain behind, -and who write their words of tenderest affection upon stone in far-off -lands. - - -THE GREAT MOSQUE. - -There are few mosques which have a more interesting history than the -great one of Damascus. Of all those in existence, save only that of -Mecca, the greatest interest probably clusters about this one. It is not -as splendid as that of St. Sophia, in Constantinople, and yet it has -some elements of touching story that not even that one possesses. It -stands upon the foundation of a Greek temple. In the early Christian ages -it required only an imperial order to convert a temple into a church. -So, when the Emperor Arcadius, toward the close of the fourth century, -wished to convert this temple into a church, all he needed to do was -to declare his will, and hurl out the pagan priesthood, and make a few -minor changes, and the deed was done. It became a splendid church, whose -fame went out into all lands. Thus it remained until the rise of the -Mohammedan faith. When Damascus was conquered, so arduous was the strife -that the leader of the Christians met the leader of the Moslems near the -spot where the church stood, and, by agreement, part of the church was -given up to the Mohammedans, and part still reserved by the Christians. -But Christian and Moslem had the same doorway. This state of things -could not last a great while. The Caliph Omar I. asked the Christians -to sell their right to a part of the church. They refused, and then he -took it from them. But he was fair enough to given them perpetual right -to other churches in the city and its environs. He then set to work to -beautify and make still more splendid this ancient building. He is said -to have brought from Constantinople 1,200 skilled artists, and to have -searched over all Syria for the most splendid pillars and architectural -adornments, with which to beautify and enlarge the building. Precious -stones were used for mosaic, vines of solid gold were made to run over -the archways, the wooden ceiling was overlaid with a plating of gold, and -from its glittering height there hung six hundred gold lamps. - -The wars and time have told strangely upon this rich, historical -building. The lamps are gone, no doubt to serve the purposes of warfare. -The plating on the ceiling has disappeared, probably for the same reason. -Much of the splendor has departed. But there are still the magnificent -columns, with mutilated capitals and defaced bases, which once belonged -to the Greek pagans of Syria, and in their long life, have witnessed the -worship of Baal, Jupiter, Mohammed, and the one true Savior. - -The present reminders of the time when this vast building of four hundred -and twenty-nine feet in length and one hundred and twenty-five feet wide, -was new, are numerous and very prominent. Everywhere, at every step you -take, you see the old peering out boldly through the new and the late. -Here is a patch of rich and deep-stoned mosaic, which has escaped a -thousand destructive forces, and still stands as a witness to the time of -remote Christianity, when Mohammed was not yet born. The stained windows, -with glass so somber and subdued that one can hardly see even this -blazing Syrian sun’s rays through it, are few in number, but they must -have been made by Christian hands, in the far gone and fading Byzantine -times. Even the Roman peers through the Christian, and one sees strong -evidences of the times when the star had not yet stood over the manger -at Bethlehem, and when the Greek paganism ruled from the Mediterranean -to the borders of India. Here is an archway with only one stone missing, -which is as perfect a bit of Greek architecture as Athens can furnish -to-day. - -One of the most singular features of this building is this—the respect -which the Mohammedan shows here for Christianity. I have seen nothing -equal to it elsewhere. There is here, belonging to the Greek mosque, the -Madinet ’Isa, or “Minaret of Jesus,” and the Mohammedans have a belief -that when the Christ comes he will appear on this minaret. Bloody as -has been the history of Damascus, and violent as has often been the -treatment of the Christians by the natives, the Mohammedans have been -compelled to respect the Christians, and to remember the relation of this -wonderful city to early Christianity. - -Let me give another illustration of how the old still looks through the -new. To the dragoman I said, when he seemed to have shown us everything: - -“Where is that Christian inscription?” - -“Oh,” he replied, “nobody goes there much now. It is dangerous to get to -it. You have to leap across a bazar, from one house-top to another. It is -very dangerous.” - -There were two ladies in our little party, and they were not at all -frightened by the outlook. It was simply a dragoman’s excuse to save -himself a little trouble. We all agreed that Franz must show us the -inscription. We went out of the mosque, down the street, then into the -silver bazar, then up a rickety stairway, and finally out over the flat -roofs of various buildings back to the outer wall of the mosque. We were -at the limit, and either had to leap over a deep span, the width of a -narrow street, or put a wide board across it. A couple of piasters soon -provided the board from a man who was just waiting to serve us, and in -one minute more we were reading, along the architrave of one side of the -old mosque, these words from David, in early Greek: - - “Thy kingdom [O, Christ] is an everlasting kingdom, and thy - dominion endureth throughout all generations.” - -This inscription has stood here through all the years since they were -put there first by the Christians of the fourth century, after they had -changed the temple into the church. The letters are as clear as the sun -in the heavens. - -It is, perhaps, the only illustration where Mohammedanism has permitted -a Christian inscription to stand. It is not likely to be removed in the -future, but will come into use when all the mosques are again made into -Christian temples. - -It is not an easy climb to the top of one of these lofty minarets. But -we resolved to do it. The picture never fades from the mind. Toward -the west we could see, as though within arm’s length, Ubel Sheikh, or -Mount Hermon, with its great folds of snow, that make his perpetual -turban of spotless white. Out from the sides of the Anti-Libanus burst -the Abana and Pharpar, which go singing down to the desert, and produce -the damascenes of all the countries. Yonder is the Christian quarter, -there the Jewish, and in another direction the Mohammedan. Far off to -the northeast lies Palmyra. But we can not see it. It is a four days’ -camel journey distant. The illimitable desert stretches east and south -and north, and these two “better rivers” of Damascus lose themselves -in those two little lakes, whose silver surface just glistens a little -in this perfect sun. Fruit trees are everywhere in bloom. The almond, -the plum—the damson takes its name from Damascus—and the apricot, are -everywhere in full blaze, and make the city one vast nosegay. The murmur -of fountains rises from a thousand courts, while the streets are alive -with the streams which have been vexed and teased away by many a device -from these living rivers. You get weary with the view. - -We now descend. How shall we see the way down the dingy steps? By the -same lamp which had guided us up. Yes, it is a veritable coal-oil -lantern. Think of it—the mixing up of the centuries! My Anglo-Saxon -feet have been guided to the topmost point of one of the world’s oldest -buildings here in grand and hoary Damascus, by the aid of a kerosene -lantern, every drop of whose petroleum has come from Oil City or its -neighborhood. - -DAMASCUS, March 8, 1885. - - * * * * * - -I do not pretend that books are everything.… Some day I may say some very -hard things about people who keep their books so close before their eyes -that they can not see God’s world, nor their fellow men and women. But -books rightly used are society.—_E. E. Hale, in “How to Do It.”_ - - - - -THE BOSTON MUSEUM OF FINE ARTS. - -BY CLARENCE COOK. - - -SECOND PAPER. - -Before proceeding to describe the contents of the second floor of the -Museum, I must say a few words about the School of Drawing and Painting -which, for the present, has its home in the building. - -Although it is generally thought by those who hear of this school, and -always in connection with the Museum, that it is a department of the -institution, yet in fact it is only partially under the control of the -trustees. - -It will be remembered that the Museum was not made all at once, and out -of whole cloth, so to speak, but was formed by bringing together certain -collections already existing—the Athenæum casts and pictures, and the -Gray collection of engravings, for instance, and by offering hospitality -to certain projects connected with the study of the arts, which were in -the air, but which could not take shape without some such help as an -institution could give. - -As my readers know, the Museum became a fact in 1876, but two years -earlier, in 1874, there had been earnest talk about a school of drawing -and painting, and though nothing was actually done, yet the ground was -prepared by much discussion for establishing such a school on right -principles of theory and practice when the time should come for doing -something. The Museum once established, the trustees conferred with those -of their fellow-citizens who had been urging the foundation of a school; -the trustees offered rooms in the new building, the others raised the -necessary funds to equip the school, and on Tuesday, January 2, 1877, the -school was opened. - -The school is under the control of a permanent committee, consisting -of four painters, three architects, the three principal officers of -the Museum, and two other gentlemen. The rooms occupied by the school -are in the basement of the building; they are well lighted, warmed, -and ventilated, and are furnished with all the necessary means and -appliances for instruction, while the pupils have, in addition to the -excellent teaching provided for them in the school itself, the advantage -of free access to the permanent collections of the Museum, as well as -to the special exhibitions that, from time to time, take place in the -building. The school holds a high rank among similar institutions in the -country; it is under the able and high minded management of Mr. Frederic -Crowninshield, and it is sincerely to be hoped that before long it may -find itself in quarters more ample, and better suited to the dignity -of so important a factor in the culture of the community. At the same -time the hope may be expressed, that the school and the Museum may never -part company, but that their relations, on the contrary, may grow closer -and stronger, and that in time the school may become an active part of -the foundation, and be put under the complete control of the trustees. -There could not be a better place for students than an institution like -this, where daily seeing the finest forms of antique art, and constantly -increasing opportunities for acquaintance with good modern work, -illustrate and strengthen the lessons learned in the school itself. - -Immediately in front of the visitor as he enters the Museum rises the -ample staircase that leads to the upper rooms. The stairs mount in a -broad flight in the middle of the hall, to the first landing, where they -divide, and returning on themselves finish the ascent in two flights, one -at the right hand and the other at the left. On this first landing was -at one time placed a handsome original example of the carved settles -or benches of the Italian Renaissance, but this has now been replaced -by a cast of the reclining female figure called Cleopatra, but to which -the name of Ariadne is now more commonly given. The original marble is -in the Vatican. This cast is one of those purchased with the bequest of -the late Charles Sumner. On the walls of the staircase and of the upper -hall several pictures are hung, among them a few that have, at least for -Americans, a historic interest. Here are the “Belshazzar’s Feast” of -Washington Allston, a picture at one time much talked and written about, -and which played an important part in the artist’s life; the “St. Peter -delivered from Prison,” by the same painter; the “King Lear” of Benjamin -West, and the “Sortie from Gibraltar” of Jonathan Trumbull. Of course -these pictures are only placed here for a time, until the Museum building -shall be enlarged, for when all deductions have been made on the score of -artistic merit that sound criticism can demand, they will still remain as -monuments in our development, and as such deserve to be hung where they -can be better seen. - -Lack of room crowds into the hall of this second story a number of small -works, such as the collection of water-color copies from the pictures -of Dutch and Italian masters made for the late Mr. Douse, and by him -bequeathed to the Athenæum. They are of little value except as memoranda, -and might as well be removed from their frames, mounted, and consigned to -the custody of portfolios in the print-room. - -Of far more value are the drawings in chalk, in pencil, and in pastel -by the late J. F. Millet, belonging to Mr. Martin Brimmer; they were -among the first things loaned to the Museum, and they still remain among -the most valuable for delight and for instruction. At the same end of -the hall, and so placed that the light from the large window is most -advantageous to it, is placed a cast of the second of the Gates, made by -Lorenzo Ghiberti for the Baptistery in Florence. - -At the left hand, as we leave the stairs, is the entrance to the -extensive loan-collections which fill all but one of the rooms on this -side of the building. Although they are directly over the rooms on the -first floor, the space they occupy is not so subdivided; we have only -four rooms above the five below. The apartment we first enter is a large -one, fifty-five feet long by thirty-two wide, and was formerly given up -to the pictures which have since been transferred to the answering room -on the opposite side of the building. The room opening out of this, at -the western end, and of nearly the same size, is devoted to the same -object, but it would be impossible within our narrow limits to give an -adequate notion of their contents, particularly since, owing to want of -space, no scientific arrangement is possible, and the dazed spectator -moves about among objects of great value and interest, brought from every -clime and belonging to every age, but deprived of much of their value -because the key which order gives, is wanting. - -The department of textiles, embroideries and laces is full, and of great -value, and includes some Italian stuffs and embroideries purchased by the -Museum under the direction of the late Alessandro Castellani. There are -some fine Flemish tapestries which came from the Château de Neuilly, and -a few other pieces of value, but the Museum is richest in that part of -the loan collection which belongs to Japan. Dr. W. S. Bigelow has loaned -to the Museum his magnificent collection of objects from that country, -and it may be said of it that in the field of embroideries, lacquers, -swords, sword-mounts, bronzes, ivories, and ceramics, it exhausts the -subject. It is now greatly to be desired that some one should undertake -the collection of the works of the Japanese artists in painting—a field -of great importance, and strangely neglected. - -The Museum is rich in specimens of pottery and porcelain of Oriental -and European manufacture. In the latter field it is richer than the -Metropolitan Museum of New York, but the Avery collection of Chinese -and Japanese porcelain in the New York Museum is finer in quality and -more complete in its representative character than anything the Boston -Museum has. It is also far more attractively displayed. The collection -of Captain Brinckley, of Japan, of eight hundred and forty-two pieces of -Chinese and Japanese porcelain, loaned to the Boston Museum since 1884 -is, however, an acquisition of great value and artistic interest, and -although not particularly well displayed is instructively arranged and -classified. - -In the large western room there is a considerable number of small objects -of the period of the Italian Renaissance, some bronzes belonging to the -Athenæum, and some medals loaned by Mr. Charles C. Perkins; there is -also a considerable number of reproductions of Italian medals, made by -Elkington, of London, which serve a useful purpose in the absence of -original specimens. There are also, in this room, several good pieces of -Italian majolica; two specimens of the Della Robbia ware—one attributed -to Luca, the other to Andrea, both loaned by Mr. Perkins. The collection -is not rich in glass, either antique or modern. There are a few pieces -of old Venetian glass, but they are neither very interesting nor very -valuable. - -On the south side of this division of the Museum are two rooms, one of -which is occupied with a miscellaneous collection of objects in carved -wood and ivory, Italian marriage chests, cabinets, tables, etc., etc., -with some Japanese objects, chiefly swords, while the other is fitted -up with carved oak of the sixteenth century, the lining of a room in -some English house, with additions from other quarters. This is an -extremely interesting apartment, and, besides the wood-carving, contains -six portraits painted on panel, and forming a part of the original -decoration of the room; among them heads of Henry VIII., Edward VI., and -Queen Elizabeth. There are several pieces of antique furniture in this -room, and in the center a glass case containing some good illuminated -manuscripts. The mantelpiece, in the style of the period, is a modern -reproduction. - -Returning to the stair-case hall, and crossing to the eastern side of -the building, we find ourselves in the picture-galleries. The shape and -disposition of these rooms are similar to those in the opposite wing, -but owing to the greater height of the sculpture-gallery on the ground -floor at the eastern end, the space above it, divided into two rooms, is -several feet higher than the rest of the wing. The great height of the -upper story permits this division be to made without injury to the effect. - -The pictures belonging to the Museum are not without interest, although -their value is not very great, if reckoned in money. The early American -pictures include portraits by Copley, Stuart, Allston, and West, but -with the exception of the well-known portraits of Washington and Mrs. -Washington, by Stuart, there is nothing here of particular interest, -although there are often pictures loaned to the Museum by old residents -of Boston, which are historically valuable. It is much to be desired that -the collection of portraits by Copley in the Museum of Harvard College -could be deposited in the Museum. There ought to be in this institution -as complete a representation of the early art of the country as can -be procured, and it would be comparatively easy to accomplish this at -the present time. It must not be inferred that the authorities of the -Museum have neglected this portion of their mission. On the contrary, -they have rendered important service in this direction, and the special -exhibitions have been of interest, and of great importance. Beside -miscellaneous loan collections, there have been exhibitions of the works -of Allston, of William M. Hunt, and of George Fuller, and every year the -visitor finds representative pictures by artists of repute at home and -abroad, which excite interest, discussion, criticism, and keep the flame -of art and the love of art burning, even if—and this by no fault of the -institution—comparatively few avail themselves of the light. The French -school of painters which had its seat near the Forest of Fontainebleau, -and which is associated with the names of Millet, Corot, Rousseau, and -Diaz, is better represented here than any other of the modern schools, -although Courbet and Couture are both seen in good examples, Courbet -especially, of whom there is a fine picture, “La Curée”—the huntsman -winding his horn to call the chase together to cut up the stag. The -Couture is the Heads of Two Soldiers seen in profile, and though of no -importance as subject, is a good example of his method. - -The school of Fontainebleau, or more properly speaking, of Barbizon, -is represented by the large “Dante and Virgil,” a companion in size to -the “Orpheus” of the Cottier collection in New York, but by no means so -fine a work. There is no important work by Millet at present, although -there have been here some good examples from time to time, and especially -his “Sower,” the fine _replica_ of that picture belonging to Mr. Quincy -A. Shaw, with other smaller subjects, particularly a Sheep-shearing, a -picture in which all that is best in Millet was to be seen. - -The picture gallery at the Museum is such a movable feast that it -would be useless to attempt a catalogue of its contents. Just now the -“Automedon taming the Horses of Achilles,” by Baptiste Regnault, the -“Joan of Arc,” by Bastien Lepage, and “The Walk by the River Side,” by -Henri Lerolle, are among the most noticeable of the contents of the -large room, although there are a number of smaller pictures that are -well worth looking at. There is an effort making to purchase the picture -by Regnault, and the Lerolle was presented to the Museum in 1884 by Mr. -Francis C. Foster. - -The remaining rooms in this portion of the building are a small one -in which some fine old Dutch paintings are exhibited, and those which -contain the Gray collection of engravings. The Dutch pictures, it is -hoped, will one day belong to the Museum; they will form a valuable -addition to its collection. - -The Gray collection fills the room which runs along the southern side of -this wing answering to the large picture gallery which is parallel with -it on the north. This collection, formed for the late Francis C. Gray -by M. Thies, a German connoisseur, is one of the two or three important -collections of prints that are owned in America, and in some departments -is excelled by none, while the fact that there is a fund derived from -moneys left by Mr. Gray, which is devoted to the maintenance and increase -of the collection, gives it the advantage over all others here, and -ensures its one day becoming of national importance. It is already very -rich in Rembrandts and Dürers, but the aim of those who have it in charge -is to make it representative in its character, not of any one school in -particular but of all the schools and styles of engraving which have -existed. The collection is under the intelligent care of Mr. Edward -H. Greenleaf, who makes the contents of the portfolios useful to the -public by a series of exhibitions of the finest specimens of the various -schools, accompanied with titles, notes, and instructive memoranda, so -that in default of proper space for doing full justice to the collection -in any permanent way, the course of the year brings before the eyes of -students and visitors a considerable number of the prints, and thus makes -no slight contribution to general enlightenment on the subject. - -The next paper in this series will take up the Metropolitan Museum of New -York. - - - - -SANITARY CONDITION OF SUMMER RESORTS. - -BY THE HON. B. G. NORTHROP, LL.D. - - -The progress of modern civilization is marked by increasing attention to -the sanitary condition of cities, towns and homes. Barbaric races are -comparatively puny and short lived. Very old men are seldom found among -savages, and the rate of mortality bears some proportion to the degree of -barbarism, while early deaths everywhere diminish as the art and science -of sanitation advance. The increase of knowledge and the influence of -Christianity have greatly lengthened human life. Science is constantly -showing how many diseases and deaths are preventable. These facts are -abundantly established by statistics in all the most educated nations, -and, more recently, by the careful investigations of life insurance -companies and public boards of health. There has been a far greater -advance in sanitary science during the last fifty years than in any -previous century. But the popular appreciation of this science, though -steadily advancing, has not kept pace with its discoveries. The pressing -demand now is the diffusion of the art of sanitation—the practical -application of its methods by the people at large. The public press, the -daily, weekly and monthly journals are doing much in this direction. -Some of the most widely circulated religious journals have a column -regularly devoted to this subject. Our schools are helping on this good -work, and here the art of promoting health and prolonging life should be -learned and then applied in the family. Such principles, though they seem -truisms to the scientist, should be taught to our youth, who should early -memorize mottoes like the following: “Health is the prime essential to -success.” “The first wealth is health.” “The health of the people is the -foundation upon which all their happiness and all their power depend.” -“The material precedes and conditions the intellectual.” The school -may do more to popularize sanitary science than any other one agency. -When this work is once done here, it will not long be true that a large -proportion of our people are still living in ignorance and violation of -so many of the essential laws of health. The _popular_ neglect of such -laws should not be overlooked in our gratification at their discovery. - -Our wisest sanitarians affirm that more than one fourth of the diseases -which still afflict modern life are preventable. Great prominence has -recently been given to this subject in England and other European -countries. Dr. Simon, chief medical officer of the English Privy Council, -says that “the deaths which we in each year register in this country -(now about five hundred thousand) are fully a hundred and twenty-five -thousand more numerous than they would be, _if existing knowledge_ of -the chief causes of disease, as affecting masses of population, were -reasonably well applied throughout England.” With our larger population, -probably a still larger number of lives in America might be prolonged by -the more general observance of the laws of health. If 125,000 needless -deaths occur annually, that implies 3,500,000 needless sicknesses, there -being on an average twenty-eight cases of sickness to every death. Saying -nothing of the hopes thus blasted and the hearts and homes desolated, the -mere money value of the lives thus prematurely ended every year would -amount to many millions of dollars, often involving the abandonment of -lucrative enterprises, and inducing poverty if not pauperism. In this -lowest view, it costs to be sick and it costs to die. - -Modern civilization relates specially to the homes and social life of the -people, to their health, comfort and thrift, their intellectual and moral -advancement. In earlier times and other lands men were counted in the -aggregate and valued as they helped to swell the revenues or retinues -of kings and nobles. The government was the unit, and each individual -only added one to the roll of serfs or soldiers. With us the individual -is the unit, and the government is _for_ the people, as well as by the -people. This interest in the people has been manifested in new laws for -protecting their health, and by the general organization of State and -local Boards of Health. - -Their investigations have embraced not only the needs of cities, towns -and individual homes, but have revealed startling facts as to the -unsanitary condition, and consequently the peril, of certain summer -resorts. Cases of loss of life from the burning of hotels have led to -the enactment of laws requiring fire escapes. On account of disasters -by the explosion of steam boilers, all steamboats are required to get a -“bill of safety” from an official expert examiner. But the violations of -sanitary laws in boarding houses, hotels and summer resorts have produced -annually far more sickness and death than have such fires and explosions. -The circumstantial horrors connected with these sudden and terrible -disasters produce a deep and lasting impression, and prompt to stringent, -preventive laws, while the deaths from bad sanitary conditions, though -more numerous, are so isolated as to attract little notice. The patronage -of summer resorts is already so large, and is so rapidly increasing from -year to year, as to multiply their number and increase their attractions. -This summer migration from city to country is more than a fashion, and -is favored by such substantial reasons as to insure its permanence and -growth. Even city clerks have their fortnight’s vacation for rest and -refreshment by the seaside or among the hills and mountains. There is a -greater exodus of teachers and members of all professions during their -longer vacations—still more, families, and especially those having -young children, seek this escape from the heat, dust, and miasmatic -exhalations of the crowded city. Though their children may have attended -the kindergarten in the city, they find the best sort of kindergarten -in the open fields and varied objects of the country, with its wider -range for rambles and those freer sports that are so attractive to every -wide-awake boy, such as boating, fishing, hunting, watching turtles, -gathering bugs and butterflies, roaming in the woods, taking long -excursions on the lakes or rivers, climbing steep hills and rocky cliffs, -loving flowers, observing the properties of plants and trees, and the -names, habits, retreats and voices of the birds. Living much in the open -air, nature becomes the great educator, and for the summer at least, the -country proffers superior advantages for the physical, mental and moral -training of youth. The boy, for example, who observes the birds so as to -distinguish them by their beak, claws, form, plumage, song or flight has -gained an invaluable habit of accurate observation never acquired while -cooped up in a city. - -The apprehension of cholera during the present summer is likely to -increase the patronage of rural resorts. The condition of some dense -centers of population invites this pest. Its most terrible ravages last -summer in Naples, Marseilles and Toulouse occurred in the squalid dens -so long the reproach of those cities. Our summer retreats should all -be health resorts in fact as well as in name. Yet many of them—little -villages in winter, with a population of a few scores or hundreds—are too -often ill-prepared to be suddenly expanded into cities with a population -of many thousands, during the hottest and most trying months of the year. -Several State Boards of Health, within a few years, have examined many -watering-places and have been reluctantly compelled to make startling -statements as to their unsanitary conditions. - -In some cases these unwholesome and unwelcome discoveries, though a -surprise and regret to the owners, were accepted as facts, and the -needful remedies promptly applied. In other instances, such disagreeable -revelations awakened resentment and were treated as absurd alarms or -slanderous attacks, and ignorance and prejudice held their ground -undisturbed. - -In regard to one famous resort the State Board of Health of Massachusetts -said six years ago: “The unsanitary grounds invite a pestilence. They -violate the plainest teachings of hygienic common sense. There is no -adequate provision for the removal of refuse, and the wells and privies -are everywhere in close proximity, and some of the latter are immense -and offensive affairs, emptied only once a year, in the absence of the -summer boarders. At a large boarding house the sink drain empties on the -ground within three feet of the well, and at another, the well is within -a foot of an open trough sink drain, so filled and obstructed that the -water sets back, and a filthy puddle surrounds the well.” These were -mostly driven wells, reaching water from eight to twenty feet below the -surface. The theory was, that the foulest water would be fully filtered -by the soil above and around a driven well. The peddlers of this patent, -with their boastful advertisements, are in a measure responsible for -this mischievous error, which I have met in many states. I found a large -hotel beyond the Missouri River, where, instead of even a cess-pool, -the kitchen drainage gathered in a surface pool close to the well. At -a bakery in another resort the sink drain and cess-pool are but twelve -feet from the well. Twenty-four privies and thirteen cess-pools are -within a radius of 140 feet of a well used by many families. When the -water from forty wells was analyzed, the chemical examination proved that -sixteen of them were bad and unsafe. The official State report for 1879 -contains many pages of similar details. In fifteen days after the State -Board of Health called attention to the results of this investigation, -the citizens held a town meeting, at which it was _unanimously_ voted -that the Board of Health of this town should adopt all proper methods -to perfect and enforce stringent sanitary regulations, and promising -them their most cordial support in all reasonable efforts they may -make in the furtherance of this end. The Board of Health of another -well-known resort, after a careful examination of the sanitary condition -of Oak Bluffs and Martha’s Vineyard Camp-grounds, frankly said that -“unless proper remedial measures were carried out, the abandonment of -the place, as a residence for health, is but a question of time.” The -State Board subsequently commended this local board for adopting wise -sanitary regulations and carrying them out with such energy that the high -reputation of the place as a health resort might be preserved. - -The same report says: “It must not be taken for granted that this -condition of things is confined to one place. Visits to various seaside -resorts of a similar character on both north and south shores show little -change for the better. Many individual cases are worse.” - -The official inspection of many such summer resorts revealed sickening -details connected with the large hotels and boarding houses. One hundred -and fifty summer houses examined were, almost without exception, -objectionable, on the score of danger to health, due in part to foul air, -but more to contaminated well water. There is always a risk in the use -of such water, and the only safe rule is to make privies and cess-pools -absolutely tight, and frequently empty and disinfect them, so that they -_can not_ poison the water supply. Nearly every State health report -abounds in instances of the outbreak of typhoid fever due to bad well -water, and one affirms that the majority of wells in the rural districts -of that state are tainted. - -As is my custom, in order to adapt my lectures on “Village Improvements” -to local needs, I made a cursory inspection of the streets and private -grounds in the town of ⸺, which revealed a prolific source of peril to -its citizens. Though I had heard nothing of the actual experience of the -place, I spoke in strong terms of the danger of an early outbreak of -typhoid fever and diphtheria, from the proximity of vaults and wells. -After the lecture I was informed that such a dire visitation had already -desolated many homes, but it was regarded as “a mysterious visitation -of Providence,” and nothing was done to abate the obvious cause of the -pestilence. I find it exceedingly difficult to convince men of any danger -from their water supply. They are apt to resent a disparagement of their -wells as they would of their children, and yet I seldom inspect a town -where there is not found urgent need of the warning, “LOOK CAREFULLY -TO YOUR WELLS.” Gross sanitary defects are often found even around the -homes of isolated farmers, with every natural advantage for drainage and -healthfulness. Hence I advise that securing “better sanitary conditions -in our homes and surroundings” be made prominent among the various -objects of the “Village Improvement Associations” organized in many -states, and now numbering nearly three hundred. - -The unsanitary condition of Memphis invited the terrible scourge of -yellow fever in 1878. The occurrence of four thousand deaths in one -season compelled attention to the cause and remedy. If Memphis was then -the filthiest and sickliest city of the South, it now claims to be the -healthiest. The case demanded and received “heroic treatment.” Over -forty-two miles of sewers have been built, on the most approved plan, -with one hundred and ninety automatic flushing tanks, each discharging -one hundred and twelve gallons of water twice a day. While collecting -facts for a lecture there on “The Needs of Memphis,” I inspected the -city, and especially the “man-holes,” in company with the city engineer, -who had supervised their construction, and found in none of them any -offensive odor. These improvements were costly, but the recent rapid -growth of this city in population and wealth proves that these liberal -expenditures were wise investments. The “death-pool” of 1878 now justly -aspires to be a health resort. An excellent sewer system, with automatic -flushing tanks, is now in use in Denver, Colorado. I made a similar -examination of the man-holes there last October, with similar results, -and received the testimony of a prominent physician, to the marked -diminution of zymotic diseases since the completion of the new sewers. - -Cumulative evidence on the danger of using tainted water might be given -to an indefinite extent, like the following: Thirty-one out of one -hundred inmates of a convent in Munich, affected with typhoid fever; the -outbreak of typhoid fever in Princeton, New Jersey, two years ago; the -fearful epidemic at Waupun, Wisconsin, in April last, and the terrible -pestilence now desolating Plymouth, Pa. are all attributed to infected -water. In Plymouth nearly one hundred persons have already died, and -over one thousand have been prostrated—in the opinion of the physicians, -poisoned by water pollution. Such facts should everywhere prompt to -sanitary precautions, and enforce the motto, “Eternal vigilance is the -price of public health.” - -In a popular summer resort of Massachusetts there occurred eighty cases -of typhoid fever during 1881, out of a population of only 1,500. The -citizens were alarmed, and prompt and thorough investigation discovered -and removed the cause. The mischief had been done mainly by tainted -water. The remedies suggested by the board of health—clearing of -premises, securing of better drainage and plumbing, removing of all -decomposing matter, abolishing all cess-pools and leaching vaults, -draining marshes and pumping out and cleansing all wells and cisterns -that afforded chemical evidence of being tainted—were energetically -applied. The owners of these beautiful cottages and villas spared no -effort or expense to restore this attractive resort to its former -salubrity. If any community of its size was ever more earnest, prompt and -united in such a work of restoration, I should be glad to learn its name. -In the face of peculiar difficulties on this rocky peninsula, nearly -five miles of sewers were constructed. Hundreds of chemical analyses of -the drinking water were made. Of the wells and cisterns so examined, -nearly sixty per cent. contained water unfit for drinking or cooking. As -a result of this renovation, the local board of health is quoted in the -Massachusetts report for 1883 as saying: “These vigorous correctionary -measures completely checked the epidemic, and not a single case of the -fever has since appeared here that could not be traced to some other -locality for its origin.” - -Another seaside city, much resorted to in summer, with a regular -population of over 3,000, after suffering severely from zymotic -diseases, especially typhoid fever, requested the State Board of Health -to investigate the cause of this excessive mortality. Nine tenths of -the population here are crowded in one village of small area, having -many narrow streets, with small house lots, necessitating a dangerous -proximity of cess-pools, privy vaults and wells. This danger is increased -by the nature of the soil, mostly sand or gravel, that facilitates -rapid percolation. The climate itself is pronounced more equable and -salubrious than that of any other part of the State, and therefore -specially attractive to the health-seeker. The mean winter temperature is -seven degrees warmer than that of Cambridge. The insular position of the -town, and the sensible proximity of the Gulf Stream lend their combined -influence to modify the extremes of temperature, such as exist in the -inland parts of the State. The summer temperature of the water upon its -shores renders sea-bathing recreative, invigorating and pleasurable, even -to the delicate invalid. With such rare natural advantages for salubrity, -the high death rate is traced to preventable causes. The water of eleven -wells showed, on chemical analysis, a great degree of pollution. The -remedial plans, prepared at the suggestion of the State Board of Health, -were submitted to the action of the town meeting held February, 1884, -and were favorably received. But at a subsequent meeting, this favorable -action was reconsidered, and since that time no action has been taken. - -The last two reports of the State Board of Health of New Jersey contain -valuable accounts of the sanitary investigations of the health resorts -of that state. The following statements are abbreviated from these -volumes. Within thirty miles of New York City is to be found half the -population of the state of New Jersey. Of this number, according to the -judgment of engineers, chemists, physicians, and boards of health, not -one half are supplied with water fit to drink. As our risks from impure -water are even more than those from ordinary impure air, it behooves -all to guard against any contamination of potable water. If there is -a neglect of sanitary care, and especially of a good water supply, it -is too late to adopt the policy of concealment, or to point to a death -rate of from twenty-six to thirty as a justification, when so large a -city as London can point to a death rate of only twenty per thousand, -and many an English town of 30,000 inhabitants, to a death rate of only -sixteen or eighteen. The sea coast of New Jersey, more than that of -any other state, abounds in popular summer resorts. The State Board of -Health has carefully inspected these resorts, notified the proprietors -of existing defects, and reported them to the public when they were not -remedied. Their first visits were often occasions of protest, and even of -denunciation on the part of proprietors, many of whom, on sober second -thought, were convinced of the truth, and corrected the evils complained -of. The latest inspection says that the sanitary condition of most of -these places has been greatly improved. In 1883 it is said of ⸺, where -are six hotels and over one hundred cottages, “This locality shows no -improvement in its care of sanitary conditions. No skilled attention is -given to drainage. The water supply is mostly from driven wells, which -are generally surface wells. Privy vaults are of the crudest description. -Slop water is disposed of in cess-pools, often in close proximity to -wells. This sanitary lawlessness has not been without its deleterious -results.” The last report speaks of the same place as improving, but -there are still some sanitary defects. - -One popular resort shows some marked improvements. While some of the -large hotels have still rows of cess-pools, they are kept in better -condition than formerly. Still it has not equaled expectation in its -efforts to provide a much needed system of sewerage. The hotels exhibit -some of the very best and some of the very worst methods for the disposal -of water-closet refuse. In one hotel enormous brick vaults had no modes -of ventilation, and nothing but the shortness of the season protects -the inmates. These New Jersey resorts are no worse than those in other -states, and as a rule are salubrious and most desirable retreats, but -the self-satisfied carelessness of some wealthy owners of hotel property -has made light of these defects, and they have been tardy in their -correction. Visitors in such hotels, before taking rooms, should have an -expert make a sanitary inspection in their behalf. - -These facts from different states clearly show that the sanitary -condition of summer resorts is the question of first importance to all -who frequent them, and that a rural location, naturally salubrious, -has often proved a death-pool when made the home of a dense crowd in -the hottest months of the year. This frequent outbreak of preventable -diseases in large watering places proves the necessity of applied hygiene -in such resorts, where the management often betrays gross ignorance or -carelessness on this vital point. - -In this respect the Assembly grounds at Chautauqua form a happy -exception. Some details may suggest the changes and plans needed -elsewhere. Last summer, while meeting lecture appointments there, I made -a cursory inspection of the grounds around each of the four hundred -and twenty-eight cottages in this “city in a forest,” including its -numerous boarding houses. The village is very compact, and the cottages -are sometimes too closely crowded together. But everywhere the sanitary -conditions are admirable. The three essentials—pure air, pure soil, and -pure water—are well assured. Special effort is made to guard these three -“Ps.” No old fashioned privies are _now_ allowed. The last two nuisances -of this sort were removed while I was on the grounds. Some ten public -vaults are located at convenient points, each built of stone or brick, -laid in cement, and thus made water tight. Each is _daily_ supplied with -disinfectants, and emptied every other night, and then well cleansed with -water. There are sixty-seven private vaults, made in like manner, water -tight, and frequently emptied. The water-closet pipes emptying into them -are said to be all carefully trapped. The waste is conveyed by night to -farms far away from the grounds. - -Every family is required to provide a barrel for garbage, kitchen slops -and wash water, which is emptied _daily_. No soiled water may be thrown -on the grounds. The daily inspection detects any violation of this rule. -There are no alleys, lanes, back yards or dumping grounds where garbage -can be thrown and secreted. There is no filth-saturated soil, and the -atmosphere is not tainted with the gases of decay. The decaying leaves, -so abundant in this forest city, are removed or burned. - -Numerous wells, carefully guarded from surface drainage, and eight -springs furnish pure water. Borings some thirty feet deep, near the -engine house by the lake, have opened three flowing springs, the water -in five-inch pipes rising seven feet above the lake. This proves to be -a mineral water (pronounced by Dr. Edwards, the lecturer on chemistry, -a wholesome chalybeate tonic), is forced into a large tank on the hill, -and thence distributed in pipes near the surface over the grounds free -to all. There was little to criticise in the sanitary condition of the -grounds, and the few suggestions which I made were promptly carried out -by the efficient superintendent. - - - - -WAYSIDE HOMES. - -BY HELEN CAMPBELL. - - -No form of charitable work undertaken in this busy century holds more -perplexity and uncertainty than that for women, who, whether for great or -small offenses, have come under the ban of the law, and who pass from the -shadow of the prison to confront a public feeling which is, in the main, -so absolutely antagonistic as to leave small chance for reform, or hope -of making new and better place. - -It is certain that there is much justification for such feeling. There -are few in whom the missionary spirit is strong enough to enable them to -accept undaunted, the possibilities involved in receiving as a member -of the family, a woman whose desire for reform may be outweighed a -thousand times by the power of her appetites, and whose influence may -bring contamination to all within its reach. Even in less dangerous -cases, where youth and ignorance are the excuses for the violation of -law, there is always the fear that association with older offenders has -given a knowledge of evil that will work equal disaster, and thus the -door is as effectually closed against the slight as against the confirmed -transgressor. It is part of the popular conviction that work for women -is far less productive of results than work for men, a conviction that -has a certain foundation of truth. Even in the Water Street Mission of -New York, in which the most apparently hopeless class was reached and -held, McAuley was constantly baffled by this fact, and in time accepted -it as inevitable. He did not question, more than other workers have done, -why this was so, or how far the world was responsible for the state of -things he bewailed, but came at last, by almost unconscious steps, to the -conclusion given in a talk with the writer. - -“You’ve wondered, at times, that we didn’t have more women here,” he -said, a year or two before his death. “Don’t you know that you can haul -in a hundred men to one woman? What it means, the good Lord only knows, -but they don’t stay put. They cry an’ promise, an’ promise an’ cry, -an’ you do for ’em with all your might, an’ all at once they’re off, -an’ may be you never see ’em again.… When a girl’s once down, it isn’t -once in five hundred times that you can pull her out. Take that very -one you was so sorry for. She’s been to every meeting ’round here, an’ -cried an’ begged to be helped. She’s been taken first to one ‘Home’ an’ -then to another, an’ she’s run from every one back to her old life. The -system’s wrong. That’s my opinion. You take a ‘Home’ where a lot are in -together, an’ the devil’s let loose. They chew tobacco an’ chew snuff, -an’ get drunk on the sly, an’ the old ones tell the young ones all their -lives, an’ the last end is worse than the first, for they learn a lot of -deviltry to add to their own. There ain’t but one way, as I can see, to -save ’em. Keep ’em apart. Let Christian families that can, make up their -minds to take one at a time; hedge her round; give her enough to do, an’ -get her interested, an’ pray night an’ day she may be kept. That will -save a good many, for it’s mostly worked where it’s been tried. But there -ain’t anything in our work so discouragin’ as this very thing. What you -going to do? These girls comin’ out of homes where a dozen, may be, has -herded in one room, what do they know of decency or cleanliness? What -can they know, I’d like to know? No, I tell you; the work’s got to begin -at the beginning. Get hold of the children. Send them off. Do anything -that’ll train them differently. They’re born in sin and born to sin, and -the Lord only knows what’ll come if good men and women don’t wake up and -take hold.” - -Admitting the serious nature of the difficulties involved, it is quite -certain that many of them have been born of an utterly false estimate -of the relative degrees of guilt in men and women. Neither time nor -space allows discussion of this point beyond the suggestion that in the -present White Cross movement, and the questions that at once arise as -the first necessity in any understanding of its nature or need, may be -found the secret of much that has made against women. Simple justice, the -last acquired and, it would seem, the hardest won of all virtues, makes -chastity as binding an obligation upon man as upon woman, and gives to -both, when repentant, the same pardon and the same hope for a future. -Thus far, charity has ignored the woman, forcing her to bear not only the -pain and sorrow of unblessed motherhood, but the sentence of perpetual -banishment from the society whose laws she has defied. - -It is at this stage that workers among the poor most often find her, -hopeless, and in the large proportion of cases driven back to crime as -her only resort. They form a great proportion of the inmates of any -prison for women. Every town and village has its quota of candidates for -reformatory or jail, and mourns, collectively and individually, over the -terrible tendencies of this class, with small thought that prevention -may be easier than cure, and that if children born to such conditions -come into the world, society is bound to see that their training shall, -as far as possible, neutralize the results of such inheritance. Society -has no time for prevention. It proposes to pay for prisons rather than -for industrial schools; to labor with full fledged criminals, rather -than to crush out vice while still in embryo, and congratulates itself -on the magnificent liberality of its provision for the criminal, and the -remarkable success of the prison system as a whole. - -Women are supposed to be merely occasional offenders, and that there -are, in every state, hundreds outside of the prison who are habitual -law breakers, and an equally large proportion within its walls, is a -proposition received as incredible. Yet it was not till Massachusetts -found herself forced to deal with eight hundred per year of such cases, -that the first reformatory was organized, in 1865, and the number has -increased steadily with the increase in population. County prisons, -of which there were twenty-one, were, too often, simply nests for -propagating vice. In a few of the larger ones great order and system -prevailed. In the smaller ones there was next to none, and male and -female prisoners, dirty, ragged and obscene, mingled together and -interchanged lessons in new forms of vice. In all of them three classes -of offenses were to be found, women convicts being sentenced usually for -drunkenness, unchastity, or larceny; the relative prevalence of the three -being indicated by the order in which they are given. The first class, -wherever found, are most often Irish women, at, or past, the middle age. -They are not criminals, though at times, in some cases, dishonest or -unchaste. Often they are eager to reform, and yield to the temptation to -drink as many men yield, for the momentary relief from grinding care and -anxiety. Many of them become accustomed to the short sentences usually -given by magistrates for this offense, and there are countless women -who have had thirty, forty, and even fifty short imprisonments. A long -term, or, in aggravated cases, imprisonment for life, affords the only -security, the mere smell of liquor being often enough to awaken appetite -and bring on a wild debauch. The three crimes can in almost every case be -traced back to a neglected childhood. - -“My mother died whan I was a bit of a child, an’ my father drank and beat -me,” is the story of nine tenths of these cases, and will remain the -story. The life of a single great tenement house, if told in full, as -it has recently been done, shows how the seed is sown, and what harvest -we may expect, and prison systems, however admirable, can touch but the -smallest proportion of those who come within their walls. And even here, -in this system, which deserves all the eulogy it receives, women have had -but the most meager share of the benefit intended. It is only here and -there that, spurred on by some great souled woman, wrought to white heat -of indignation at the suffering and ignominy heaped upon these weak and -most miserable sisters, there has grown up a better system of treatment, -or a refuge in which reform has been made possible. Even to-day, in -cities where reform is supposed to have perfected itself, there are -Houses of Detention, at the mention of which compassionate judges shake -their heads, and use any and every pretext to avoid condemning, for even -a week, a young girl guilty of some first and slight offense, to their -unspeakably infamous walls. Who enters there leaves hope behind, and -life in any real sense, is over, once for all, for the sad soul that has -learned what awaits it there. - -In a little town of Massachusetts, many phases of this question have long -since been answered. The work is so quietly carried forward that few -save those interested in philanthropic problems have any knowledge of -its nature or scope. In the belief that its story will awaken, not only -interest, but stronger faith in the possibilities of reform, its outlines -are given here. From its success grew the greater work which makes the -title of the present article, a work which would have seemed well nigh -impossible had not such demonstration first been made of its entire -feasibility. - -Practically, its foundation was laid in Dedham, thirty years or more -ago, where a temporary asylum was afforded to women just discharged from -prison, and much the same methods were adopted in the Springfield “Home -for Friendless Women.” But as one of the most efficient workers wrote at -the time: “The more thoughtful saw from the first that they were working -only at the top of the tree, and must go to the root to accomplish real -good in large measure. The necessity of making the term of imprisonment -one also of instruction, was apparent; also the vital need of purifying -the corrupted by personal contact with pure and good women, laboring -among them in a spirit of love and sympathy.” - -It was not until 1870 that, after a preliminary meeting in Boston, -officered by some of her most earnest citizens, a memorial was presented -to the legislature, in which the need was set forth of better prisons for -women, and of a reformatory discipline for all criminals. This was called -“The Memorial of the Temporary Asylum for Discharged Female Prisoners in -Dedham, and of the Springfield Home for Friendless Women and Children, -and of others concurring with them.” The names of Whittier, Henry Wilson, -Bishop Eastburn, and many others equally noble, were affixed, and the -almost immediate result was the establishment of the Prison Commission -of the state, and a few years later, the building of the separate prison -for women at Sherborn. Thirty acres of land were purchased here, and the -prison was placed upon a knoll, from which one of the finest views in -the county may be had, a neighboring pond giving a full supply of pure -water, and the facilities for drainage being excellent. The form chosen -for building was a cross, with two more transverse sections, one at the -front, and one for hospital purposes, at the rear. But forty-eight strong -cells for the more refractory class were built, the majority occupying -small, separate rooms, divided by brick partitions, and each owning a -window. The basement has two large laundries, one for prison, the other -for outside use, the latter bringing in a comfortable income toward -the support of the prison. Over this laundry is the prison kitchen and -bakery, the work in both being done by the prisoners, under supervision. -Above this, in the third story, is the large hall used as a chapel, and -a library adjoining it, while the second story contains two large work -rooms, one for sewing, and the other for making chair bottoms. Sewing -machines are in the first one, and here all the clothing for the prison -is made, as well as a good deal for another institution. A school room is -also on this floor, occupied six hours a day, the women going to it in -classes, each class having an hour’s instruction a day. Here many take -their first lessons in reading and writing; easy arithmetic and geography -are also taught. - -The prison has four divisions, for the classification of convicts, the -three higher ones each containing what is known as a “privilege room,” -the prisoners who have obeyed the rules being allowed to spend an hour -each evening under the supervision of the matrons, before they are -locked in for the night. Four cheerful dining rooms are provided, and -unlike the county jails, where prisoners eat alone from a tin pan, the -women gather, under the supervision of matrons, each with neat plate and -basin, learning order and decorum, and in many cases having their first -experience of clean and palatable food. The matrons have comfortable -rooms, commanding a view of the corridors, and a private dining room and -kitchen in the basement. A parlor on the second floor is also at their -disposal, thirty matrons and assistants using it in such intervals of -leisure as come. - -The chief officers may be either men or women, at the pleasure of -the Governor, these being superintendent, steward and treasurer, the -remainder being all women, and including a deputy superintendent, a -chaplain, a physician, school mistress, and clerk. The wishes of the -founders were carried out in making the superintendent a woman, Mrs. -Edna C. Atkinson’s name having become the synonym for patient and most -faithful labor in this untried field. There are others as worthy, but -with her, they shrink from any public recognition, content to have laid -silently the foundation of a work which is copied in detail wherever the -same results are desired. - -The hospital is a model of its kind, three stories in height, and -thirty-two feet wide by seventy-seven long. The dispensary and wash -room, the doctor’s sitting room and some small wards for special cases -are on the first floor. The second one has a large ward, sunny and airy, -with space for twenty beds, and at one side bath rooms, and a small -room where the dead are laid until burial. The convalescent ward is on -the third floor, and in each and all, is the exquisite neatness which -is a revelation to every occupant. Of the physical misery that finds -alleviation here, one can hardly speak. “Intemperance, unchastity, abuse -from male companions, neglected childbirth, hereditary taints, poor food -and clothing,” have all done their work, and demand all the skill the -physician can bring to bear. The work is hard and often repulsive, but -the sick prisoner is especially susceptible to influence, and often, when -all means have been tried in vain, yields at last under the pressure -of pain and gratitude for its relief, and goes out from the ward a new -creature spiritually as well as physically. - -From the beginning they are made to feel that here is one spot where love -and sympathy are certain. There is no convict dress branding them at once -as infamous. Each division has its own; blue check of different patterns -being chosen to distinguish the different grades. The upper ones have -neat white aprons for Sundays. Night dresses and pocket handkerchiefs -are provided to teach neatness, and every woman is required to have -smooth hair and a well-cared-for person. In the nursery, an essential -department of a woman’s prison, the babies show well fed, happy faces, -and are as neatly and warmly clothed as the mothers. This department -has sixty rooms, each ten by twelve, with a bed and crib for mothers -with infants, while above it is a lying-in ward, with all necessary -appliances. Often there is not the slightest hint of maternal instinct, -and the mother must be watched to prevent the destruction of the child, -but more often it is strong, and desire for reform is first awakened with -the longing that the child should know a better life. The bright, clean -quarters, the regular employment, the sympathy and encouragement, on -which, no matter how skeptical or scoffing in the beginning, they come -to depend, all foster this desire. Indifferent even to common decency -in the beginning, unknown instincts awaken, and here is one answer to -the argument sometimes made, that criminals have no right to attractive -quarters. Here, again, the same worker already quoted may speak: “In the -first place, the loss of liberty is a terrible privation, especially when -the term of confinement is long. Most persons will bear any hardship -rather than be confined, even in a pleasant place. The depraved women -of our prisons are indifferent, at first, to the things which please a -higher taste. The dark and filthy slums of Boston are far more charming -to them than the clean and sunny prison. The work is hateful to their -idle habits, and being unpaid, it has no motive to incite them to -performance. The silent, separate rooms, the quiet work room, try them -inexpressibly. There is no danger that the prison will be too tempting. -They long for the intoxicating drink, the low carousals of their usual -life, and when discharged from an ordinary prison, with no reformatory -influence, eagerly rush into the old haunts, and begin anew the foul -life.… Ferocious, indeed, are they, when long habits of intoxication, -joined to ignorance and strong passions, are subjected to the restraints -of a prison.” - -“No woman can govern a ferocious woman,” was asserted in the -beginning, by a well known Senator; but that point settled itself -years since, women having proved better able to control women, no -matter how brutalized, than any man has ever been. In one case a woman -was sent from a neighboring prison, who came determined to create -disturbance. Insurrection seemed inevitable, such passion of revolt -had she communicated to many, but wise management quelled it at once. -Three strong men were necessary to convey her from the yard to the -punishment cell, but this was done under the personal direction of the -superintendent, and the men were allowed no violence or abuse. For days -she remained unsubdued; then quieted, and at the end of ten was conquered -and transformed into a quiet, orderly, obedient worker. - -“She was that patient and kind she did all she could for me,” was her -comment on the superintendent, and her case is illustrative of dozens of -the same nature. Nothing impresses them more than the unselfish nature -of the care bestowed, and as their skill in manual labor develops, -their interest grows with it, and they begin to take pride in what may -be accomplished. They are ready, when the term of confinement ends, to -lead decent lives, but they must be shielded for a time, else ruin is -inevitable. - -Here, then, comes in the mission of a “Wayside Home.” The thought of -such shelter came many years ago, to the man who gave all his life to -making paths plainer for sinning and suffering souls, and who in the -“Isaac Hopper Home,” as often called the “Father Hopper Home,” solved -the problem in a degree. Even here, however, admission was conditioned -on a letter or word of endorsement, and there was no spot in all the -great city in which a homeless and friendless woman, without such word, -could find temporary refuge. It remained for Brooklyn to offer such a -possibility, and the quiet home that in the early spring of 1880 opened -its doors, asked but three questions: - -“Do you need help?” - -“Are you homeless?” - -“If taken in, will you remain a month, keep the necessary rules of the -house, and do your share of its work?” - -These question are “the hinge on which the door swings, and when once a -woman crosses its threshold she stands on her honor, and is trusted just -as far as she will allow.” - -Cramped for room, dependent upon voluntary contributions for furnishing, -provisions, and all the running expenses of such an undertaking, -the first year found them without debt, and with ninety-nine women -sheltered and protected, sixty-two of whom found places, and, with -but few exceptions, proved faithful and worthy of trust. During the -second year two hundred and twenty-four were helped, cramped quarters -forcing the managers to refuse many applications. Half of the income -for that year was earned by the inmates, in laundry, sewing room, and -days’ work outside. A larger house was taken, but the same principle of -free admission continued. Many who left the Home voluntarily, and some -even who had been expelled, returned, penitent and sorrowful, and were -received again, and given another chance, the only bar to return being in -the discovery that the influence of a woman in some cases did more harm -than could be counteracted in the Home, in which case there is written -across her name, “Not to be admitted again.” - -A matron and two assistant matrons are employed, the matron having -general charge of the house, keys, and work; the first assistant, of -sewing room and laundry; and the second of the kitchen and all household -supplies. But thirty women can be accommodated at any one time, and it -is hoped that a building especially for the purpose may soon give the -added facilities so imperatively demanded. The work holds little poetry, -and the expression of some of its subjects is so debased and apparently -hopeless, that one gentleman, accustomed to give freely, remarked: “I see -nothing better to do than to tie a rope round their necks and pitch them -into the river.” - -The poor souls were themselves much of his mind, but a month or two gave -a very different aspect to affairs, work and the certainty of sympathy -bringing new life. Undisciplined and weak, in the power of appetite -both inherited and acquired, they have fought battles whose terror the -untempted can never know; fought and won, the roll now holding hundreds -of names. Working against perpetual obstacle and disadvantage, the story -of the five years is one of triumph for managers as well as managed. “We -began,” said one of the workers, “holding in one hand the key to an empty -house, for which the rent was paid for one month, and in the other hand -all our worldly possessions—five dollars—and since that time we have -bought our present home, and furnished it comfortably for our work. It -accommodates thirty-five women, and three matrons, and we have paid on -it $5,000, carrying a mortgage of $9,000. None of these things are the -ultimate of our work. They are but means to an end, and that end the -saving of the lives and souls of these women.” - -Effort of as extended a nature is possible only for a body of earnest -workers, but this mere hint of its nature and results may perhaps -convince some who have doubted its possibility, and serve as the clue -to companion methods in country towns. Faith in possibilities, both -human and divine, has been the condition of success for what is already -accomplished, and the village may test these no less than the city. -Reports filled with every practical detail may be had by addressing a -note to “The Wayside Home, 352 Bridge Street, Brooklyn, N. Y.,” and the -writer stands ready, at any time, to answer questions as to methods, -assuring all doubters that, for all patient workers, success is certain. - - * * * * * - -The finest pleasures of reading come unbidden. In the twilight alcove -of a library, with a time-mellowed chair yielding luxuriously to your -pressure, a June wind floating in at the windows, and in your hand some -rambling old author, good humored and quaint, one would think the Spirit -could scarce fail to be conjured. Yet often, after spending a morning -hour restlessly there … I have strolled off with a book in my pocket to -the woods; and, as I live, the mood has descended upon me under some -chance tree, with a crooked root under my head, and I have lain there -reading and sleeping by turns till the letters were blurred in the -dimness of twilight.—_From Prose Writings of N. P. Willis._ - - - - -SUNDAY READINGS. - -SELECTED BY CHANCELLOR J. H. VINCENT, D.D. - - -[_Sunday, July 5._] - -THE INFLUENCE OF JESUS.—(I note again, as a characteristic of the -morality of sonship, the way in which it secures humility by aspiration, -and not by depression.) How to secure humility is the hard problem -of all systems of duty. He who does work, just in proportion to the -faithfulness with which he does it, is always in danger of self-conceit. -Very often men seem to have given up the problem in despair, and they -lavish unstinted praise upon the vigorous, effective worker, without any -qualifying blame of the arrogance with which he flaunts the duty that he -does in the world’s face. “The only way to make him humble,” they would -seem to say, “would be to make him idle. Let him stop doing duty and -then, indeed, he might stop boasting. His arrogance is only the necessary -price that the world and he pay for his faithfulness.” To such a problem -the Christian morality brings its vast conception of the universe. Above -each man it sets the infinite life. The identity of nature between -that life and his, while it enables him to emulate that life, compels -him, also, to compare himself with it. The more zealously he aspires -to imitate it, the more clearly he must encounter the comparison. The -higher he climbs the mountain, the more he learns how the high mountain -is past his climbing. It is the oneness of the soul’s life with God’s -life that at once makes us try to be like him, and brings forth our -unlikeness to him. It is the source at once of aspiration and humility. -The more aspiration, the more humility. Humility comes by aspiration. -If, in all Christian history, it has been the souls which most looked -up that were the humblest souls; if to-day the rescue of a soul from -foolish pride must be not by a depreciation of present attainment, but -by opening more and more the vastness of the future possibility; if the -Christian man keeps his soul full of the sense of littleness, even in -all his hardest work for Christ, not by denying his own stature, but by -standing up at his whole height, and then looking up in love and awe and -seeing God tower into infinitude above him—certainly all this stamps the -morality which is wrought out within the idea of Jesus with this singular -excellence, that it has solved the problem of faithfulness and pride, and -made possible humility by aspiration. - -And yet, once more, the morality of Jesus involves the only true secret -of courage and of the freedom that comes of courage. More and more we -come to see that courage is a positive thing. It is not simply the -absence of fear. To be brave is not merely not to be afraid. Courage is -that compactness and clear coherence of all a man’s faculties and powers -which makes his manhood a single operative unit in the world. That is -the reason why narrowness of thought and life often brings a kind of -courage, and why, as men’s range of thought enlarges and their relations -with their fellowmen increase, there often comes a strange timidity. The -bigot is often very brave. He is held fast unto a unit, and possesses -himself completely in his own selfishness. For such a bravery as that -the man and the world pay very dear. But when the grasp that holds a -man and his powers is not his self-consciousness, but his obedience -to his Father, when loyalty to him surrounds and aggregates the man’s -capacities, so that, held in his hand, the man feels his distinctiveness, -his distinctive duty, his distinctive privilege, then you have reached -the truth of which the bigot’s courage was the imitation. Then you have -secured courage, not by the limitation, but by the enlargement of the -life. Then the dependence upon God makes the independence of man in which -are liberty and courage. The man’s own personality is found only in the -household of his Father, and only in the finding of his personality does -he come to absolute freedom and perfect fearlessness.—_Phillips Brooks._ - - -[_Sunday, July 12._] - -TRUE CHRISTIANITY.—Lord Jesus Christ, thou eternal and only Prince of -Peace! Thou most blessed and truest rest of faithful souls! Thou hast -said, Come unto me all ye that labor and are heavy laden, and ye shall -find rest to your souls. In the world ye shall have tribulation, but in -me ye shall have peace. - -Alas! how often have I sought for rest in this world, but have not found -it! For my soul, being immortal, can not rest or be satisfied with -anything but thee alone; O immortal God, thou and thou alone art the rest -of our souls. The world and all that is in it is hastening to decay; they -all wax old as doth a garment, and as a vesture shalt thou change them, -and they shall be changed; but thou art the same, and thy years shall not -fail. How then shall my soul find rest in such fleeting and changeable -things?… O God, my soul can not be satisfied but in thee, the supreme -good. My soul hungereth and thirsteth after thee, and can not rest till -it possess thee.… - -O thou rock of my salvation! in which my soul trusteth and is at rest.… - -O Lord Jesus, how ardent is thy charity! how pure, how free from deceit! -how perfect! how spotless! how great! how exalted! how profound! In a -word, how sincere and hearty is thy love! Suffer, I beseech thee, my soul -to rest in this thy love.… Here let my poor soul rest free from fear of -danger or disquiet. In thee let all my senses rest, that I may hear thee -sweetly speaking, O thou highest love! Let my eyes behold thee, O thou -celestial beauty! Let my ears hear thee, thou most harmonious music! Let -my mouth taste, thou incomparable sweetness! Let the refreshing odors -of life breathe upon me from thee, thou most noble flower of paradise!… -Let my heart rejoice in thee, my true joy! Let my will desire thee -alone, thou only joy of my heart! Let my understanding know thee alone, -O eternal wisdom! Lastly, let all my desires, all my affections rest in -thee alone, O blessed Jesus, who art my love, my peace, and my joy! - -Take out of my heart everything that is not thyself. Thou art my riches -in poverty; thou art my honor in contempt; my praise and glory against -reproaches; my strength in infirmity; and in a word, my life in death. -And how, then, should I not rest in thee, who art my all in all? My -righteousness against sin; my wisdom against folly; redemption from -condemnation; sanctification from my uncleanness.… - -Let me, I beseech thee, surrender my whole heart to thee, since thou hast -given me all thine. Let me go out of myself, that I may enter into thee. -Let me cleanse my heart and empty it of the world, that thou mayest fill -it with thy celestial gifts, O Jesus, the rest of my heart, the Sabbath -of my soul! Lead me into the rest of a blessed eternity, where there are -pleasures at thy right hand for evermore. Amen.—_Arndt, “A prayer for -obtaining true rest and tranquility of soul.”_ - - -[_Sunday, July 19._] - - For Prayer is a - Conversing with God, - The Key of Heaven, - The Flower of Paradise, - A Free Access to God, - A Familiarity with God, - The Searcher of His Secrets, - The Opener of His Mysteries, - The Purchaser of His Gifts, - A Spiritual Banquet, - A Heavenly Enjoyment, - The Honey-comb of the Spirit, - Honey Flowing from the Lips, - The Nurse of Virtues, - The Conqueror of Vices, - The Medicine of the Soul, - A Remedy against Infirmities, - An Antidote against Sin, - The Pillar of the World, - The Salve of Mankind, - The Seed of Blessing, - The Garden of Happiness, - The Tree of Pleasure, - The Increase of Faith, - The Support of Hope, - The Mother of Charity, - The Path of Righteousness, - The Preserver of Perseverance, - The Mirror of Prudence, - The Mistress of Temperance, - The Strength of Chastity, - The Beauty of Holiness, - The Fire of Devotion, - The Light of Knowledge, - The Repository of Wisdom, - The Strength of the Soul, - The Remedy against Faint-heartedness, - The Foundation of Peace, - The Joy of the Heart, - The Jubilee of the Mind, - A Faithful Companion in this Earthly Pilgrimage, - The Shield of a Christian Soldier, - The Rule of Humility, - The Forerunner of Honor, - The Nurse of Patience, - The Guardian of Obedience, - The Fountain of Quietness, - The Imitator of Angels, - The Conquest of Devils, - The Comfort of the Sorrowful, - The Triumph of the Just, - The Joy of the Saints, - The Helper of the Oppressed, - The Ease of the Afflicted, - The Rest of the Weary, - The Ornament of the Conscience, - The Advancement of Graces, - The Odor of an Acceptable Sacrifice, - The Encourager of Mutual Good-will, - The Refreshment of this Miserable Life, - The Sweetening of Death, - The Foretaste of the Heavenly Life.—_Arndt._ - - -[_Sunday, July 26._] - -SERMON ON LUKE iv, 1-13.—The _weapons_ of Jesus?—say we rather _the -weapon_—for he has but one, it is the _Word of God_. Three times tempted, -three times he repels the temptation by a simple quotation from the -Scriptures, without explanation or comment. “_It is written_”—this one -expression tells upon the tempter like a tremendous discharge upon an -assaulting battalion. “It is written”—the devil withdraws for the first -time. “It is written”—the devil withdraws for the second time. “It -is written”—the devil gives up the contest. God’s word is the weapon -which Satan most dreads—a weapon before which he has never been able -to do aught but succumb. Most justly does Paul call it the “Sword of -the Spirit;”[A] and John describes it, in the Revelation, as “a sharp, -two-edged sword, proceeding out of the mouth of the Son of man.” With -that “Sword of the Spirit” in our hands, our cause becomes that of the -Holy Spirit himself, and we shall be as superior in strength to our -adversary, as is the Spirit of God to the spirit of darkness. Without -it, on the contrary, left to ourselves, we shall be as much below him as -is man’s nature below that of angels. Adam fell, only because he allowed -this sword to drop. Jesus triumphs, because no one can wrest it from his -hand. But why is it that the Son of God, instead of meeting the enemy -with some new sword brought from the heavens whence he came, took up only -our own weapon, from that very earth where Adam had, with such cowardice, -left it? This is for our example. From what that weapon accomplished in -his hand, we must learn what it can do in ours. Let us, then, take it -up in our turn; or, rather, let us receive it from him, resharpened as -it were, by his victory, and we shall have nothing to fear. To all the -adversary’s attacks let us oppose a simple “_It is written_,” and we -shall render vain his every endeavor.… If after having heard him on the -theater of temptation, scoffing at the word of God, we could (allow me -the expression) follow him behind the scenes, and hear him confess to his -accomplices that he is lost if he can not succeed in wresting from our -hands this irresistible weapon! If we did but know all this, and if, like -the valiant Eleazar, “we could keep hold of our sword till our hand clove -unto it”—oh, then we should be invincible, yea, _invincible_!—_Monod._ - -[A] Revelation i:16; ii:16; xix:15-21; Hebrews iv:12, “The word of God is -quick and powerful, and sharper than any two-edged sword, piercing even -to the dividing asunder of soul and spirit, and of the joint and marrow, -and is a discerner of the thoughts and intents of the heart.” - - - - -“WE SALUTE THEE, AND LIVE.” - -BY MARY MATHEWS-SMITH. - - - Soldiers brave, in days of old, - Facing dangers manifold, - Looked unto their king to cry— - “Thee we do salute, and die.” - - Service for an earthly king - Other ending can not bring; - Whatso’er thy record be, - Death is all it gives to thee. - - Christian brave, where’er thy way, - Thine it is with joy to say— - “King, to whom our hearts we give, - Thee we do salute, and live.” - - Service for the heavenly King, - Love and life eternal bring; - He alone true life can give, - Him we may salute, and live. - - - - -A GROUP OF MUMMIES. - -BY OTIS T. MASON. - - -Whenever the word mummy is mentioned almost everybody thinks of Egypt -and the ancient embalmers, with their tedious processes and costly -ceremonials. The term does include the Egyptian prepared bodies, but it -does not exclude some found elsewhere. Indeed, in Washington, there will -be seen in close proximity, in the Smithsonian building, an exceedingly -dry company, made up of individuals from Alaska, Arizona, Mexico, -Kentucky, Peru, and Egypt. - -Whoever has marked the tender solicitude with which the things around us -seem to beckon us in this way or in that will understand that even the -disposal of the dead has been influenced by such suggestions. Passing -through a dense forest one seems to hear the branches and undergrowth -say: “Come this way, pass along here, we are opening to make way for -you.” Well, it is so in every human art; natural objects supply the -materials, the tools, and suggest the simplest forms. There can be no -potters where there is no clay, no chipped arrow heads where there is -no stone to flake, no wood carving in the arctic regions where grows no -timber. Yet the good people in all these places have arts, they make -excellent baskets in which they carry water and boil their meat, polished -spearheads and axes of volcanic stone, and most delicate carvings in -ivory or antler. - -As to the disposal of the dead in different regions and ages, all we -have space to say is that the voices of nature around each people have -told them how to perform this sad rite. In the frozen regions, where the -ground is never thawed, no graves are dug. By the seaside the primitive -fisherman is launched upon the wide expanse in his own canoe. In rocky -regions cairns and cists conceal the wasting form. On the soft prairie -mounds cover the dead out of sight. In those arid regions where the -rainfall does not affect the atmosphere to any extent the process of -desiccation takes place more rapidly than chemical changes. The water, -which forms the greater part of the human body, soon removes and leaves -but a few pounds of bones, dried flesh and skin. This may be called -natural mummification, the process of which is aided either by extreme -cold, extreme aridity, or preservative elements in the soil. - -In the National Museum there is the body of a little boy, lying on his -back, his feet drawn up, and all sorts of curious relics hanging in the -case with him. The body was discovered in one of the cliff ruins of the -Cañon de Chelly, Arizona. The particular ruin referred to is on a benched -recess, seventy-five feet above the cañon, and extends backward about -thirty feet. The ancient Pueblo people, driven by some invading force, -constructed their cliff houses along only a part of this bench. About -fifty feet from the walls Mr. Thomas Kearn found a little oven-like -cist composed of angular bowlders laid in clay. The rooflet consisted -of sticks supporting stones and clay. At the bottom lay the little -child, and the remains of other burials, together with grave deposits. -Here, in this last resting place, the waters escaped so quickly and so -quietly from the body that even the form of life was not disturbed nor -any chemical changes awakened. So perfectly dried is this little fellow -that even the coatings of the eye remain. This is natural embalmment -by desiccation simply. In the Peabody Museum, at Cambridge, are dried -bodies from Mexico, preserved in the same manner. Around them were their -clothing and utensils, silent and patient watchers, waiting all these -centuries to give in evidence as to how those dead people dressed, ate, -drank, worked, and warred. - -In the palmy days of our grandparents there was a desiccated body -discovered in Mammoth Cave, Kentucky. This, also, has had the good -fortune, after many peregrinations, to find its way into the Smithsonian. -Now, Mammoth Cave is a damp place, but the earth accumulated on the floor -is in places full of nitrous and other preservative salts. Indeed, the -Kentucky cave subject may be called a natural pickle. - -To Mr. William H. Dall we are indebted for bringing to light mummies -from the frozen regions. At the time of their discovery by the Russians, -the Aleuts of Unalashka had a process of mummification peculiar to -themselves. Mr. Dall informs us that they eviscerated the bodies of -those held in honor, removed the fatty matter, placed them for some -time in running water, and then lashed them into as compact a bundle as -possible. A line was placed around the neck and under the knees, to draw -them up to the chin. If any part stuck out, the bones were broken so -as to facilitate the consolidation. After this the body was thoroughly -dried and packed in a wooden crate, wrapped round and round with seal, -sea-otter, and other precious furs, enough to make a fashionable belle’s -head swim. Over these were wrapped coarser skins, waterproof cloth of -intestines, and fine grass mats. This crate was slung to upright poles, -or hung, like a wall-pocket, to a peg driven into a crevice in some cave. -In 1874 Captain E. Hennig, of the Alaska Commercial Company’s service, -found in a cave on the island of Kagamil, near Unalashka, a number of -these framed mummies, all but two of which the company presented to the -Smithsonian Institution. - -The Egypt of America for mummies is Peru. Scarcely a museum in the world -is without its dried dogs, guinea pigs, parrots, and human beings wrapped -in costly cloths, and the last mentioned wearing the greatest profusion -of gold and silver jewelry. Along with these bodies are found corn, -beans, peanuts; pottery, gourds, and silver vases; pillows, haversacks -and masks; knives, war clubs and spearheads; needles, distaffs, spindles, -work-baskets and musical cradles. Thousands and thousands of the most -interesting things turn up, almost as expressive of ancient Peruvian life -as was the library of Sennacherib, exhumed by Layard at Kouyunjik, of -Assyrian life. - -Beyond the care of the Peruvians and Bolivians in the clothing and -encysting of the dead, it is almost certain that they left them to the -atmosphere to manipulate. The work was done most effectually. Nothing -can be dryer than a Peruvian mummy. It is perfectly useless to dust the -cases containing them, and those who handle them are in a steady sneeze, -as though invisible spirits, filled with indignation, held impalpable -snuff-boxes to the nose. It is still more wonderful that insects have not -done their destructive work upon these bodies. The wrappings doubtless -were so securely made as to prevent their inroads, and must have -contained some substance to keep them away. - -In the National Museum, finally, are two Egyptian mummies. It is hard to -tell how they got into such outlandish boxes and mountings. There they -stand, nailed and screwed into narrow, white boxes, side by side, with -mouths open, as if Pompeian convulsions had seized and embalmed them by -instantaneous mummification just as the curtain was falling on a grand -duet. Now, these two bodies were really embalmed (embalsamed); all the -other mummies were simply dried up. - -The Egyptians, Peruvians, and perhaps the Alaskans preserved the bodies -as integral parts of the individual, that would be needed again. The -others simply dried up, their depositors cherishing no belief in the -resurrection of the body. - - - - -A TRIP TO MT. SHASTA. - -Report of a lecture delivered in the National Museum of Washington, D. -C., by Prof. J. S. Diller, of the U. S. Geological Survey. - - -The Great Basin Country is bounded to the westward by the Cascade Range -in Oregon and the Sierra Nevada Mountains in eastern California. The axes -of these two mountain ranges make an angle of over 140° with each other, -and at their point of intersection in northern California rises Mt. -Shasta, one of the most conspicuous and imposing topographical features -of the Pacific coast, above which it rises 14,440 feet. Early in the -days of western exploration its summit was declared to be inaccessible, -but whether this assertion was made to inspire greater respect for the -abode of the Indian gods, or to excuse a disinclination to physical -exertion, must ever remain a matter of conjecture. Certain it is that -the ascent, frequently made within the last few years by ladies is not a -remarkable feat of mountaineering. Under the direction of Captain Dutton -of the Geological Survey, a detailed exploration of the mountain has been -accomplished. - -The belt of territory bordering upon the Pacific embraces two parallel -mountain chains, the Sierra Nevada and Cascade Range on the east, and -the illy-defined Coast Range on the west. Between these lies the valley -region of the Willamette and Sacramento rivers, whose headwaters are -among that complex group of mountains through which the Klamath River, in -a deep cañon, finds its way to the sea. - -Of all the volcanic regions of the world, the one to which Mt. Shasta -belongs is the largest. It extends from Lassen’s Peak, in California, -north through Oregon to Mt. Rainier in Washington Territory, and eastward -far into Idaho, covering an area larger than that of France and Great -Britain combined. Within this wide expanse are extensive plains, whose -broad surfaces indicate that the basaltic lava beneath at the time of -its eruption possessed such a high degree of fluidity that it spread -out far and wide like the waters of a lake. Upon the western border the -more viscous lavas built up the Cascade Range, whose mammoth arch is -surmounted by numerous mighty volcanoes, among which Mt. Shasta is one of -the most prominent. - -Seen from all sides Mt. Shasta presents a remarkably regular outline, and -its beautiful conoidal form has excited the admiration of many observers. -Its slopes are exceptional for the high angle and graceful curves of -their inclination. The upper 3,000 feet of the mountain, where cliffs are -most abundant, dips away toward all points of the compass at an average -angle of 37°. Further down the mountain the slope gradually decreases in -inclination to 20°, then to 15°, 10°, and finally the long, gentle slope -about the base of the mountain deviates but 5° from a horizontal plane. -In all directions from the summit of Mt. Shasta its flanks increase in -length as they decrease in angle of inclination, presenting a curved -mountain side concave upwards, and has the greatest curvature near the -top. Mr. Gilbert, in his excellent monograph of the Henry Mountains, -shows that such a curve is the natural result of erosion. In the case of -some volcanic mountains, however, an important coöperative cause may be -found in the fact that at each successive eruption the lava decreased in -quantity and became more viscous. The grandest approach to Mt. Shasta -is from the north, in the broad valley of the same name, where it is -presented to full view, and the deepest impression of its colossal -dimensions is experienced. It stands at the head of Shasta valley, above -which it rises 11,000 feet, with a volume of over 224 cubic miles, and -presents, in strange contrast with the sterility of the valley, the -luxuriant vegetation of the forest belt. The timbered slopes lie between -the altitudes 4,000 and 7,000 feet above the sea, and belong to the -most magnificent forest regions of the world. Above the forest belt the -mountain rises more than a mile into the heights of eternal snow, and its -brilliant white slopes present an imposing contrast to the deep green of -the pines beneath. Viewed from the southeast, Mt. Shasta appears to be -surmounted by a single peak, but seen from the north, the upper portion -is found to be double. The smaller of the two cones, broad topped and -crater shaped, has been designated Shastina, to distinguish it from the -other acute cone, which rises 2,000 feet higher and forms the summit of -Shasta proper. - -The influence of temperature upon precipitation, and the limits which it -throws about arboreal vegetation, are here most forcibly illustrated. -In Shasta valley, at an elevation of about 3,000 feet above the sea, -where the average temperature is high as compared with that upon the -mountain itself, the precipitation is always in the form of rain, -but not sufficient in quantity, especially on account of its unequal -distribution throughout the year, to support more than a scanty growth -of stunted trees. In the autumn storm clouds gather about the summit, -and showers become frequent, spreading over the land in copious rains. -Before the spring eight ninths of all the annual rain has fallen and the -country is brilliant with living green. As summer advances the refreshing -showers disappear and the cloudless sky affords no protection from -the burning sun; the bright green fades away and the earth gradually -assumes that uninviting seared aspect which pervades all nature in the -season of drought. Upon the lower slopes of the mountain, by its cooling -influence upon the atmosphere, the rainfall is greatly increased, and -the vegetation is luxuriant. The vegetation is almost wholly coniferous. -Among nearly a score of species the sugar-pine is monarch, frequently -attaining a diameter of twelve and a height of over two hundred feet. -Farther up the mountain these gradually give way to the firs, whose -tall, graceful forms are in perfect keeping with the majestic mountain -behind them. Their black and yellow spotted trunks and branches, draped -in long pendant moss, present a weird, almost dismal aspect, making a -fit promenade for the mythical deities supposed by the aborigines to -inhabit the mountains. To assume that in the timber belt the slopes of -the mountain are everywhere covered with majestic trees, would certainly -be wide of the truth, for within the forests are large treeless tracts, -sometimes hundreds of acres in extent. From a distance these green, -velvety acres appear to be very inviting pastures, and present the most -desirable path of ascent. A closer examination, however, discovers to the -observer that instead of grass these green fields are clothed in such a -dense shrubbery of manzanita, ceanothus, and other bushy plants, as to be -almost impassable. One attempt to cross a patch of chaparral, or “Devil’s -acre,” as it is sometimes appropriately called in western vernacular, -will convince the traveler that his best path lies in the forest. - -As the timber gradually dwindles away from the foot of the mountain -to almost nothing in Shasta valley, so also it diminishes in stature, -from an altitude of 7,000 feet upwards to the snow region, where the -precipitation is generally, if not always, in a solid form of snow in -winter and sleet in summer. - -Of the tree-like vegetation, one of the pines reaches farthest up -the slopes. Its stem grows shorter and the top flattens until, at an -elevation of about 9,000 feet, the branches are spread upon the ground, -so that not unfrequently the pedestrian finds his best path upon -the tree-tops. Beyond these, on the snowless slopes, are found only -scattered blades of grass, and the welcome little hulsea, the edelweiss -of our Alpine regions, with its bright flowers to alleviate the arctic -desolation of the place. The red and yellow lichens cling to the -rocks and the tiny prolococcus flourishes in the snow, so that one is -frequently surprised, upon looking back, to see his bloody footsteps. - -In the Alps, between the forests and the snow, are often found extensive -pastures where the herds which furnish milk for the celebrated Swiss -cheese are grazed during the milder seasons of the year. In northern -California similar pastures do not occur about the snow-capped summits, -probably on account of the unequal distribution of the annual rainfall. - -To those who are fond of novelty, the greatest interest of the upper -portion of Mt. Shasta attaches to its glaciers. They are five in number, -and all are found side by side upon its northern half, forming an almost -continuous covering above 10,000 feet for that portion of the mountain -point. Upon the northern and western slope of the mountain is the Whitney -glacier, with its prominent terminal moraines. Next to the eastward is -the Bulam glacier, with the large pile of debris at the lower end. Then -comes the broad Hottums glacier and the Wintum. The Konwakitong, which is -the smallest of the group, lies upon the southeast side of the mountain. -Whitney glacier is more like those of the Alps than any other one of the -group. Its snow-field lies upon the northwestern slope of the mountains, -from whence the icy mass moves down a shallow depression between Shasta -and Shastina. Mr. Ricksecker, who has made a careful topographical survey -of the mountain, has measured the dimensions of all its glaciers. The -limits of the Whitney glacier are well defined; its width varies from -1,000 to 2,000 feet, with a length of about two and one-fifth miles, -reaching from the summit of the mountain down to an altitude of 9,500 -feet above the sea. It is but little more than a decade since the first -glaciers were discovered within the United States, and we should not be -disappointed to learn that the largest of them, about the culminating -point of the Cascade Range, would appear Liliputian beside the great -glacier of the Bernese Oberland, and yet the former are as truly glaciers -as the latter. In the upper portion of its course, passing over prominent -irregularities in its bed, the Whitney glacier becomes deeply fractured, -producing the extremely jagged surface, corresponding to the surfaces of -the Alpine glaciers. Lower down the crevasses develop, and these, with -the great fissure which separates it from the steep slopes of Shastina, -attest the motion of the icy mass. They frequently open and become -yawning chasms, reaching 100 feet into the clear, green ice beneath. Near -its middle, upon the eastern margin, the Whitney glacier receives large -contributions of sand, gravel and bowlders, from the vertical cliffs -around which it turns to move in a more northerly direction. In this way -a prominent lateral moraine is developed. From the very steep slopes -of Shastina, upon the western side, the glacier receives additions in -the form of avalanches. Here the snow clings to its rocky bed until the -strain resulting from accumulation is great enough to break it from its -moorings and precipitate it upon the glacier below. The most striking -feature of the Whitney glacier, and that which is of greatest interest -from a geological point of view, is its terminal moraine, which appears -to be fully a mile in length. Its apparent length is much greater than -the real, from the fact that the glacial ice extends far down beneath the -covering of detritus. It is so huge a pile of light colored debris, just -above the timber line, that it is plainly visible from afar off. - -In comparing the morainal material about Mt. Shasta with that of Alpine -glaciers, a feature that is particularly noticeable is the smallness -of the bowlders. Upon Alpine glaciers they frequently have a diameter -greater than ten feet, but about the Whitney and other glaciers of Mt. -Shasta they are rarely as much as three feet in diameter. This is readily -explained by the fact that the glaciers of Mt. Shasta do not move in -deep valleys bounded by long, deep slopes, with many high cliffs which -afford an opportunity for the formation of large bowlders. Although the -Whitney glacier has its boundaries more clearly defined than any of the -other glaciers about Mt. Shasta by the depression in which it moves, -the valley is very shallow, and one looks in vain along its slopes for -traces of polished rocks like those so magnificently displayed on the way -from Meiningen to Grimsel, in the valley of the Aar. Below the terminal -moraine the milky water of Whitney creek wends its way down the northern -slope, plunges over a fall hundreds of feet high, into a deep cañon, and -near the base of the mountain is swallowed up by the thirsty air and -earth. The presence of marginal crevasses, lateral and terminal moraines, -and the characteristic milky stream which issues from the lower end, are -proofs that the Whitney glacier still moves, but the rate of motion has -not yet been determined. The row of stakes planted last July were covered -with snow before the party could reach them again in the latter part of -October. - -Upon the northwestern slope of the mountain, besides the Whitney glacier, -there is the Bulam, differing chiefly in that it is contained in a -broader, less definite valley, and forming an intermediate step toward -the Hottum glacier, which is one of the most important and remarkable -of the group. Unlike ordinary glaciers, it has no valley in which it is -confined, but lies upon the convex surface of the mountain. Its upper -surface, instead of being concave anywhere, is convex throughout from -side to side, and its width (123 miles) is almost as great as its length -(162 miles). At several places the surface of the glacier is made very -rough by the inequalities of its bed. This is especially true of its -southern portion, where prominent cliffs form the only medial moraine -discovered upon Mt. Shasta. Throughout the greater part of its expanse -the glacier is deeply crevassed, exposing the green ice occasionally -to the depth of a hundred feet. The thickness of this glacier has been -greatly overestimated. In reality, instead of being 1,800 to 2,500 feet -thick, it does not appear where greatest to be more than a few hundred, -for at a number of places it is so thin that its bed is exposed. Its -terminal moraine is a huge pile, nearly half a mile in width, measured in -the direction of glacial motion. - -Next south of the Hottum glacier is the Wintum, which attains a length of -over two miles, and ends with an abrupt front of ice in a cañon. Upon the -southeastern slope of Mt. Shasta, at the head of a large cañon, is the -Konwakitong glacier. Notwithstanding its diminutive size, its crevasses -and the muddy stream it initiates indicate clearly that the ice mass -continues to move. The amount of moraine material upon its borders is -small, and yet, of all the glaciers about Mt. Shasta, it is the only -one which has left a prominent record of important changes. The country -adjacent to the west side of the Konwakitong cañon has been distinctly -glaciated so as to leave no doubt that the Konwakitong glacier was once -very much larger than it is at the present time. The rocks on which it -moved have been deeply striated, and so abraded as to produce the smooth, -rounded surfaces so common in glaciated regions. At the time of its -greatest extension the glacier was 5.8 miles in length and occupied an -area of at least seven square miles, being over twenty times its present -size. Its limit is marked at several places by a prominent terminal -moraine. The thickness of the glacier where greatest was not more than -200 feet, for several hills within the glaciated area were not covered. -The striated surfaces and moraines do not extend up the slopes of those -hills more than 200 feet above their bases. The thinness of the glacier -is completely in harmony with the limited extent of its erosion, although -the rocks are distinctly planed off, so that the low knobs and edges have -regularly curved outlines. It is evident that a great thickness of rock -has been removed by the ice, and that the period of ice erosion has been -comparatively brief. During the lapse of time, however, there have been -important climatic oscillations, embracing epochs of glacial advance and -recession. None of the glaciers about Mt. Shasta, excepting the Wintum, -terminate in cañons, but all of them give rise to muddy streams which -flow in cañons to the mountain’s base. The cañons are purely the product -of aqueous erosion, and contain numerous waterfalls, whence the streams -in descending leap over the ends of old lava flows 50 to 300 feet in -height. - -In strong contrast with the arctic condition of Mt. Shasta to-day, -are the circumstances attending its upbuilding, when it was an active -volcano belching forth streams of fiery lava that flowed down the slopes -now occupied by ice. It is the battlefield of the elements within the -earth against those above it. In its early days the forces beneath were -victorious, and built up the mountains in the face of wind and weather, -but gradually the volcanic energy died away and the low temperature -called into play those destructive agents which are now reversing the -process and gradually reducing the mountain toward a general level. A -microscopical examination of the rocks of Mt. Shasta reveals the fact -that it is composed chiefly, if not wholly, of three kinds of lava. -Several small areas of metamorphic rocks occur within its borders, but -there is no evidence to show that they form any considerable portion of -the mountain. - -The range in mineralogical composition of the lavas is not extensive. -There are only four minerals which deserved to be ranked as essential and -characteristic constituents: they are plagioclase, feldspar, pyroxene, -generally in the form of hypersthene hornblende, and olivine. The kind -of lava which has by far the widest distribution upon the slopes of Mt. -Shasta is composed essentially of plagioclase, feldspar and hypersthene, -with some angite, and belongs to the variety of volcanic rocks which, -on account of composition, and the place where first discovered, has -been designated hypersthene andesite. Lava of this type has been shown -by Messrs. Cross and Giddings of the Geological Survey to be widely -distributed beyond the Mississippi. Upon the western slope of the -mountain, especially in the vicinity of the prominent volcanic cone, the -form of which suggests its name sugar loaf, the lava contains prominent -crystals of hornblende instead of so much hypersthene and angite, and -closely resembles the celebrated hornblende andesite lava from among -the extinct volcanoes of central France. The third variety of lava -which enters into the structure of Mt. Shasta is familiar to every -one as basalt. It occurs in relatively small quantities, and has been -extruded low down upon the slopes of the mountain. From the fact that -there are three kinds of lava in the structure of Mt. Shasta, it must -not be concluded that they all issued from the same volcanic vent, nor -that they were effused from three separate and distinct openings. In -reality, contributions to the upbuilding of Mt. Shasta have been made by -over twenty volcanic orifices, of which two have been principal and far -more prolific than all the parasitic events combined. This enumeration -does not include those large fissures in the side of the cone, which are -evidently attributable to the hydrostatic pressure of the molten mass -within. The small number of parasitic cones on the slopes of Mt. Shasta -is somewhat remarkable, especially when we compare it with the largest -volcano in Europe. Although it is much higher than Etna, its base is less -expansive, and its size about half that of the mighty monarch of the -Mediterranean. Upon the irregular slopes of Etna there are 200 prominent -subsidiary cones, beside over 400 of smaller size. On the contrary, Mt. -Shasta has but a score of such accessories, and the remarkable regularity -of its acute form forcibly expresses the highly concentrated type of -volcanic energy which it represents. - -From none of the vents upon its slopes have all three kinds of lava -escaped, but from the summits of Shasta and Shastina, which are the -products of the two largest and most prolific vents, both hornblende -and hypersthene andesite have been effused. All the other orifices were -subordinate, and each furnished but one kind of lava; from seven of them -came hypersthene andesite; eight, hornblende andesite; and the remaining -five, basalt. The relative age of the cones which mark the position of -the volcanic vents is indicated by the amount of degradation which each -has suffered. Judged by this criterion, those of hornblende andesite -are the oldest and those of basalt the youngest. The latter are for -the most part made of lapilli, and are not crater-shaped as is usually -the case in other portions of the Cascade Range, but are elliptical in -form, with dome-shaped summits. The presence of considerable piles of -ejectments about the subsidiary vents indicates that the eruptions from -these orifices were often of a violent character. On the other hand there -are some without a trace of lapilli, or anything else to indicate an -interruption in the quiet flow of lava welling out of the depths. - -Upon the eastern slope of the mountain the cañon, excavated by Mud -creek, brings to light the oldest Shasta lavas now exposed, and they -are seen under such circumstances that their succession can be readily -understood. The oldest lava known is hornblende andesite, which is now in -an advanced state of disintegration, and it seems probable that in the -early stages of its development a large proportion of the lavas ejected -from Mt. Shasta were of the same mineralogical constitution. These were -succeeded by extensive effusions of hypersthene andesite. Later in its -history, several small streams of hornblende andesite again burst forth -from the northeastern side of the cone, but the final effort of the -volcanic energy was spent in the ejection of hypersthene andesite. The -conditions which determine the oscillation in mineralogical composition -of the lavas are as yet conjectural, but when discovered, and their -influence demonstrated, an important step forward will have been made in -determining the relations of many volcanic rocks. - -A striking feature in the structure of Mt. Shasta is the paucity of -volcanic ashes, lapilli, and other ejected matter. Only one important -deposit of the kind has been discovered. It clings about the summit of -the mountain, and is evidently the product of its last eruption. The -summit of Shastina is so regular in outline, and the shape of its crater -so well preserved, that many have supposed it to be composed chiefly of -scoria and ashes; but this is not the case, for its slopes are of angular -fragments of compact lava. - -Mt. Shasta is almost a pure lava cone, and its remarkably regular form -is a matter of wonder. That it is so regular is a sequence of several -favorable circumstances. Although a score of parasitic cones spring from -the side of the mountain, and have contributed to its upbuilding, yet -their additions have been so small compared with the vast effusions from -the summit craters Shasta and Shastina, as not to greatly modify the -outline of the mountain. More important circumstances are to be found in -the non-explosive character of the eruptions and the successive changes -in the physical properties of the erupted lava, as the development of the -mountain progressed. - -It is well known that among the volcanoes of the Hawaiian Islands the -eruptions are quiet and effusive. The fiery streams of liquid lava course -down the gentle slopes for many miles. - -Although the mountain is 14,000 feet high, its lavas have such a high -degree of liquidity, and retain their mobility so long after eruption, -that the base of the mountain spread by them has a diameter of about -seventy miles, and an average slope of 5° 1,800 feet below its summit. -Mauna Loa is nearly twenty miles in diameter. On the contrary, at a -corresponding position its greatest diameter is less than two miles, a -very remarkable difference, which is due chiefly to the unequal fluency -of the two lavas. The very oldest lavas of Mt. Shasta lie buried within -its mass, and we know nothing of their physical properties, but from an -examination of the oldest ones now visible, it is evident that at the -time of their eruption they possessed a higher degree of fluidity, and -were more voluminous than those of later date. The long, gentle slopes -about the base of the mountain are formed by comparatively old lavas. -Ascending the mountain, one goes up as if upon a giant staircase, with -long, inclined steps rising abruptly over the ends of successive shorter -and newer lava flows. - -It is evident in comparing the older and newer lava flows of Mt. Shasta -that there has been a more or less regular decrease in the quantity of -lava extruded during successive eruptions, and this is exactly what -we should expect when we consider that as the pipe is lengthened by -successive effusions, the hydrostatic pressure of the columns of lava -within is gradually augmented. The increased compress of the lava flows -toward the summit of the mountain indicates that the lava of successive -extrusions became more and more viscous until at last the eruptions -became explosive, and gave rise to the ejectments now clinging upon the -upper slopes of the mountain to evidence the character of the final -outburst. - -It is not only possible, but very probable that the increased viscosity -of lava toward the closing scenes of the volcano is correllated to the -diminution of temperature. Since the beginning of the historic period -there have been no eruptions from Mt. Shasta, but the freshness of its -lavas indicate that not many centuries ago, with other volcanoes of the -Cascade Range, it was in a state of vigorous activity, and groups of -hot springs and fumeroles about the summit still attest the presence of -smouldering volcanic energy, which may perhaps some day break through its -confining walls. - -The upbuilding of Mt. Shasta is but a matter of yesterday, as compared -with the lapse of ages, since the birth of some of its neighbors. The -complex group of mountains to the westward, embracing the Scott, Trinity, -Salmon and Siskiyou, are composed in large part, at least, of ancient -crystalline rocks of both aqueous and igneous origin; through these the -rivers have cut deep cañons, the Klamath, on its way to the Sacramento -southward, from the very base of Mt. Shasta to its broad valley -stretching from the Sierra Nevada to the Coast Range. The cañon of the -Sacramento was cut down to nearly its present level, and the mountains -sculptured into existing forms long before the eruptions of Mt. Shasta -had ceased, for a fiery deluge escaping from the southern slope of Mt. -Shasta entered the Sacramento cañon, and as a lava stream 200 feet deep -followed its course for over fifty miles. - -Towering more than a mile above its neighbors, perhaps the youngest of -the group, Mt. Shasta is the end of a long series of volcanoes in the -Cascade Range, stretching northwest to Mt. Tacoma. This range, composed -chiefly of volcanic material, is cut across by the cañons of the Columbia -and the Klamath rivers, in the former of which, beneath a thickness of -3,500 feet of lava, are found strata containing Tertiary fossils. At the -southern base of Mt. Shasta, in the cañon of the McLoud River, similar -beds of volcanic debris are found, but without fossils, nevertheless it -is evident that the main mass of the Cascade Range and its volcanoes -originated in recent geologic times, and from the fact that solfataras, -fumeroles, and hot springs are still abundant upon their slopes, they can -not be reckoned among those which are wholly extinct. - -A frontiersman in Washington Territory tells of an outburst of Mt. St. -Helens in the winter of 1841-2. - -Upon somewhat more trustworthy authority it is said that to the southward -of Mt. Shasta, about forty miles, a small cone which may be considered -parasitic to Lassens Peak, has been in eruption as late as January, -1850, ejecting considerable ashes and cinders, and pouring forth a mass -of lava, which gradually spread, attaining a circumference of over four -miles, and presenting an abrupt embankment-like termination upon all -sides eighty to ninety feet in height. Trees, blackened by the fiery -stream, are still standing to furnish incontestable evidence of its -recency. - -The country is full of rumors of subterranean rumblings, and the people -are prone to attribute them to the dying throes of volcanic energy. - -One of the most striking features of the region is the strongly -contrasted types of volcanic action in Mt. Shasta. Both have -approximately the same area. In the valley there have been many scores of -volcanic vents, among which the energy has been so widely diffused that -none of them have furnished lava sufficient to form a hill more than a -few hundred feet in height. - -On the contrary, the mountain represents a small number of vents, and the -volcanic was nearly all concentrated in one place, so that the extrusions -were all piled up, one upon another, and resulted in the upbuilding of -one majestic elevation. - -Thus it has been from a small beginning, probably in early Tertiary -times, that by successive boilings over, so to speak, additions have -been made to the mountain until it attained a height beyond its present -altitude. The constructive agents reached their limit, dissipated their -energy, and gave way to destructive ones, which are gradually undoing the -work. - -Mt. Shasta must ever be one of the most popular mountains among tourists -of the West. It is easily accessible from a main line of travel which -passes by its base, at Berryvale, where comfortable quarters and -necessary outfit for the ascent can be obtained. - -The streams are filled with trout, and the forest with game, so that the -region affords many attractions for the sportsman. - -Several hours’ travel by a good trail brings the party to Camp Ross, -at the timber line, from which the ascent can easily be made in a day -without danger. - - - - -REASSUREMENT. - -BY ADA IDDINGS GALE. - - - Fear not, heart—though round thee ply - Battle’s emblems—far and nigh. - Though thy comrades round thee fall— - Ensigns totter on the wall— - Though the long battalions grim - Seem to cloud thy future’s rim. - If amidst the wild affray - Thou grow sick, and turn away— - Pause: that would be worst of all, - If in fleeing, thou should’st fall. - Stand fast, girt with sword and shield— - If thou fall, fall in the field. - What matters it if sad defeat - Meet thy eager, hurrying feet; - What, if when the banners wave - Thou should’st find a shallow grave. - - Foeward, bravely turn thy face, - Seek no measure small of grace; - And when loud the trumpets call, - Bravely stand or bravely fall. - Whether vict’ry or defeat, - Laurel wreath or winding sheet - Be thy meed—’twill differ not, - Soon or late ’twill be forgot. - Only thou, heart, e’er shalt know - Thy deserved praise here below. - Thou, and One that on his throne - Ne’er forgets to watch his own, - One that marks where sparrows flee, - Thee will guard with equity. - Then be brave with all thy might— - This thy guerdon—for the right. - - - - -WILL IT PAY? - -BY CHARLES BARNARD. - - -There are some people who always ask this question. You may suggest -anything, a book to read, a science to be studied, or some new work to be -done, and, though they may not be so rude as to say so, they will wonder -how it will pay. “Better not go into farming, my boy. It doesn’t pay.” -“Better not do this or do that. It won’t pay you.” After a little more -of this sort of thing you wonder if it pays to be born, or to live, or -to do anything whatever. Now, what do they mean by this question? By far -the larger part of those who ask it mean that the work, whatever it may -be, does not pay a handsome return in money. A few mean something quite -different. They know all about it, they have seen the world, and it is -all a hollow show, and their favorite dolls are full of sawdust. These -people are dead, but they have forgotten it. - -Let us see about this. If there is any one business in the world about -which the people in it are sure it does not pay, it is farming. “It does -not pay.” So many people have said this that people who are not farmers -have really come to think it must be so. Is it true? Here is an ear of -field corn with twelve rows of grains, and twenty grains to a row. Fair -average corn, with 240 grains to the ear. We can take off one grain -and plant it in the ground, and within six months have two ears of the -same corn, or 480 grains from one grain. How big a profit is that? One -grain increases to 480 grains. Is there any manufacturing business, art -or profession that pays such an enormous return? In spite of this they -say it does not pay. Then there must be something the matter with the -business. Nature has provided that the increase of plants shall be very -great. One seed may increase a hundred fold, or five hundred fold, or a -thousand fold. Clearly the work of raising plants with such advantages -in its favor ought to pay, and if it does not, it is equally clear that -something is wrong, some one to blame. - -The city housekeeper finds at her store on the avenue a head of lettuce. -Rather wilted and damaged by rough handling. Six cents. You can plant -43,560 heads of lettuce on one acre of ground. At six cents a head that -is $2,613.60 taken out of one acre of land inside of eight weeks. And -yet this person gravely tells us lettuce raising does not pay. What can -the matter be, and where has all this money gone? A city like New York -will calmly eat 40,000 heads of lettuce in a day or two, and pay out over -$2,000 for it, and be ready to eat and pay as much more the next week. -The money is certainly paid to somebody, and if the farmer still insists -it does not pay to raise the lettuce, there must be a reason for it. - -Ask the groceryman. He replies that he must live and must have a good -slice out of the money to pay him for buying the lettuce down town and -bringing it up to his store. It isn’t so evident that he must live as he -fancies, because there was a time when there were no storekeepers and -the world got along beautifully without them. However, he is convenient, -and we will allow him his slice out of the profits. The teamster, the -wholesale dealer, the freight handler, the railroad people all say that -they too must live, and to please them we will admit that is so, though -there is not much to prove it. They must share in the $2,000 paid for -the acre of lettuce. Lastly, the farmer gets what the others decide he -may have after they have had what they decide is their share. If we ask -each one of this row of men, it is quite possible each one will say it -does not pay, but, somehow, none except the farmer says anything about -it. The last man, the actual producer of the lettuce, is the only one to -complain. His business is the only one concerned that people say does not -pay. - -There was once a young man who started out bravely in life, resolved -to reform the world. After trying for some time he gave it up and was -ever after entirely contented if he paid his board regularly every week. -It is useless to think we can reform this matter all in a day. The day -will come when these things will be changed and equity and justice will -take the place of the utter selfishness that now marks competition in -business. Our best plan is to see what we can do to become producers -ourselves. We want the lettuce ourselves. We must pay the retail price -for it, and if at this price there is a big profit in raising it, we -would like the entire profit placed in our hands. The people in these -United States are divided into two great classes—the producers and the -consumers—those who raise things to eat, and those who are in other -trades and eat without producing. The producers are the farmers and -fishermen. The consumers make all the rest of the people. The producers -also eat, but their food costs them very much less than the food used -by the non-producers. Of course we can see there must be non-producers -or the trades and arts would perish, and the nation would become a mere -agricultural community, content with sleeping and eating. At the same -time, we must observe that a very large proportion of those who produce -nothing live in small towns and villages and own land. We see everywhere -in our smaller cities and towns hundreds of homes having gardens about -the house. A little discouraged grass, a dyspeptic tree or two, a forlorn -grape vine straggling over the fence, plenty of dusty gravel, and a -mortgage on the house and lot. Within the house bitter complaints against -the high price of food, much fretfulness and weariness at the scant, -monotonous bill of fare. Boys and girls growing up with white hands and -narrow chests (to say nothing of stomachs that they should be ashamed to -own) and the storekeeper saving money on the next corner. - -This is the reason it does not pay. We want to have white hands and be -genteel and all that. We want to be consumers, and we unwittingly combine -to get all we can out of the selling and handling of food and leave the -producer as little as we think he can be forced to take. We must get rid -of this imported nonsense about work. (It all came from Europe, and is -wholly un-American.) We must make the land give us more food. Our boys -and girls must go out of doors, must learn to be producers. They should -be shown that it is disgraceful to live in a mortgaged house, that it is -disgraceful to stand on any part of God’s ground and complain that food -is scarce or high when that food might come out of the very ground under -our ungrateful feet. The Chinese, the Japanese, the Dutch, the French, -the Swiss cultivate every rod of ground they own. No barren yards about -their houses, taxed and yet paying no return. Why, in England even the -strips of waste land along the railway tracks are cultivated, and the -trains move between rows of cabbages half a hundred miles long. - -This is the way for thousands of families to make it pay. Produce your -own food and sell it to yourselves. A head of lettuce grown on your own -ground and eaten on your own table saves the retail price of a head of -lettuce, and if there is a profit on it for all the people who touch it, -clearly you have the entire profit for yourself. On reading this about -five hundred people will calmly remark that this is not so. They have -tried it and it cost more to raise their own vegetables than it did to -buy them at the stores. The wages of the gardener come to more than all -the things were worth. So much the worse for the gardener. You should -be your own gardener. Where are your boys and girls? At the base ball -grounds, or the rink, or at the foolish piano—doing nothing—earning -nothing and trying to be genteel? Garden work is hard on the back and -hurts the hands. Yes, because your hands are weak and your back is not -strong, and of these things you should be ashamed. - -The price of land in this country is steadily rising. All the best farm -land is being taken up. The cost of food is advancing. It will never -again be as cheap as it has been in the past. The time has come when we -must economize. We can not longer afford to carry those neglected garden -plots and waste spaces about our houses. They must produce food for the -people who own them. We must be our own producers. We must study plants -and animals. These represent food and wealth, and it is simply an untruth -to say it will not pay to raise them. If your garden costs more than the -retail price of food in your neighborhood the fault is your own. There -is something the matter with your soil or your seeds, or your method -of culture. Think of the profit of raising lettuce at $2,000 an acre, -and yet that is the return that an acre will produce if paid for at the -retail price. Moreover, the lettuce would be removed from the ground in -ample time for another crop, likewise bringing a profit. Of course, if -your land is worth five dollars a foot, the interest on one foot would -be more than the value of the single lettuce plant you could raise upon -it. In such a case you had better sell out and buy cheaper land. For -the majority of homes where there is a garden the land is cheap enough -to produce more or less of the food needed in the house, and there is no -reason whatever why it may not be raised at a handsome profit. - -The Chautauqua University recognizes the importance of this matter. Its -aim is to help, to guide, and to instruct, and it is now, through the -liberality of its friends, able to help, guide and instruct all who wish -to learn something of the art of producing food and saving money. It sees -hundreds of boys and girls totally ignorant of these common things. It -sees young people wondering what they shall do, perplexed and worried -over this question of earning a living, and discouraged at the high cost -of living, when a part of their living is going to waste beneath their -feet. The Chautauqua Town and Country Club was formed to help those -who wish to help themselves. It aims to show by simple lessons how to -raise plants of all kinds, how to care for animals, how to take care of -your garden so that it will be a source of pleasure and profit. Half -a thousand people have already joined the club and are now at work in -good earnest. Should you wish to know more about it, write to Miss K. F. -Kimball, Plainfield, N. J. - -All this is meant for you. - -What are you going to do about it? - - - - -GEOGRAPHY OF THE HEAVENS FOR JULY. - -BY PROF. M. B. GOFF, - -Western University of Pennsylvania. - - -THE SUN, - -Of which so much has been said in these pages, continues to be -discussed with increasing interest by astronomers of both hemispheres, -who every day supply their quota of new ideas as the result of their -investigations. In THE CHAUTAUQUAN for March, 1884, the statement was -made that “it has already been demonstrated that the colored prominences -may be examined at any time when the sun can be seen; and it is believed -that Mr. Huggins has accomplished the difficult feat of photographing -the corona, so that it, too, may be scrutinized _at leisure_.” In the -April number of the _Nineteenth Century_, we find a very interesting -account by Mr. Huggins himself, of his operations in this line. As yet -the experiments have not been in all respects satisfactory; but so much -has been done as to leave no doubt of the final result. As Mr. H. tells -us, the great obstacle to overcome is the immense curtain of air, which -“hangs” between us and the sun, and absorbs some forty per cent. of the -sun’s light (and heat). This absorption renders our atmosphere as light -at least as the sun’s corona, and makes it as difficult of observation -as a lesser light placed behind a greater. The same atmosphere being as -bright, or brighter, than the stars, prevents our seeing the latter in -daylight. During an eclipse of the sun, the shadow of the moon affords -us a long, funnel shaped tube through this great air curtain (which may -be forty, or one hundred, or more miles in thickness) and we are enabled -through it to see the sun’s corona. But “on an average, once in two years -this curtain of light is lifted for from _three_ to _six_ minutes”—a very -contracted period in which to obtain a knowledge of a phenomenon that -we know is constantly changing. If we had a Joshua, who could command -sun, moon and earth to stand still for the space of a few hours even, we -might discover what we so much wish to know, what is this corona. Or, if -we could go beyond this atmosphere of ours—place it between us and the -earth, we might do without a Joshua. But we can not get outside. Then the -next best thing is to get as nearly outside as possible. Dr. Copeland -tried this by climbing an elevation of 12,400 feet. Prof. Langley -ascended Mt. Etna, and on Mt. Whitney ascended to the height of 15,000 -feet; but at these heights the curtain was still too heavy, and no view -of the corona was obtained; or, as Prof. Langley expressed it, he “met -with entire non-success.” From reports in regard to observations made -in Egypt of the total eclipse of 1882, Mr. Huggins conceived the idea -of making a photographic plate so sensitive that it would distinguish -differences imperceptible to the eye, and on this plate take a picture -of the corona, and then examine it as one would the “photo” of a friend, -and mark its peculiarities. He made his first experiment in 1882, and -as a result “there seemed to be good ground to hope that the corona had -really been obtained upon the plates.” In 1883, a second attempt, under -more favorable circumstances was made, and “images of the sun exquisitely -defined, and free from all sensible trace of instrumental imperfection -were obtained.” On the 6th of May of the same year (1883) a total eclipse -of the sun occurred at Caroline Islands, and was there photographed by -Messrs. Lawrence and Woods, photographers of the Royal Society; and on -a comparison of these photographs of the sun’s corona during an eclipse -with his own taken both before and after the time of the eclipse (which -was not visible to Mr. H.), he had the satisfaction of seeing so strong -a resemblance as to convince him that he had photographed the corona -without an eclipse. Although having no doubt of the success of his -experiment, yet, on account of the unfavorable conditions of the climate, -it was determined to try a higher elevation; and the Riffel, near -Zarmatt, Switzerland, was selected as a suitable place to make further -trials. Mr. Ray Wood was selected as artist, and reached Riffel in July, -1884. But unfortunately, the “veil of finely divided matter of some -sort,” “of which we have heard so much in the accounts from all parts -of the earth of gorgeous sunsets and after-glows” seriously interfered -with the work; nevertheless, a number of plates were obtained on which -the corona showed itself with more or less distinctness. Not satisfied -with these results, Mr. Woods was deputed to go to the Cape of Good Hope, -where, under the direction of Dr. Gill, he is to make, or is, perhaps, -now making daily photographic representations of the corona, and laboring -fully to realize the anticipations of the esteemed Mr. Huggins. - -Meantime our sun makes his accustomed rounds, bringing with him the usual -accompaniments, hot weather and the “dog days.” He will on the 1st rise -at 4:34 a. m. and set at 7:33 p. m.; on the 16th, rise at 4:43 a. m., set -at 7:28 p. m.; and on the 30th, rise at 4:56 a. m., and set at 7:17 p. m. -During the month the length of the day will decrease from 15 h. 1 m. on -the 1st to 14 h. 21 m. on the 30th. The declination will in the same time -decrease four degrees and forty-three minutes. - - -THE MOON - -Enters upon its last quarter on the 5th, at 7:18 a. m.; new moon occurs -on the 12th, at 12:07 a. m.; first quarter on the 18th, at 7:11 p. m.; -full moon on the 26th, at 9:14 p. m. In perigee, or nearest the earth, on -the 11th, at 8:24 p. m.; in apogee, or farthest from the earth, on 25th, -at 4:18 a. m. Reaches its greatest elevation above the horizon, 66° 55′, -on the 11th; least elevation, 30° 7′, on the 23d. On the 1st, rises at -10:00 p. m.; on the 16th, sets at 10:26 p. m.; on the 30th, rises 9:05 p. -m. - - -MERCURY - -On the 13th, at 6:57 a. m., is 5° 39′ north of the moon; on the 17th, at -9:00 a. m., 11′ south of Venus; and on the 26th, at 2:00 a. m., 11′ south -of _Alpha_ in the constellation _Leo_, a very interesting conjunction, -but not visible to the naked eye. Mercury has a direct motion during the -month of 51° 51′; and his diameter increases from 5″ to 6.8″. On the 1st, -he rises at 4:56 a. m., and sets at 7:56 p. m.; on the 16th, rises at -6:23 a. m., and sets at 8:31 p. m.; on the 30th, rises at 7:16 a. m., and -sets at 8:22 p. m. - - -VENUS - -Makes but little show this month, being too near the “Source of Light.” -She will be evening star throughout the month, growing brighter as the -days pass by; her diameter increasing from 10.4″ on the 1st to 11.2″ on -the 30th. She has a direct motion of 38° 8′ 45″. On the 1st, rises at -5:50 a. m., sets at 8:34 p. m.; on the 16th, rises at 6:25 a. m., sets at -8:33 p. m.; and on the 30th, rises at 6:57 a. m., sets at 8:23 p. m. On -the 13th, at 10:21 p. m., 5° 22′ north of the moon; on 17th, at 9:00 a. -m., 11′ north of Mercury. - - -MARS - -Will be a morning star during this month. On the 1st rising at 2:30 a. -m., and setting at 5:08 p. m.; on the 16th, rising at 2:11 a. m., setting -at 5:01 p. m.; and on the 30th, rising at 1:54 a. m., setting at 4:50 p. -m. His diameter increases one tenth of a second of arc, and he makes a -direct motion of 22° 56′. On the 9th, at 3:44 p. m., he is 5° 1′ north of -the moon. - - -JUPITER. - -_Et tu, Jupiter_, art on the wane. Each day he sets more nearly with the -sun, and his diameter grows smaller, though monarch still of all the -planets. He rises on the 1st, 16th and 30th, at 9:00, 8:14, and 7:33 a. -m., respectively, and sets on the corresponding days at 10:19, 9:28, and -8:39 p. m. He makes a direct motion of 5° 25′ 42″. On the 15th, at 2:02 -a. m., is 3° 7′ north of the moon. - - -SATURN. - -Those who have not improved the past few months to obtain a view of the -beauties of this planet can not blame the writer. Their attention has -been called to the fact that his rings stand more widely open now than -they will again for fifteen years. But they need not despair; for in the -delightful coolness of a summer morning they may still improve their -opportunities; for Saturn rises the latter part of this month nearly with -the dawn, and those who care to leave their “downy couch” can catch him -before the rising of the sun. 3:56, 3:05, and 2:18 a. m., on the 1st, -16th and 30th will find him “at home;” and in August an earlier hour -will suit as well. During the month his diameter increases two tenths -of a second. On the 10th, at 5:48 p. m., he may be found 4° 7′ north of -the moon; and on the 20th, one minute south of the star _Eta_ in the -constellation _Gemini_. - - -URANUS. - -This planet, on the 1st, rises at 11:14 a. m., and sets at 11:20 p. m.; -on the 16th, rises at 10:17 a. m., sets at 10:23 p. m.; on the 30th, -rises at 9:25 a. m., sets at 9:29 p. m. No change in diameter, which -remains at 3.6″. On the 16th, at 6:37 p. m., 34′ north of the moon. - - -NEPTUNE. - -This slow motioned body, of which we know so little, and which not more -than one person out of 10,000 ever saw, makes a direct motion during the -month of 42′ 55″; its diameter is 2.6″; and on the 8th, at 6:59 a. m., -its position is 2° 33′ directly north of the moon. It may be interesting -to know that it will be a morning star which “will _not_ light the -traveler on his way,” during the entire month. Its times of rising are -1:52 a. m. on the 1st; 12:57 a. m. on the 16th, and at midnight on the -30th. - - - - -HOW AIR HAS BEEN LIQUEFIED. - -BY J. JAMIN, - -Of the French Academy. - - -In the interval between 1602 and 1626 four philosophers were born who -seem to have been divinely appointed to teach men the mysteries of air. -These were a German, Otto von Guericke (1602); two Frenchmen, Mariotte -and Pascal (1620, 1623), and finally an Englishman, Boyle (1626). Pascal -conceived the idea that air being material must have weight like other -materials, and consequently that the earth must be pressed upon by its -atmospheric envelope, and he proved this by the celebrated experiment at -Puy de Dôme. - -Soon after, Otto von Guericke, having invented the air pump, succeeded in -exhausting the air from a vessel and confirmed Pascal’s idea that air was -really heavy, while Mariotte and Boyle at the same time, each in his own -country, and by almost identical experiments, proved that air is elastic, -that its volume decreases by pressure, and generally in proportion to the -weight to which it is subjected. Mariotte modestly called this discovery -a rule of nature. We call it a physical law, and very suitably name it -in France “Mariotte’s Law,” and in England “Boyle’s Law.” - -It seemed necessary for science to collect her thoughts after this great -achievement. She seemed to think there was nothing more to discover. -Boyle and Mariotte would have been very much astonished if some one had -told them that this air, whose properties they had been demonstrating, -could be reduced to a liquid like water, and even to a solid like snow. -Nearly two centuries passed before the world was prepared for this new -discovery. We ourselves were ignorant of it until the month of April, -1883, when the Academy of Sciences received from Cracow these two -dispatches: - - “Oxygen completely liquefied; the liquid colorless as carbonic - acid.” (April 9th.) - - “Nitrogen frozen, liquefied by expansion; the liquid colorless.” - (April 16th.) - - WROBLEWSKI. - -Thus air has been reduced to a volume a thousand or fifteen hundred -times less than under ordinary conditions. It ceased to be a gas and took -the appearance of water. This astonishing result is only the last in a -long list of experiments which for a long time were fruitless; it is the -finishing touch to a building begun long ago, and on which many workmen -have labored. What has been the work of each of them? It is a long story. - -Van Marum, a philosopher and chemist of Harlem, is celebrated as the -constructor of an electric machine, the largest known, but he is more -justly celebrated for having been the first to liquefy a gas. Wishing -to know if ammonia would obey Mariotte’s law, he compressed it. Under a -pressure of six atmospheres it changed quickly to a transparent liquid. -Van Marum did not foresee the consequences of his experiments, and is -honored only as being the first successful performer of the experiment. -But Lavoisier, whose keener mind grasped all that these results implied, -did not hesitate to declare the general law that all substances were -capable of existing in three different states, and he illustrated his -belief most forcibly. “Let us consider for a moment what would happen to -the different substances which form the earth, if the temperature should -be quickly changed. Let us suppose that the earth were suddenly placed in -a region where the temperature would be much above that of boiling water; -soon the air, all liquids which can be vaporized at a temperature near -that of boiling water, and many metallic substances even, would expand, -be transformed into air-like fluids, and form part of the atmosphere. - -“On the contrary, if the earth should be suddenly placed in a very cold -temperature, for example, that of Jupiter or Saturn, the water of our -rivers and seas, and, probably, the greatest number of liquids which we -know would become solid.” - -“Air,” according to this supposition, or at least a part of the air-like -substances which compose it, “would doubtless cease to exist in its -present form; it would be changed to a liquid state, and this change -would produce new liquids of which we know nothing.” - -Lavoisier was mistaken about the temperature of Jupiter and Saturn, but -was right in his supposition that air would become a liquid; however, -as experiment did not prove the theory, the prediction was forgotten -and the question dropped. It slept a long time, for it was not until -1823 that it was revived by Faraday. The first experiments of this great -philosopher were on this subject. He was but twenty-two when he made -his first discovery, the liquefaction of chlorine. The details of this -experiment have been told by Tyndall. It is well known that when chlorine -gas and cold water are united, crystals are formed which contain to every -molecule of chlorine ten molecules of water. Faraday put some of these -into a closed tube and heated them until two separate liquids appeared; -one was water, the other floated on the surface of the water, and a -certain professor of Paris declared that it could be nothing but oil -carelessly left in the vessel. Faraday having opened the tube, found that -this substance began to boil, and then changed with an explosion into a -green gas. It was chlorine. Faraday, who was quick-tempered, immediately -took his revenge on the professor, to whom he wrote: “You will be pleased -to know, sir, that the oil left by carelessness in my apparatus was -nothing less than liquefied chlorine.” - -This first success decided the career of the young chemist. He announced -that all gases could be reduced to this state if subjected to a -sufficient pressure, and he undertook a series of experiments, of which -the success was doubtful, but the danger certain. He operated in this -way: He took a thick glass tube in the form of an inverted U; one branch -was left empty, in the other the materials for producing the gas to be -studied were placed and the whole closed. Obliged to gather in the empty -branch, the gas continually increased in pressure, and there were two -possible results to the experiment; either the gas would not change its -state, and the pressure would increase until the vessel broke, or when a -certain limit of pressure was reached, then the liquid would appear and -would continue to accumulate as long as the gas was disengaged. A dozen -gases were reduced in this way; among them were the following, which we -shall need: Ammonia, sulphurous acid, carbonic acid, and protoxide of -nitrogen, which at a temperature of ten degrees required a pressure equal -to sixty atmospheres. - -This pressure leaves no doubt about the danger which one runs in carrying -on such researches. If we remember that steam boilers generally support -a pressure of no more than ten atmospheres, if we recall the number and -the horror of their explosions we can hardly understand how a simple -glass tube could resist a pressure five or six times as great. When a gas -reaches the point of liquefaction, then the pressure ceases to increase, -but if it does not change from that condition the pressure increases -until an explosion necessarily occurs, and the debris of the vessel is -scattered as powder scatters the fragments of a shell. In the course of -Faraday’s researches he had thirty explosions. They did not stop him, but -it is easy to see that they did not encourage others. - -Happily there is a less dangerous method of reaching the same result, -it is to freeze the gas. In the same way that the vapor of water is -condensed when the temperature is lowered, so gases, which are really -vapors, will yield to sufficient cold. In 1824, Bussy succeeded in -condensing sulphurous acid gas. The gas was introduced into a balloon, -which was plunged into a freezing mixture of ice and salt. The gas was -liquefied and could be preserved indefinitely, if the balloon were -enclosed in an enamel vessel. In heating, it gave off vapors which, by -their pressure kept the remainder of the fluid, providing the glass was -strong enough. Thus, in two ways, by cold and by pressure, and still -better, by both combined, it is possible to liquefy a large number of -gases. - -When water is heated, it remains immovable up to 100 degrees Centigrade, -but then it is changed into vapor, or boils. This boiling is -characterized by a peculiar feature, the temperature remains fixed at -100 degrees. It must be concluded, therefore, that the heat produced by -the furnace and absorbed by the liquid is simply used in transforming -the water into vapor. This fact was first discovered by the English -philosopher, Black, who, not being able to explain the phenomenon, was -content to demonstrate it and to speak of the heat as _latent_. He saw -that it took five and a half times as long to change water into vapor -as to heat it from zero to 100 degrees, and that consequently it must -require five and a half times as much heat to work the change. Such is -the law of boiling in the air, but let us see what it is in a vacuum. - -It is clear that the pressure of the atmosphere on water is a hindrance -to its expansion into vapor, and that this hindrance increases or -diminishes with the pressure. In a vacuum, of course, the liquid is -free from the pressure, so that boiling ought to take place at a lower -temperature. - -And experiment teaches that this is the case; water boils at a -temperature of 82° or 65°, as the pressure is reduced to one half or a -quarter of an atmosphere, it boils at zero, and even below, in a vacuum. -And we reach this remarkable result, that the boiling and freezing points -unite, and that ice is formed while vapor is set free. But, although the -boiling is advanced, although it takes place at zero instead of at 100 -degrees, although the vapor is cold instead of hot, and the change takes -place in a vacuum instead of in the air, it is a general law that a large -quantity of heat is used, becomes latent, and enters into the formation -of vapor. - -Supposing that we fill a bronze vessel of very thick sides with water, -close it with a lid and fit into it a valve loaded with lead. Place this -in a furnace whose temperature has been raised to, say, 230 degrees. The -water will reach this temperature, and vapor will accumulate until it -reaches a pressure equal to more than twenty-seven atmospheres. - -Let us now open the valve, the vapor will escape, and as it carries with -it the heat necessary for its expansion, the temperature of the water -will gradually fall until it reaches 100 degrees, after which the boiling -will continue slowly and regularly; thus the water has been cooled and is -kept below the temperature of its surrounding wall because it must absorb -the extra heat which is required to change it to vapor. This apparatus is -called Papin’s digester. - -There is a similar experiment, but performed in a vacuum at the ordinary -temperature. Put some water into a closed decanter which is connected by -a tube with an air pump. As soon as a vacuum is produced the water begins -to boil and to freeze, for the vapor can only be formed by borrowing -heat, and there is nothing to take it from but the water itself, which -soon reaches zero and is frozen. This apparatus makes a very simple ice -house, as useful as convenient, and it proves, first, that boiling takes -place at the lowest temperatures providing the pressure is sufficiently -diminished; secondly, that it is always accompanied by a loss of heat; -and thirdly, that it lowers the temperature of the liquid below that of -the surrounding envelope, and the more as the vacuum is more complete. - -Just as opening the valve lets the vapor accumulated above the water in -Papin’s digester escape, and causes a fall in the temperature, so, by -opening the reservoirs in which one has confined a liquefied gas, one -sees it fall back to the boiling point. For example, take the liquid -obtained from the compression of sulphurous acid gas. As soon as the -reservoir containing it is opened the liquid begins to boil, and a -vapor is formed, it is the gas which re-forms. It absorbs the latent -heat necessary, taking it from exterior objects by radiation from the -liquid itself, from the vessel which holds it, and from the materials -into which it has been placed. It cools these until the point at which -sulphurous acid gas boils is reached, twelve degrees below zero; then the -liquid remains balanced between the radiation which tends to heat it and -vaporization, which cools it. The final result is that the temperature is -lowered and remains fixed at twelve degrees below zero. This is not all: -just as the boiling point of water is lowered below zero in a vacuum, -in the same way that of sulphurous acid gas falls below twelve degrees. -Bussy brought it down to sixty-eight, where it remained; not only water, -but mercury may be frozen by this means. - -Finally, the boiling of liquefied gases will freeze all neighboring -substances, and the greatest cold which one could obtain is produced -by their boiling in a vacuum. This property of sulphurous acid was -discovered in a still greater degree in protoxide of nitrogen, which was -changed into a liquid at a temperature of 0 degrees, and under a pressure -of thirty atmospheres. If allowed to boil in a vacuum, a temperature of -one hundred and ten degrees below zero was obtained. When science has -sown trade reaps the harvest; since by allowing liquefied gases to boil, -a temperature of one hundred and ten degrees below zero can be obtained, -and since the vapors which they give off carry away an enormous amount -of heat from the surrounding bodies, it is possible by means of this -cold produced to freeze water, make cold drinks, solidify mercury, cool -cellars, prevent food from decay, and to do many other things of similar -nature. A new art became possible, that of making cold. To-day it is -at the height of success. It is founded on this general principle: to -liquefy the gas by means of pressure, taking care that it does not become -heated, to introduce it into a freezer, where it is allowed to boil, -and from which it absorbs the heat, to carry off the gas and introduce -it again into the vessel, where it will by pressure be liquefied. The -action is constant, the same gas acts indefinitely, and there is no other -expense than that which is caused by running the pumps. In spite of these -fine results and the extraordinary efforts put forth, the end was not -attained. To be sure, some gases had yielded, but still there was a large -number which resisted every effort. Was it necessary to give up the idea -that the law of liquefaction of gases was general, or was it true that -the exceptions were only the results of insufficient means? Faraday had -never varied in his belief. One easily returns to the affections of his -youth, and he believed that the time had come for making fresh efforts -to prove his theory. After a rest of twenty-two years he determined to -again take up the liquefaction of the rebellious gases. Means were not -wanting. Thilorier had taught him how to solidify easily large masses -of carbonic acid, and by mixing this solid with ether make a powerful -freezing mixture; protoxide of nitrogen could be prepared with the same -ease and abundance, and would boil regularly in a vacuum at a temperature -of one hundred and twenty degrees below zero. Thus he was able to secure -a degree of cold before unknown. For compression, he had a pump formed -of two parts; one took the gas at its generation, and accumulated it in -a reservoir under a pressure of fifteen atmospheres; the second part -then received it; here it was subjected to a much greater pressure in a -strong glass vessel which was plunged into carbonic acid or protoxide of -nitrogen. Cold and pressure were thus combined. At that time nothing more -could be done; fortunately this was enough to subdue most gases. Faraday -had the satisfaction of liquefying nearly all gases, and of extending the -law which he had announced, but still six, only six, refused to give up; -among them were marsh gas, oxygen, nitrogen, and hydrogen. Science is a -battle which must be continually renewed; the more the gases resisted, -the greater the efforts made to conquer them. At first, new and energetic -means of pressure were invented. Aimé, a professor in Algiers, secured a -pressure of four hundred atmospheres, without result. M. Cailletet used a -hydraulic press which exerted a force equal to seven hundred atmospheres, -and afterward increased this to one thousand atmospheres, but still the -gas resisted. At last it was found that pressure alone, however enormous -it might be, could not liquefy the gases. - -An English philosopher, called Andrews, put a new face on matters. -He took carbonic acid gas at a temperature of about thirteen degrees -and compressed it. The gas began to diminish in volume, and under a -pressure of fifty atmospheres was suddenly liquefied, taking quickly -a very great density, and falling to the bottom of the vessel, where -it remained separated from its vapor by a surface as plainly marked -as that which marks water and air. Andrews afterward tried the same -experiment at a higher temperature, about twenty-one degrees. The same -results were produced with but one difference: the liquefaction was less -sudden. At a temperature of thirty-two degrees, instead of a separate -and distinct liquid, undulating striæ appeared as the only signs of a -change in condition which was not completed. Finally, at a temperature -of above thirty-two degrees there was neither striæ nor liquefaction, -but still it seemed as if a trace was preserved, for under certain -pressure the density increased more quickly, and the volume diminished -more rapidly. Thirty-two degrees is then the limit, a point between the -degrees which permit and which prevent liquefaction. It is the _critical -point_ which marks the separation between two very different conditions -of a substance; below, we have a liquid; above, there is no change in -appearance, but there enters a new condition, whose characteristics I -will describe. - -Generally a liquid is more dense than its vapor; for this reason it -falls to the bottom, and the two are separated by a level surface. -But supposing that we heat the vessel which contains them. The liquid -expands little by little, until it equals, or even surpasses, the -expansion of the gas, so that an equal volume weighs less and less. On -the other hand, a continually increasing quantity of vapor is formed, -accumulates at the top of the vessel, and becomes constantly heavier. -Now, if the density of the vapor increases, or if that of the liquid -diminishes under the right temperature, the two densities become equal. -Then there is no longer a reason for the liquid falling, the vapor -rising, or for a surface of separation. The two are mingled. Neither are -they any longer distinguished by their different degrees of heat. When -this critical point is reached, it is impossible to tell whether it is -liquid or gas, since in either state it has the same density, the same -heat, the same appearance, the same properties. This is a new state, a -gaseous liquid state. The discovery of these properties showed why all -the attempts to liquefy air had been useless. At an ordinary temperature -the gas is in a gaseous liquid condition. Liquefaction can take place -only when the liquid is separated from the vapor by its own greater -density. The next step was therefore to lower the temperature below that -of the critical point. This was understood and carried out about the -same time by MM. Cailletet and Raoul Pictet. On the 2nd of December, -1877, M. Cailletet subjected oxygen in a glass tube to a pressure of -three hundred atmospheres, and reduced its temperature to twenty-nine -degrees below zero. The gas did not change in appearance, and was in all -probability in the gaseous liquid condition. Nothing but more cold was -wanting to liquefy it. The valve was turned, the gas escaped, and the -temperature fell two hundred degrees, and the characteristic whitish -mist was seen. Oxygen had been liquefied, perhaps solidified. The same -result was reached with nitrogen, but nothing was done with hydrogen. -While M. Cailletet performed this decisive experiment at Paris, M. Raoul -Pictet achieved the same at Geneva. He had at his command all necessary -materials, so that he subjected the oxygen to a pressure of three hundred -and twenty atmospheres, and to a temperature of one hundred and forty -degrees below zero. In this condition the gas was probably below the -critical point, and when the reservoir was opened suddenly it began -to boil and was thrown in every direction. M. Pictet believed that he -liquefied, and even more, had solidified hydrogen, but he was doubtless -mistaken. These results, however, were not satisfactory. M. Cailletet was -preparing a new experiment when the Academy received the two telegrams -given at the beginning of this article. - -Wroblewski and his colleague, Olszewski, had boiled ethylene, a gas -similar to that used for heating purposes, in a vacuum. The temperature -fell to one hundred and fifty degrees below zero. It was the greatest -degree of cold yet obtained, and was sufficient. The success was -complete. The oxygen, previously compressed in a glass tube, became -a fixed liquid. It was like the others, in the form of a colorless -and transparent liquid, like water, but of a little less density. Its -critical point was at one hundred and thirteen degrees below zero, -forming itself below, never above, this temperature, and boiling rapidly -at a temperature of one hundred and eighty-six degrees below zero. A few -days after this the two Polish professors succeeded, in the same way, in -liquefying nitrogen. - -But if the question was settled for air was it also for nitrogen? M. -Pictet, in his experiment, had used a weight of three hundred and twenty -atmospheres, and cold of one hundred and forty degrees below zero. When -he opened the reservoir a jet of gas, mingled with mist of steel gray -color, burst forth. At the beginning of the experiment, solid fragments -accompanied the jet; these fell to the floor with a sound like that -of grains of lead. Naturally, M. Pictet thought that he had not only -liquefied, but even solidified hydrogen, but unfortunately the experiment -was not wholly satisfactory. For perfect success still more acute cold -was needed, and here was oxygen and nitrogen to get it from. Nitrogen, -the most refractory, was taken, and a degree of cold undreamed of before, -attained; in the open air it reached one hundred and ninety-four degrees -below zero, and in a vacuum two hundred and thirteen degrees below. These -temperatures were so low that it was necessary to invent new methods -for measuring them. A mercury thermometer was useless, because it froze -at forty degrees, and alcohol because it became a solid at one hundred -and thirty degrees. No liquid is able to resist such temperatures, so -electric, or hydrogen thermometers, were employed. - -Wroblewski and Olszewski have but lately achieved success. Having -compressed the hydrogen in the above named manner, they froze it by -means of nitrogen boiling in a vacuum. Still it did not liquefy. It was -yet in a gaseous liquid state, but when the tube was opened then there -appeared a transparent and colorless liquid. At last the question of -the liquefaction of gases, which has been discussed so long, has been -settled. When we think of the simplicity of these final experiments, it -seems strange that the problem was so difficult to solve. The trouble lay -in the fact that at the start there was everything to find out; there -was the critical point and the means of freezing to discover. It was -necessary to proceed by steps, using each gas for the reduction of the -one more stubborn than itself. Really, as Biot says, nothing is so easy -as what was discovered yesterday, nothing so difficult as what must be -discovered to-morrow. It might be asked whether the result is worth the -trouble necessary to collect these liquids. The answer must be left to -the future. The chemist will take up this new law of gases, and art will -adapt it to its purposes. For the present, all that it amounts to is -that the natural philosopher has proven that all kinds of materials may -exist in three conditions, and obey the same common laws.—_Abridged and -Translated from “Révue des Deux Mondes” for “The Chautauquan.”_ - - - - -AMERICAN DECORATIVE ART. - -BY COLEMAN E. BISHOP. - - -Among the many so-called “booms” that followed the civil war, as the -result of the wonderful intellectual, moral and material impulse that -it gave the country, one of the most marked and promising of influence -on the national character is the advancement in decorative art that -this generation has seen and felt. Its presence and influence are -observable in the general demand for more artistic interior finishing -and furnishing: for better form and coloring in wall paper, frescoing, -painting, floor-coverings, upholstery and drapery, and in that broader -study of the harmonious wholes of which these are related parts. - -It is not an art renaissance, so much as a new birth of popular art -feeling; a creation, rather than a revival. Facts seem to indicate the -beginning of the long-talked-of American school of art. It is a peculiar, -and peculiarly-encouraging circumstance that this new development is -native and popular instead of imported and select. - -For, we may be very sure that any movement that is to abide and have -much power over our people must be one that touches the average citizen. -To reach him it must be American. It need not be divergent from, and -it should not be antagonistic to established art principles; but, not -the less, in its sympathies, subjects, and methods it must be national. -An art that is to live with any people must be _of_ that people. With -us this requirement of popularity is doubly strong, because we are so -intensely national; because all institutions live and move and have their -being in the commonalty, and because the citizen is the only source of -living patronage of art here, where the state does not foster art as -foreign states do. The artist must eat, and the people must feed him. -Before they will pay for art, they must have sufficient culture to -care for it dollars’ worth, and it must be of a nature to reach their -sympathies. Even in monarchial England, Ruskin perceives the necessity -for beginning at the bottom to upbuild national taste, and he addresses -volumes of letters upon art “To the Workmen and Laborers of Great -Britain” (see “Fors Clavigera”). - -We have not much to hope for in the way of education of American taste -from imported art, for this can never reach or touch the people. A few -_dilettanti_ in our cities can do very little toward creating, or even -influencing a national taste. They have no _rapport_ with true American -culture; they offend national sensibilities by unreasoning rejection of -everything undertaken here; and, above all, if they be brought to the -test, it will be found that they generally have no fixed art principles -back of their opinions and—prejudices. If the average American could -not appreciate foreign works, he was not much helped to a better -understanding of them by their admirers; and he came to think himself at -least quite capable of correctly estimating devotees who could no more -give good reasons for worshiping everything foreign than they could for -scorning everything indigenous. - -The most hopeful augury for this new interest is in the fact that it -relates to that department of art which goes most directly into the lives -and the homes of the people: and that it has been the first to take on -marked American characteristics. Moreover, its commercial features will -be potent influences for its spread and growth. It is capable of being at -once the refiner, the educator and the almoner of thousands. - -Confidence in the inherent genius of my countrymen, led me years ago to -predict that all that was needed for the establishment of a school in -any art was (1) the foundational training of mind or hand; (2) a belief -that it can be done; (3) a market for it. The last most important of -all, because demand inspires originality and creates supply, and because -recompense is the great stimulus to inspiration. Genius in this age is -pretty apt to have an eye to the main chance. - -For all these reasons we are prepared for the conclusion that the impulse -given to decorative art by the organizations known as the “Decorative Art -Society,” and the “Associated Artists,” all of New York City, is the most -valuable of anything that has been done since the nation’s new sense of -the beautiful awoke. These are the parts of one movement possessing these -characteristics: - -It is distinctively American. - -It has compelled recognition at home and abroad as well of its indigenous -originality as of its artistic correctness and merit. - -It has begun the production of exclusively American materials, designed -and manufactured in this country, which are unequaled by anything foreign. - -It is commercially successful. - -By virtue of all these achievements, it is doing a missionary work for -American art by encouraging similar efforts in other cities and other -countries; by demonstrating that “good _can_ come out of Nazareth;” -by putting in the way of thousands of talented women, suffering under -repression and lack of opportunity or for inspiration of hope, the -opening for culture and compensation combined. - -It is to celebrate what has been accomplished, and haply, to suggest the -opportunities open to others, that this narration is essayed. - -The movement was, indeed, patriotic in its birth. It was inspired by the -Centennial Exposition at Philadelphia. The specimens of decorative art -from the South Kensington School in the English exhibit impressed Mrs. -Thomas M. Wheeler, of New York, by their lack of originality and freedom, -insomuch that she declared, “We can do better than that in this country -without any school!” and she set about doing it in genuine American -spirit. The first organization, The Decorative Art Society, which she -instituted, was composed of several hundred ladies of New York. The plan -was national, philanthropic and commercial—to serve art, help women, -beat the British, and make money. Ladies in a large number of cities -were influenced by correspondence and other efforts to form auxiliary -societies. The seed of the new art interest thus widely sown is still -bearing crops. - -From this nucleus there were before long offshoots in two directions—in -a higher and in a more rudimentary line. The Woman’s Exchange was -organized to provide a market for the large surplus of handiwork of -all kinds that was pressed upon the society; and a less numerous, more -compact organization was originated to attempt a higher development -of the work—this being called the Associated Artists. Thus they had -three efficient agencies occupying ground in this order, artistically -considered—The Woman’s Exchange, The Decorative Art Society, The -Associated Artists. Each of these is still doing its appointed work, but -our present purpose has to do only with the most advanced—The Associated -Artists. - -It should be said, however, of the Woman’s Exchange, that it has spread -the most widely; because it deals with the simple forms of ornamentation -which require but little training, but it produces articles that are -salable. Thus it has become a bread-and-butter enterprise to a large mass -of women. Not only do all of our leading cities now boast of Exchanges, -but Princess Louise, after her first visit to this country, caused one to -be formed in Canada. This “Yankee notion” has also been transplanted to -Germany and Sweden. - -The Associated Artists, as first organized, was directed by Mrs. Wheeler -and three gentlemen, artists like herself—Mrs. Wheeler having charge of -the needlework department; one gentleman, of interior wood decoration; -another, of glass painting, and the third, of the color scheme, painting, -etc. They undertook the interior finish of rooms and houses upon entirely -new decorative notions. Among their public undertakings, also, were the -entire interior decoration of the Madison Square Theater, including the -drop curtain; the finish of the “Veterans’ Room” in the Seventh Regiment -Armory, and parts of the Union League Club House. - -The business success of the Associated Artists grew on the managers. The -educational and philanthropic aims were in danger of being overshadowed -by the commercial consideration, and New York gave them abundant -employment without their going into all the world and preaching the -gospel of beauty and self-help to all women. Moreover, Mrs. Wheeler’s -department in the work grew so rapidly and opened out possibilities of -development and creation so great, that she decided to make it a special -and separate enterprise. This she did three years ago, retaining the -name, Associated Artists. - -Success has vindicated the wisdom of the segregation, while the other -members of the older organization have not suffered by the separation. -From that time to the present the enterprise has been managed and worked -by women only. - -The gentlemen formerly of the Associated Artists are working on -independent lines. The decoration of the new Lyceum Theater, New York, is -the latest and greatest triumph of one of them. - -The Associated Artists now have to do with decoration as using or applied -to textile fabrics, including as well all upholstery as the hangings, -draperies, tapestry and applied decoration of any part of a room. In -the building which they occupy in East Twenty-third Street, there are -large exhibition and salesrooms, the studios or designing rooms, the -departments of embroidery, of tassels, fringes, etc., of tapestry, and -the curtain department—an entire floor. There are about sixty employes. - -This is an art school as well as a business house. Many women come -to them with no other preparatory training than the drawing lessons -of our public schools afford. The best talent is furnished by the -Women’s Art School of Cooper Union. Aside from such preparation, the -Associated Artists furnish the education of their own designers and -workers. Unendowed, small, modest and young as it is, we shall see in -what respects this American school has outstripped the great English -institution. - -One of the most serious obstacles that the effort to create American -design has had to meet, is the lack of suitable materials to work with. -All imported textiles were found to be, in color, texture and pattern, -unsuited to the new uses and ideas; and American manufacturers were so -much under tutelage to European tastes, that nothing different was to be -had from them. It is a fact as lamentable as it is astonishing, that a -carpet, wall paper or textile mill in this country rarely has an American -designer of patterns and colors. The schemes of color made by the -Associated Artists were out of harmony with French, English and American -fabrics and embroidery materials. The colors of these were too sharp, -strong and cardinal for the blending of tones that was sought. - -To meet this case a Massachusetts silk mill was engaged to manufacture, -first embroidery silks of the desired shades; and, that being -accomplished, to undertake the coloring of fabrics. The greater step to -the manufacture of special fabrics was next taken. Now the Associated -Artists use only materials made for them in this country. - -There are three different mills engaged on their work, one of which last -year supplied them with $30,000 worth. The work is a great advertisement -to a mill—such recognition have these fabrics gained, here and in -Europe, for fineness, design and beauty. Several European decorators of -first rate have sent for samples of them. Foreign artists and designers -visiting this country regularly have in their note-book memoranda to see -the wonderful new American fabrics at the Associated Artists. These goods -have also been used for garments. Mrs. Langtry, Mrs. Cornwallis West and -Ellen Terry bought largely of them for their wardrobes. Felix Moschelles, -artist, and son of that Moschelles who was the biographer of Mendelssohn, -declared that there was nothing in Europe to compare with these joint -products of American artists and artisans. Truly, there is nothing on the -shelves of dry goods men on either continent to match them; they revive -the traditions of the wonderful products of Oriental looms. - -Another _chef d’œuvre_ of these artists is their tapestry work. It has -the definiteness and freedom of drawing, and the delicacy and feeling -of color of an oil painting; nay, deft fingers with a needle and thread -can produce effects in colors that the painter’s brush can not, because -colored threads reflect and complement each other. This work is done -upon the surface of a canvas, the stitch being similar to that used -upon “honey comb canvas,” all surface work. To make it more effective, -a fabric has been woven with a double warp, the embroidery being run in -under the upper thread, somewhat like darning. The process and fabrics -were invented by Mrs. Wheeler and are protected by letters-patent in this -country and Europe. - -A portrait was woven in this way, thread by thread, so faithful as to be -preferred by the family, to the best work they had of photographer or -painter. A piece of this tapestry has been under the hands of from one -to three embroiderers—or darners, if you please—every day for nearly a -year. It is one of ten large needle-work pictures of American subjects -now in preparation. One of them is a Zuni Indian girl, by Miss Rosina -Emmett, and another, “Hiawatha,” a typical Indian girl of the North, by -Miss Dora Wheeler. (These two artists are directors of the Association.) -The pictures are life size, and are very characteristic studies. The -remaining eight tapestries are mainly upon events of American history. -Only close examination would convince any one that they were not oil -paintings. After seeing this work I am inclined to think less of the -famous Bayeux tapestry and all other pictorial needlework. William the -Conqueror was unwise not to have deferred his exploits until Yankee girls -could embroider them. The best we can now offer William is to invade and -conquer England over again—with American tapestry. - -These high-class works are mentioned simply to show the height that this -line of decorative art has reached, in a short time, by the efforts of -native genius and mechanical skill. - -Nor is the story yet all told of the relation of design to manufactures. -One of the largest manufacturers of paper hangings in this country not -long since offered prizes amounting to $2,000 for the best four designs -for wall paper. The competition was great, sixty designs being entered by -European artists, and many times more by American. When the awards were -opened the examining committee, as well as the donors, were astonished to -learn that the Associated Artists had taken all the prizes, the European -trained talent none. Now, the freshest, best-selling patterns for wall -paper are of American design. - -There is more still to tell that is gratifying to patriotism. These -efforts have discovered to the world, as a fact, what was before the -cherished theory of a few, viz.: that an American school of art already -existed, dominant in brains and hands, waiting to be awakened to -activity. There is a distinctive character in all that has been done -in decoration, different from anything seen in other people’s work. It -has a nationality in choice of subjects and materials, an originality -in conception, a freedom and freshness in treatment, that fairly mark -the beginning of a new school. More than that, when the work of native -designers has come in comparison with that of the Kensington or other -schools, it has justified the opinion that was expressed at the outset as -to the ability of our women to surpass the latter. - -When the Decorative Society was organized, it sent to Kensington for a -teacher, and employed the one that was the most highly recommended by the -management there. At the close of the very first lesson that was given by -this instructor to the leading ladies of the society, she was overcome -by the reception her teaching had met. “Why,” she said, ruefully, “these -ladies have got from me, in a single lesson, all that I know. _I have -nothing more to teach them._” This incident reveals the reason for the -contrast in work—gives the explanation of the stereotyped forms and stiff -designs of the foreign school. The difference is in the human material -that enters into the work in either case—the difference of development -and general culture back of special art training. The English girl who -is forced to earn a livelihood by needlework, and qualifies therefor at -Kensington, represents a different order of preparatory training, general -culture, social position and aims, from those leaders in art who engage -in the work _con amore_ in this country. But there is, also, a race -difference that runs through all society in both countries. The American -woman is a thinker—the English an observer; the American woman is by -nature an innovator, the English conventional; the one an originator, -the other an imitator. The same climatic, dietary, social and political -influences that make the American artisan the most inventive and free -handicraftsman in the world; the American business man the most daring -and rapid, have conspired to make their sisters, and their cousins, and -their aunts the most original and apt pupils of art in the world. We -may confidently look to them, and the sons that they shall give their -country, to go on and create for it a school of art as free and as -characteristic as are all our institutions. - -The movement is but in the embryo stage. All this is the result of a -single effort, and it is still young. Time is of the essence of art -culture, and the United States offers ample verge and scope enough for a -wonderful work in the future. The field for invention in decorative art -is boundless, because genius may touch every item and phase of home and -carry into the innermost life of the whole people the refining influence -of Beauty. - - - - -SOME MODERN LITERARY MEN OF GERMANY. - - -Professor George Ebers, the distinguished Egyptologist, strange to -say, is known in America more by his novels than by his scientific -attainments. He had a severe attack of rheumatism, or something similar, -which confined him to his bed for a long time, but did not prevent him -from using his mind, and during this tedious suffering he undertook, as -I think he himself relates, in the preface of his first novel, to put -into story facts and history with which his mind was so richly stored. -The work grew and fascinated him, and now I dare say it has not only -become remunerative but beguiling. Since the death of Prof. Lepsius, the -distinguished scholar of Egyptian history, George Ebers will doubtless -stand in his stead as the next best informed man in Germany, on Egypt. -The deceased Lepsius thought highly of one of our countrymen, Dr. Joseph -P. Thompson, as a successful student under him, and here we pay a tribute -of respect to this generous man who never failed to escort party after -party of Americans through the Egyptian department of the Berlin Museum, -explaining the tombs and reading the inscriptions. “The Egyptian King’s -Daughter” is the title of Ebers’s most elaborate novel, and if one is -disposed to read it carefully and observe all the foot-notes, there is -quite a chance for the reader to feel delighted with himself for all he -can acquire in this way about Egypt, and to have an inexpressible longing -for more. And what a power of enchanting one these Egyptians have, with -their gloomy and mystified learning, and their frequent contemplation of -death. To give the reader an idea of Ebers’s style, in romance writing -and subject matter, we quote what accurate pictures he gives of all the -state of affairs in Egypt. Speaking of the schools or universities, -in his novel entitled “Uarda,” he says: “The lower school was open to -every son of a free citizen, and was often frequented by several hundred -boys, who also found night quarters there. The parents were, of course, -required either to pay for their maintenance or to send due supplies of -provision for the keep of their children at school. This university, or -school, was connected with the House of Seti, or one of the sanctuaries -of the Necropolis, founded by Rameses I, and carried on by his son -Seti. High festivals were held there in honor of the god of the gods of -the under world. This extensive building was intended to be equal to -the great original foundations of priestly learning at Heliopolis and -Memphis; they were regulated on the same pattern, and with the object -of raising the royal residence of Upper Egypt, namely, Thebes, above -the capitals of Lower Egypt, in regard to philosophical distinction.” -“Many proficient in the healing art,” he tells us, “were brought up in -the house of Seti, but few need to remain after passing the examination -of the degree of Scribe. The most gifted were sent to Heliopolis, where -flourished in the great “Hall of the Ancients,” the most celebrated -medical faculty of the whole country, whence they returned to Thebes, -endowed with the highest honors in surgery, in ocular treatment, or in -any other branch of their profession, and became physicians to the king, -or made a living by imparting their learning, and by being called in -to consult on serious cases.” From this short extract from Ebers any -one can see that he treats his situations, although lying so remote in -history, in the most simple and natural manner. Egypt, with her enormous -architecture, her ponderous institutions, peculiar beliefs and somber, -heated atmosphere, is not to him the dark “sorceress of the Nile,” but a -real, breathing and tangible thing—he has so seriously studied her that -he writes of her as he would of a familiar friend in whom he is intensely -interested. - -Ebers not alone excels in historical pictures and accurate descriptions, -but he has, as a novelist, much feeling, and makes clear comments on -human nature—for example, in writing of Nebsecht, the learned surgeon, -in his novel “Uarda,” he says: “Nebsecht was of the silent, reserved -nature of the learned man, who, free from all desire of external -recognition, finds a rich satisfaction in the delights of investigation; -and he regarded every demand on him to give proof of his capacity, as a -vexatious but unavoidable intrusion on his unanswering but laborious and -faithful investigations.” Then he remarks Nebsecht loved Pentaur, who -possessed all the gifts he lacked, manly beauty, child-like lightness of -heart, the frankest openness, artistic power, and the gift of expressing -in word and song every emotion that stirred his soul. - -Again, behold the picture or a glimpse into a feast of the best -Egyptians. In an open court, surrounded by gaily painted wooden pillars, -and lighted by many lamps, sat the feasting priests in two long rows, on -comfortable arm chairs. Before each stood a little table, and servants -were occupied in supplying them with the dishes and drinks which were -laid out on a splendid table in the middle of the court. Joints of -gazelle, roasted geese and ducks, meat pasties, artichokes, asparagus, -and other vegetables and various cakes and sweet-meats were carried to -the guests, and their beakers well filled with the choice wines of which -there was never a lack in the lofts of the house of Seti. In the spaces -between the guests stood servants with metal bowls, in which they might -wash their hands, and towels of fine linen. - -“Tante Therese,” a drama in four acts by Paul Lindau, is a cleverly -conceived and brightly written thing, showing that the writer is full of -pathos and wit. The audience cried and laughed and applauded the first -night it was given in Berlin. In fact, Lindau is so sharp a critic and -so talented a writer, that, as editor of _Die Gegenwart_, a neat and -pungent weekly, he was a great potentate in Berlin society. His pen -spared no one—musician, artist, soldier—and even royalty fell under -its point if he, Lindau, was not in sympathy with their productions or -actions. He is the life of a dinner party, the most interested musician -and art connoisseur, and among journalists and in the literary coterie -he is the star which lights or exposes the objects around. His reviews -in _Die Gegenwart_ (The Present) are somewhat after the matter of the -reviews in _The Nation_—a little pessimistic or hypercritical, but always -accomplishing their object, and whatever comes from his pen is looked -for with eagerness. With a lovely home, and a beautiful young wife to do -its honors, he attracts about him many brilliant companies. He was once -thrown into prison for having written something which was not prudent in -regard to government matters—the press being not so free in Germany, as -the reader will observe, as in this country. - -Dr. Julius Rodenburg, editor of _Die Rundschau_, is of Jewish extraction, -resembling Felix Mendelssohn so much that one must immediately remark -it. As Mendelssohn was also a Jew, the association seems to grow more -intimate in one’s mind, as an acquaintance with this light-hearted, -spirited man progresses. He seems never to be weary—the world and his -friend have a charm for him, and he and his intelligent wife know well -how to attract them to their weekly receptions. They both speak English -well, and have spent some time in England. He has published a little book -entitled “Ferien in England”—Vacation in England. - -Sometimes he comes out in his review, which corresponds to our _Atlantic -Monthly_, with learned and elaborate articles, but his time is, as -editor, consumed with other people’s productions. Editors of papers and -presidents of colleges have little time for anything but reflection upon -the merits or demerits of others. - -Ferdinand Gregorovius, half German and half Italian, has published four -volumes of the “History of Rome,” also in 1874 a very attractive volume -on “Lucrezia Borgia.” In the back of the book appears a _fac-simile_ -letter from Pope Alexander IV. to Lucrezia, and one of hers to Isabella -Gonzogo—most curious documents. - -Dr. Friedrich Kapp, who came to America when Carl Schurz did, returned -after a short residence and entered political life in his own country. -Beyond his exertion in this direction he has found time for considerable -literary work; has edited the “Autobiography of Benjamin Franklin,” -which contains a preface by Berthold Auerbach. Dr. Kapp is better known, -perhaps, through the press, than through his books. - -Adolf Stahr, in his book on Goethe’s “Frauengestalten,” or female -characters, gives a close analysis, and if the same theme has been -written and rewritten upon as all Goethe’s productions have, Stahr -maintains a dignified review, as if he were surveying the subjects for -the first time. His wife, who is a novelist, is equally literary, and -the two old people have grown beautiful in common sympathy in their -winter work and summer resorts. She attracts more attention than he at a -fashionable watering place, but one is the accompaniment of the other, -and both have done honest, good work. - - - - -HISTORIC NIAGARA. - -BY EDITH SESSIONS TUPPER. - - -The Chautauquan takes back to his or her busy life in the school room, -the college chair, the pulpit, the sanctum, the parlor, and the kitchen, -many beautiful pictures of memory. - -In fancy does one often see the branches of grand old trees, fit pillars -of one of God’s first temples, cross above one’s head, making a network -for the laughing, blue, summer skies; in imagination does one again see a -green landscape turn golden in the light of a fast setting sun. Ah! those -vistas about the Hall in the Grove; can not you see those leafy avenues -bending down to the lovely lake, now in the early morning stretching -glassy and waveless, now at noon, tumbling and tossing its white -caps abroad, now in the solemn night lying black and motionless, and -reflecting the light of stars? Can one who has seen the moon rise over -Long Point ever forget the sight? Recall now that midsummer night, when -drifting out in your boat you idly watched those masses of clouds shift, -part and separate to let the white glory of the moon shine through! How -serene and lofty she hung, poised in mid-heaven. Higher and higher she -climbed, pouring her wealth of light down upon the clouds heaped beneath -her, until they, massed and piled upon each other, seemed like the -glittering domes and towers of a city not made with hands. In vivid fancy -you could almost trace the shining streets of gold, the gates of pearl, -the walls of precious stones. The summer wind sighed softly around; the -murmuring waters rippled about the keel of your boat; on the shore the -lights danced and flickered like fireflies. Such a night is never to be -forgotten. It is a scene of enchantment, a mid-summer night’s dream. - - “In such a night as this, - When the sweet wind did gently kiss the trees - And they did make no noise in such a night, - Troilus methinks mounted the Trojan walls, - And sighed his soul toward the Grecian tents, - Where Cressid’ lay that night. - - “In such a night, - Stood Dido with a willow in her hand, - Upon the wild sea banks, and waved her love - To come again to Carthage.” - -Ah! these beautiful pictures “that hang on memory’s wall,” these day -dreams, by their potent magic, heal the heart and brain when life’s fret -and worry are hardly to be endured. A writer has truly said: - - “’Tis well to dream.” - - “I dream, and straightway there before me lies - A valley beautifully green and fair; - Bright, sparkling lakes, blue as the summer skies, - And trees and flowers dot it here and there. - - “I wake, and straightway all familiar things - Display new beauty to my wondering gaze. - My soul refreshed by wandering, folds her wings - And finds contentment in life’s common ways.” - -To all these beautiful pictures of memory many a Chautauquan adds the -remembrance of one indescribable scene—a look at the great fall. - -A short trip to Niagara is indeed one of the features of a summer’s -sojourn at the city in the woods. Every week a crowd of excursionists -leaves with reluctance the delights of the fair lake and takes a day’s -jaunt to the Falls, which are distant about eighty miles from Chautauqua. -Many of you, my readers, remember that trip—the magnificent views of Lake -Erie, which you got from time to time, on the way to Buffalo. Then the -run down from that city along Niagara River, past Fort Erie and Black -Rock, historic names. You remember how your heart beat a little faster -when the brakeman called, “Niagara Falls,” and you realized that you were -soon to stand in sight of one of the wonders of the world. Of course you -remember the clamoring hackmen, once heard not easily forgotten. Then -have you forgotten that short walk or drive down a shaded street, past -many shops filled with feathers and Indian temptations? Do you recall -that dull, booming sound which suddenly broke upon your ear, and can you -not now sense that delicious, fresh smell of the water as you turned into -Prospect Park, and ah! can you ever forget when you at last stood within -hand reach of that awful presence, when your bewildered and startled -eyes glanced now at the shouting, leaping, laughing, maddening, scornful -rapids; now at that overwhelming mass which flung itself over that -tremendous precipice into a seemingly bottomless pit? Was it a pleasant -day when you were there? Do you then remember the exquisite coloring of -the water, the dazzling white, the vivid green, the pellucid blue? How -the sun seemed to catch up every drop of that vast volume, and shine -through it, giving a tiny rainbow effect to every crystalline particle? -How the rapids called aloud to each other in glee, and chased one another -in a mad race, as to which should first make that mighty leap? Or was it -a dull, gloomy day? Then did they not shriek aloud in horror, and hurl -themselves in black and hissing despair to their awful plunge? - -Did you chance at nightfall to drive or walk about Goat Island, and hear -the chattering and cawing of myriads of crows, which blackened the tree -tops? This is their rendezvous, and the woods are alive with them, and -their weird sounds at dusk, added to that ever present, sullen roar, -produce an unearthly and fantastic effect. Did not your breath almost -forsake your body when you crossed to the three fair sisters lying so -peacefully far out in the midst of that seething, tumbling, foaming hell -of waters? - -At night you saw the electric lights turned on the American Fall, playing -now with sulphuric effect, now giving a ghastly, blue appearance, and now -turning this white, pure Undine to a very Scarlet Woman. The day on which -you first saw these pictures will long be marked with a red letter in -your calendar. - -But, sublime as is the physical beauty of Niagara, we have to deal -with quite another phase of her character; one of which the tourist, -limited by time, seldom thinks. It is only after becoming familiar with -every inch of her picturesque surroundings, after spending days and -weeks drinking in her superb beauty, content to sit, oblivious of time -or space, or sun or sky, that one at last remembers that for many miles -around the ground is covered with the footprints of history. Ground that -has echoed the thundering tread of armies, that has been drunken with -the blood of brave men, that now smiles peacefully, from which violets -spring, and on which children play. - - “Once this soft turf, this rivulet’s sands - Were trampled by a hurrying crowd, - And fiery hearts and armed hands - Encountered in the battle cloud. - - “Now all is calm and fresh and still, - Alone the chirp of flitting bird - And talk of children on the hill, - And bell of wandering kine is heard.” - -To say nothing of the French and Indian wars, the country about Niagara -was the scene of many of the fiercest struggles of the war of 1812, and -some of the sorest defeats to the American side. The battle of Queenston -Heights and Lundy’s Lane, or Bridgewater, were both disastrous to the -American cause, while Fort George, at the mouth of Niagara River, a hard -earned and costly acquisition of the Americans, was wrested from them by -General Drummond, who also laid waste Lewiston, Youngstown, Tuscarora, -and Manchester, then called, now the village of Niagara Falls. Those were -dark days for the Americans, when they fought not only Englishmen, but -crafty and treacherous Indians. - -The first great battle of the campaign on the Niagara during the war -of 1812, was that of Queenston Heights, on the 13th of October. This -was the second attempted invasion of Canada, the first having been the -humiliating failure of Hull, at Detroit, in August previous. General -Stephen Van Rensselaer determined to capture Queenston Heights, and for -that purpose, early in the morning, sent two small columns down the -river, most of which succeeded in landing under a brisk fire from the -vigilant English. Captain John E. Wool led the Regulars up the hill, and -was met by the British on the broad plateau, where a sharp engagement -took place, ending in the Americans being forced back to the beach. -Here they were reinforced and ordered to scale the Heights. This order -was obeyed, and for a short time the Americans had the advantage, when -suddenly brave General Brock, who defeated Hull at Detroit, and who was -now at Fort George, at the mouth of the river, having ridden from thence -at full speed, appeared and took command. A furious contest followed, in -which the Americans, though fighting with the bravery of despair, were -driven to the extreme edge of the precipice, and in which Brock fell, -mortally wounded. - -Then General Winfield Scott crossed the river and assumed command of the -American forces, expecting to be reinforced by the militia, but through -stubbornness and cowardice they fell back on their prerogative, and -refused to be taken out of the state. Twice was Scott attacked by the -British and Indians, and twice repelled them with the bayonet, but at the -third attack the Americans were obliged to retreat. Back, back, further -yet, over the edge of that awful chasm they went scrambling from ledge to -ledge, leaping from rock to rock, stumbling, falling, blindly catching -at twig, branch, stem, blade of grass, even, powder blackened, faint, -weary, bleeding, wounded, dying, only to reach the river to find no boats -waiting to succor them, compelled at last to surrender. Ah! dead heroes! -that was indeed a descent into Avernus. - -In this engagement the Americans lost one thousand men. - -Let the visitor to Niagara not leave until he has taken the drive to -Queenston Heights. It is only seven miles below the cataract, not a long -drive for a summer afternoon. A pretty drive, too, past many beautiful -farms and country seats. Once there one can drive to the top of the -broad plateau, on which the lofty and magnificent monument to General -Brock stands. Now leave your carriage, go to the front of the plateau, -and look. What a view! Directly at your feet lies old Queenstown; across -the river old Lewistown; for seven miles before you, peacefully and -languidly, as if weary from its terrible work up above, flows the green -river, flecked with foam. Yonder, at its mouth, lies Fort Niagara, on the -American side; the ruins of Forts George and Mississaga, on the Canadian -side, while beyond, far as the eye can reach, stretches Lake Ontario, -flooded with the light of a western sun—a sea of glass, mingled with fire. - -In the spring of 1813, Isaac Chauncey, an American Commodore, after a -successful expedition against York, now Toronto, which he held for four -days and then abandoned, after firing the government buildings, captured -Fort George. The Americans held it until the following December, when -General Drummond appeared on the peninsula, between Lakes Ontario and -Erie. On his approach the American garrison abandoned Fort George and -fled across the river to Fort Niagara. As they went they ruthlessly -burned the village of Newark. One week after, the British captured Fort -Niagara, and killed eighty of the garrison, showing no quarter to the -sick in the hospital. Then followed the triumphant march of the British -up the American side of the river, burning and sacking Youngstown, -Lewistown, Tuscarora, Niagara Falls, even to Black Rock and Buffalo. All -the farms were laid waste, and desolation stalked relentlessly through -the entire region. - -The whole campaign on the Niagara had been a series of blunders, and was -most disastrous to the American cause. - -The old town of Niagara, at the mouth of the river, is to-day an -interesting and picturesque place to visit. Here the tourist takes the -steamer for Toronto, and if he have an hour or two to wait, let him -stroll about through the beautifully shaded streets, past the elegant -hotels and private country seats, for the old town is a famous summer -resort now, and is likely to be still more attractive, for a little -Chautauqua is soon to spring up within stone-throw of the ruined -breastworks of old Fort George. - -From the round tower of Fort Mississaga, which commanded the harbor, one -gets a superb view of the lake and of Fort Niagara, just over the border -on the American side. Fort and lighthouse are in capital condition, and -the sight of the flutter of the stars and stripes against the blue sky is -very dear to the American who stands on British soil, and, thinking of -all it has cost to preserve that flag, realizes that it is still there. - -In 1814, the Secretary of War having persisted in his project to invade -Canada, determined, as a first step, to take Kingston. In order to -conceal this movement, and also that there might be no enemy left in the -rear, Major-General Brown, of the American forces, commenced operations -on the peninsula, between Lakes Erie and Ontario. - -On the 2nd of July he left Buffalo, and captured Fort Erie, on the -opposite side of the river. He then pursued his way down the river until -he reached Chippewa Creek. He then fell back a little to Street’s Creek, -and waited for the main body of the force, which arrived on the morning -of the 5th. - -General Scott’s camp was located on a little plain lying mid-way between -these two creeks. In the afternoon he ordered out his brigade for a -dress parade. Approaching the bridge he was met by General Brown, who -informed him that a battle was imminent. The head of Scott’s column -had scarcely reached the bridge when the British opened fire from the -extensive forests that surrounded the creek. Riall, the British General, -sneered contemptuously at the “Buffalo militia,” as he believed them -when they first came in sight, but when he saw them cross the bridge -steadily under fire, he discovered they were Regulars. General Peter B. -Porter had command on Scott’s left, and his men fought well until charged -by the bayonet, when they gave way. Major Jesup, however, covered the -exposed flank, and the fighting became hot and furious along the entire -front. After a time the right wing of the British disengaged from the -line and charged against Jesup. Scott was quick to observe this, and in -his turn charged against the exposed flank. Simultaneously Leavenworth -attacked the left wing of the British, and through the gap between these -two attacking columns, Towson’s battery poured in its canister with -speedy effect, and the British soon retreated in great confusion, and the -Americans had won their only decisive victory on Niagara. - -Chippewa is to-day a tumbledown, uninteresting spot, attractive only to -the student of history. There are some beautiful private residences near -the town, on the banks of the river, and just below the village the river -breaks into the rapids. After the well fought battle of Chippewa, the -invasion of Canada seemed more feasible. General Brown was very sanguine -of success, providing he could secure Commodore Chauncey’s assistance, -with his fleet. He wrote urgently to Chauncey, assuring him that the -British force at Kingston was very light, and that between their two -forces they could conquer Canada in two months, if they were active and -vigilant. But those qualities Chauncey did not possess; besides, he was -ill, and thought he had more important business on hand than to carry -provisions for the troops, and therefore did nothing. Nearly opposite the -American Fall a road runs back over the hill, past the Clifton House and -the Canada Southern Railroad Depot. The tourist following this road, and -turning to the left after passing the depot, will soon find himself in a -beautiful little village. Cottages of quaint and old fashioned design, -nearly covered with vines and roses, and narrow lanes in lieu of streets, -are its distinguishing features. Up a hill you go past a brick church, -and a graveyard, in which you may find many curious inscriptions. The -top of the hill is reached. Look back down that pleasant street, where -old trees stretch out their long arms to meet each other. See those -comfortable happy homes on each side. Hear that group of children laugh -at their play; and listen, from that little brick Methodist church, on -a soft summer evening, come the solemn strains of an old time hymn. No -more peaceful, pastoral scene in the world, and yet the spot on which we -stand was the scene of frightful carnage, terrific struggle, horrible -bloodshed; here was fought the famous battle of Lundy’s Lane. At noon -of July 25, 1814, General Brown received intelligence at Chippewa, -that General Drummond had reached Fort George the night previous, with -reinforcements, with which he intended to capture the stores of the -Americans at Fort Schlosser, which was located just above the rapids, -on the American side. Scott—now a Brigadier-General—was ordered forward -to divert the enemy from this project. He had advanced about two miles -when he was confronted by the entire British force, drawn up in Lundy’s -Lane. Scott engaged the right wing of the British, ordering Jesup to look -after the left. These movements were successful, Jesup capturing many -prisoners, among whom was General Riall. After the battle was well under -way, General Brown arrived from Chippewa with reinforcements. The British -held an eminence on which were planted seven guns. General Brown saw at -once that unless this battery could be captured no impression could be -made. - -“Can you take that battery?” he asked Colonel James Miller. - -“I’ll try, sir,” was the memorable answer of Miller—and he tried. It was -now night, and the approach of Miller’s men was hidden by a high fence. -The gunners held their lighted matches in their hands when Miller’s men -thrust their muskets through the fence, shot down the men at the guns, -rushed forward and captured the battery. - -The British made two valiant attempts to retake the battery, but were not -successful. Generals Brown, Scott, and Major Jesup were all wounded, and -the command devolved upon the inefficient Ripley, who, after idly waiting -half an hour, anticipating another attack, instead of following up the -advantage already gained, withdrew from the field. The British returned, -took possession of the field and the battery which Miller had captured. -The American forces were obliged to beat a retreat to Chippewa for food -and water, and the British claimed the victory as the last occupants of -the field. The loss of men on both sides was about equal. - -Drummond followed the Americans to Fort Erie, opposite Buffalo, and -there ensued a regular siege until the 17th of September, when the -Americans made a sudden sortie and destroyed the works of the enemy. -This was accomplished only by terrific fighting on both sides, in which -the Americans lost five hundred men, and the British nine hundred. -Drummond now abandoned the siege, and in October the Americans destroyed -Fort Erie, and returned to their own side of the river. Thus ended the -campaign on the Niagara. It had been productive of no results save the -digging of thousands of graves, and proving to the British that the raw -Yankee troops were able to give the trained English soldiers some hard -work. - -Just above Goat Island, where the river breaks into rapids, on the -American side, the tourist notices the ruins of Fort Schlosser, of which -we have spoken before as containing stores and provisions on which -General Drummond had designs. Later history has something to say of this -fort. Here occurred a circumstance out of which grew results which for -a time threatened a third war between England and the United States. In -1837, just after the close of the second Seminole war, a rebellion broke -out in Canada. Great sympathy was felt on the American side, for the -insurgents. Despite the fact that the United States made great efforts -to preserve neutrality, a small American steamer, the “Caroline,” made -regular trips across to Navy Island, carrying supplies to a party of five -hundred insurgents, who were staying there. In December, one Captain -Drew was sent out from Chippewa with a force to capture this steamer. He -did not find her at Navy Island, as he expected, and so crossed to Grand -Island, which was American territory, boarded her, killed twelve men on -board, towed her out in the stream, set her on fire, and left her to -drift down the river and go over the Falls. - -The United States promptly demanded redress, but could obtain no -satisfaction for three years. In 1840, one McLeod, who had boasted of his -part in this affair, came over to the American side, where he was under -indictment for murder. He was seized and held for trial. - -The British government demanded his release on the ground that he had -participated in an act of war, and therefore could not for that act -be tried before a civil court. The President answered that as yet the -United States had received no answer to the question whether the burning -of the “Caroline” had been an authorized act of war. In all events the -administration could not interfere with a state court, and prevent it -from trying any one indicted within its limits. England threatened war -unless McLeod was released; but the trial proceeded. The two countries -would doubtless have been brought into conflict had not McLeod been -acquitted. It was proved that he was asleep in Chippewa at the time the -“Caroline” was burned, and that a vain desire for notoriety had caused -him to inculpate himself. There was great excitement in 1841, over -this trial, which was augmented by the indifferent attitude of acting -President Tyler. A District Attorney of New York was allowed to act as -McLeod’s counsel, and retain his office, thus presenting the astonishing -spectacle of a government officer attempting to prove, in such a question -as this, which was liable to result in war, his own government to be in -the wrong. - -Nothing now remains of Fort Schlosser but a tall, gaunt chimney, which -has weathered for many long years the terrific winds which sweep down the -river. - -Throughout this fair and smiling region there are but few traces of these -fierce battles. - - “No solemn host goes trailing by - The black-mouthed gun and staggering wain; - Men start not at the battle cry,— - O, be it never heard again.” - -No blackened farms and desolated villages; no rattle of musketry and roar -of cannon; the sword is turned into plow-share and pruning hook; from -the soil watered with the blood of heroes spring thrifty orchards and -sweet flowers; in the place of fire from the blazing torch of red handed -war rises the smoke of prosperous town and thriving hamlet; Canada and -the United States stretching out friendly hands to each other; the Union -Jack and the Stars and Stripes floating side by side; peace, plenty, and -prosperity on both sides the broad river. Everything is changed save the -great Falls themselves. Unceasingly they do their awful work; unceasingly -their thunders sound; unceasingly their mists roll heavenward. - - - - -TWO FASHIONABLE POISONS. - -BY M. P. REGNARD. - - -Some one said one day before Fontenelle, that coffee was a slow poison. -“I can bear witness to that,” replied the witty academician, “for it will -soon be fifty years since I began taking it every day.” - -This, which was on the part of the cultivated scholar, a brilliant sally -of wit, is, alas! the common reasoning of many people who, simply because -danger does not immediately confront them, allow themselves to be slowly -but surely drawn to the tomb, because, forsooth, the way, for the time -being, is pleasant, or fashionable! - -In the midst of us there are persons poisoning themselves to death. I -refer to those addicted to the use of morphine. In England they have -another class of these unfortunates, for whom the most adulterated -liquors no longer suffice, and who drink ether; they are a sort of -perfected inebriates, who by the scientific laws of progress succeed -simple drunkards just as habitual morphine users follow the opium smokers -of China. Our fathers in Asia who have already bequeathed to us many -misfortunes, held in check until within recent years, among themselves, -the singular taste which they have for opium. Let me tell you in a few -words of the ancestors of morphine users of to-day, and you will better -understand the history of the latter. - -The mania for opium eating diminishes rather than increases among the -Mussulmans. Zambaco, who for a long time lived in the Orient, gives the -reason. The Turk seeks in opium only intoxication—a delicious sort of -annihilation—which he finds to-day more readily in champagne or Bordeaux -wine. These give him, in addition, the pleasures of taste. Then, too, he -can indulge himself freely in them, and still hold to the letter of the -Koran. In the time of Mahomet neither rum nor cognac were invented; it -does not then forbid them. But that which is not forbidden is permitted, -and so the Mussulman, who considers wine so impure that he will not touch -it, even with his hands, will become beastly intoxicated upon brandy, and -think that by this process he is not compromising his part in Paradise. -But their religionists—and above all their medical men—do not reason -thus. They still cling to the opium. - -Its first effect upon the system is far from causing sleep. It is rather -a sort of intellectual and physical excitant, which renders the Oriental -(in his natural state sad and silent), turbulent, loquacious, excitable, -and quarrelsome. - -These Turks are not contented to take opium themselves, they give it also -to their horses. “I have just,” says Burns, “traveled all night with a -cavalier of this country. After a fatiguing ride of about thirty miles I -was obliged to accept the proposition he made to rest for a few minutes. -He employed this time in dividing with his exhausted horse a dose of -opium of about two grammes. The effects were very soon evident upon both; -the horse finished with ease a journey of forty miles, and the cavalier -became more animated.” - -In China they do not eat opium, they smoke it. There is an historical -fact connected with them well known to all the world to which I would -not now call attention were it not to show you to what extent a like -calamity may go, and consequently with what the French people are -threatened if the love of morphine continues to take among us the same -intensity. - -Hundreds of years ago opium was, in the Chinese empire, a great luxury, -reserved for the mandarins, who did not keep secret at all their use of -it, but who interdicted it to all persons under their jurisdiction. All -the more did they consider it a great honor to their invited guests, and -especially to strangers, to be asked to partake of it. Recently it has -come into general use, and since 1840 its abuse has reached the last -limits. There is for all this an economic reason which I shall not fear -to call abominable. The Chinese received in payment for their products -only gold and silver, in money or in ingots; the specie thus introduced -into their country never left it, and it was a veritable drainage which -on this account Europe and America underwent. - -A neighboring nation of ours, and one whose Indian possessions furnish -prodigious quantities of opium, forced China, in a celebrated treaty, -to allow the entrance of this opium into her ports and to pay for it in -ingots and not in merchandise; the empire was thus obliged to disgorge -a part of its money held in reserve. You will have an idea of the -importance of this operation when you know that to-day there enters -annually into China 70,000 packing cases of opium from India, worth at -least $558,000. So much poison forced by right of war upon a whole people! - -The Chinese smoke opium from the age of twenty to twenty-five years. The -immediate effect is a sort of dizzy sensation. The preoccupations of the -mind disappear, as do also all ailments of the body. Then comes a noisy -delirium, a kind of insanity, in which the subject is deeply agitated; he -is apt to hurl down and break everything around him. Sometimes he rushes -out of the house, attacks the first passer-by, and not infrequently in -his frenzy has committed murder. - -The opium smoker, as well as the eater, is obliged rapidly to increase -the dose of his poison. At the end of six or eight months he must smoke a -dozen pipes a day. His money is soon all spent; he is ruined in a year. -He sells all that he possesses, and then he gambles. Writers agree in -saying that the maximum of the life of a smoker is then five or six years. - -In the face of such an evil as this the imperial government has tried to -act on the defensive; it placed a heavy duty on the entrance of opium; -but this system was not successful. And before this attempt it tried -penal jurisprudence. - -This is the decree which the Viceroy of Canton published in 1841: - -“It is two years since the Emperor of the Celestial Empire forbade all -his subjects to smoke opium. This delay of grace expires the twelfth -day of the twelfth moon of this year. Then all those guilty of offense -against this law will be put to death, their heads will be exposed in -public, in order to frighten those who might be tempted to follow their -example.” (Then follows this modification.) “I have reflected, however, -that solitary confinement would be more efficacious than capital -punishment, in order to arrest such a dreadful misdemeanor. I declare -then, that I am going to have built a special prison for opium smokers. -There they will all, rich or poor, be shut in narrow cells, lighted by -one window, with two boards serving as a bed and a seat. They will be -given each day a ration of oil, of rice, and of vegetables. In case of a -second offense they will be put to death.” - -This legislation was not practicable. The punishment was out of -proportion to the crime, and consequently inapplicable. - -Besides, in looking around him the emperor found that his own wives -smoked opium, and I would not guarantee that if he meant to live up to -the letter of his law, he would not have to begin by committing suicide. - -After this legislation they tried moralization and preaching. The -misfortunes of the opium smoker were depicted in an infinite number of -ways. All this propagandism had about as little success as societies -against intemperance, and this state of affairs is existing to-day in the -East. - -There are not noticeably many opium eaters or smokers among the French. -But every one knows that the people of the Orient have for their European -brothers the morphine users. There is between the first and second the -same difference that is found in everything pertaining to barbarous -and to cultivated men. Civilization prescribes as to the manner of the -poisoning. - -While the Oriental eats or smokes simply the juice of the poppy almost as -nature furnishes it, the European is more refined, and wishes only the -active principles of opium. So he uses it prepared in such a way as to -have lost almost entirely its disagreeable properties. - -How does one become a morphine user when he is a Frenchman, an inhabitant -of Paris, and when there is not a temptation to it from the fact of a -general habit, or the existence of special establishments? This can be -accounted for by two methods. The most common is some painful affliction -from which one is suffering, it may be neuralgia, acute dyspepsia, or -violent headaches. The physician, often at the end of his resources, -prescribes injecting a little morphine under the skin. The effect is -marvelous; the pain ceases instantly, but temporarily. The next day it -returns with new force. The afflicted patient remembers the success of -yesterday, and insists upon his anodyne. It seems necessary to give it, -and so it goes on for several days. Soon the nature of the drug manifests -itself: no longer will one injection a day answer; there must be two, -then three, later four, and so on, always increasing, until it reaches -formidable quantities. Meantime, the original trouble may have entirely -disappeared, but the patient does not cease to use the remedy. The first -time that the sick one insists upon having the treatment the doctor is -called to perform the operation. But soon, as it becomes necessary to -repeat the process oftener, making it expensive, it is entrusted to the -nurse or to the family, and from that day the patient is lost; for how -can the supplications of a suffering person whom one loves be resisted? -Then on a day the sick one practices on himself—and from that on, without -any control, with the avidity of passion, he uses the drug in the -quantities of which I have told you. - -This is one way in which many victims fall into this sad habit. There is -another. The victims of the second method are those who seek in exciting -tonics the sensations which their weakened nerves and their surfeited -imagination can no longer afford them. These are the proselytes of a -veritable association, and they, in their turn, soon become missionaries -in the same cause. It is a habit which the vicious have of wishing to -make others like themselves. The fable of the fox which had its tail cut -off is not a fable of yesterday. Two friends meet; one of them complains -of slight annoyances; dullness, _ennui_; he no longer enjoys anything; -the world, the races, the theater, do not procure for him distraction; -he is _bored to death_. His friend admits that he also has suffered in -the same way, but that he had recourse to morphine, of which some one -had told him, and that he found in it a perfect cure. And thus by such -conversations there is formed, as it were, a new class; they are the -volunteers in this unhappy army. - -One can but remark, that luxury, which tends to introduce itself -everywhere, has already invaded the domain of morphine. The little -syringe of Pravas, which permits of the injection of the poison under the -skin, and the consequent avoidance of the bitter taste and the nausea -which would be occasioned by eating morphine, has received ingenious and -artistic modifications. It was necessary to render it easy to carry, and -at the same time to make it deceptive to the eye. I visited a surgical -instrument maker at Paris, and he placed at my disposal for inspection -his whole line of morphine instruments, those which the taste, the -luxury, or the imagination of his clients had caused him to fabricate. - -There was first the syringe, containing a centigram of morphine, such -as the physicians employ. It was not delicate enough, was difficult to -handle and difficult to conceal; it is used now only by those who no -longer care to conceal their vice—who feel no shame in regard to it. -Then there was one adroitly concealed in a match box. At one side was a -little bottle containing a dose of powder necessary for a half day. There -was, too, a false cigar holder, containing all that was necessary for -injecting the poison. But most remarkable of all was a long, sheath-like -instrument. It is somewhat inconvenient in the midst of company to put -the morphine into the syringe before making a puncture. This sheath, -filled beforehand, can be carried in the pocket; the puncture can be -made, and to inject the drug it is only necessary to move the piston in a -certain direction; in the evening the sheath will be found empty. There -were little gold syringes contained in smelling bottles; a little silver -sheath which one would take for an embroidery stiletto; open it; it -contains an adorable little syringe of gold and a bottle of the poison. - -Among morphine users in fashionable life they make gifts according to -their taste, and there are manufactured syringes and bottles enameled, -engraved, and emblematic—in every conceivable device. - -Do men more often become subject to this vice than women? According to -the printed statistics, yes. Out of every one hundred who used the drug -there are counted only twenty-five women. But practicing physicians say -that the women are the more numerous victims. They are more artful, and -try to keep the habit concealed; they do not consult the physicians -regarding it, and so are not counted in the statistical returns. - -Is it then so very agreeable to live under the influence of this poison, -since so many people expose themselves, for its sake, to such grave -perils? To this I reply, no, not at the beginning. It is with this vice -as with others, the beginning is hard. The first injections are not -enjoyable—the puncture is painful, and sometimes nausea follows. But -the habit is easily and quickly formed, and the disagreeable effects -disappear. The introduction of the morphine produces almost immediately -a sort of general vagueness, an annihilation of being which causes to -disappear all external realities and replaces them by a sort of happy -reverie; and at the same time the mind seems more alert, more active. -Physical and moral grievances disappear, all troubles are forgotten for -the time being. “You know,” says Mr. Ball, “the famous soliloquy of -Hamlet, and the passage where the Prince cries out that without the fear -of the unknown, no one would hesitate to escape by means of a sharp point -from the evils of life which he suffers, in order to enter into repose. -Ah well! this sharp point of which Shakspere speaks—this liberating -needle—we possess; it is the syringe of Pravas. By one plunge a person -can efface all sufferings of mind and of body; the injustice of men and -of fortune; and understand from this time on, the irresistible empire of -this marvelous poison.” - -The habit of taking ether is induced by the same causes that lead to the -use of morphine. The danger, however, is not so great, and the habit can -more easily be broken up. At the end of the inhalation one experiences -a little dizziness that is not at all disagreeable; the sight becomes a -little blurred, and the ears ring; the mental conceptions become gay, -charming; hallucinations are developed, generally very pleasing. It is -not necessary to increase the dose, for one would then reach a state of -excitement, or be thrown into a sound sleep, such as physicians produce. -Those who use it know this well, and moderate the dose, in order to make -the pleasure of long duration. After the inhalation the subject returns -almost immediately to his natural state. There is a little heaviness -in the head and a dullness of the mind. Morphine users can secretly -indulge in their habit, but ether emits a penetrating odor. In London, -where it is more frequently practiced, the keepers of public squares and -large parks often find in the more retired places empty bottles labeled -“Sulphuric Ether.” These have been thrown down by those who have left -their homes in order to give themselves up in the open air to their -favorite passion. - -These victims commence by breathing ether. Then they drink a few -drops—and after a while larger quantities. This burning liquid soon -becomes a necessity; and some even go so far as to drink chloroform—a -veritable caustic. - -Can anything be done for these unfortunate people? Yes, certainly—but -only on one condition—that they wish to be cured. The best method is to -separate, instantly, entirely, the patient from his family; to place him -in an establishment where his movements can be watched, where he can be -debarred, suddenly or gradually, as shall be judged best, from the poison. - -The Americans—a practical people—have already built asylums for the -treatment of morphine users. The Germans have recently finished two, one -at Marienberg, the other at Schönberg. - -But unfortunately, the French law does not permit us to do this. We can -place in hospitals only those poison users who have become maniacs or -idiots. - -If the French are to be saved from this rapidly increasing evil, it is -evidently necessary to prevent its beginnings. In order to do this, -the sick must be kept from procuring it. Its sale must be regulated so -that it will be impossible to get it in any quantity, or to use the -same prescription twice. The emperor of Germany, upon the proposition -of Prince Bismarck, has issued a decree to this effect. Under such a -regulation the law for the physician would be never to prescribe the use -of these drugs save in cases of absolute necessity. - -The reading of medical books by the people is generally pernicious. I -would, however, permit them to read the recent accounts of the effects -of these drugs. If they are of comparatively late origin, these two -fashionable poisons have already destroyed more victims than in a whole -century has all the poison used by assassins.—_An Abridged Translation -for “The Chautauquan” from the “Révue Scientifique.”_ - - - - -OUR C. L. S. C. COLUMN. - -BY CHANCELLOR J. H. VINCENT, D.D. - - -For the past year I have given in THE CHAUTAUQUAN a series of articles -on the interior significance and higher aims of the Chautauqua movement, -instead of the answers to questions which filled the C. L. S. C. column -in former years. The closing article of this year must be made up of -answers to questions which are of general interest. - -1. A correspondent inquires “whether Alfred Ayres, author of the -‘Orthoepist,’ and editor of the English Grammar of William Corbett, is a -recognized standard authority in pronunciation, and whether he should be -preferred to Webster or Worcester.” To this I can only reply that I do -not so understand Mr. Ayres’s claim or position in the field of letters. -He certainly is not accepted as are Webster and Worcester; and the chief -advantage of his little volumes is in showing what one man who has given -much attention to the subject of pronunciation thinks on the subject. -That is all. - -2. “How can a knowledge of Greek, Roman, or any other history be of any -benefit to me? I prefer to study the works of God, and in chemistry and -other departments of science to trace the signs of his wisdom.” - -_Answer_: It is important to study God’s great gifts to the race in the -great characters of history and literature. The genius of Homer is as -much a wonder as is any fact in physical science. Acquaintance with the -vivacity, enterprise and energy of the Greek character is as valuable -to people who now live in the world as is a knowledge of the physical -constitution, shape, habits of life, and movements of the colossal -creatures reported by geology as having occupied this planet ages on ages -ago. No education is complete that has not to some extent been influenced -by the spirit of the old Greek culture. The whole history of that people -shows the impotence of mere culture without moral character, and we may -trace through the ages of Greek history the evidences of divine wisdom -and justice. By all means let us study natural science, but let us not -abandon history. Whatever pertains to man in any age of the world should -possess peculiar interest to us. - -3. “People in our neighborhood often say to me: ‘Why study those books? -You will not live to finish the course; and if you do, what good will it -do you or your children?’” - -_Answer_: Ignorant people often ask the question, “Of what use is -education, beyond a small amount of reading, writing and arithmetic? Why -should people who have to work in kitchens and fields study the stars? -Why should men who neither care to act on the stage, or to write for the -press, give much attention to William Shakspere?” Whatever our business -may be, we need to read general literature because we are members of -society, and owe something as rational beings to society. Parents should -keep in sympathy with their children, whose world of knowledge must -of necessity in this age grow wider and richer all the time. We are, -moreover, members of this universe, and God is our Father. We have a -right as his children to know something about his works and ways and -wisdom. Life is a wearisome thing to people who are ignorant. There is -sustaining power in the large thoughts which a true culture brings. If -one expects to live forever with God, he should cultivate noble and -worthy character on this side the grave, and such nobility is increased -and such holiness promoted by a wide range of reading and study with -worthy motive. - -4. I am happy to announce that the “Chautauqua Press” has been fully -organized. Under its direction some of the books of the C. L. S. C. will -be published, and a series of standard books will be issued at once for -the formation of home libraries; books adapted to the special courses and -bearing also upon the Required Readings. - -The first series of three or four volumes will be ready by August 1st, -and will supplement the regular work of the coming C. L. S. C. year. -While all the classes are reading Roman History, Latin Literature, -Italian Biography, and Italian Art, our “Chautauqua Library, … Garnet -Series,” will provide for those who wish to read more than the required -books, and for those who, as graduates, wish to win seals, the following -admirable volumes: - -“Readings from Macaulay. Italy. With an Introduction by Donald G. -Mitchell (Ik Marvel).” - -“Readings from Ruskin. Italy. With an Introduction by H. A. Beers, -Professor of English Literature in Yale College.” - -“Art and the Cultivation of Taste, by Lucy Crane, with an Introduction by -Charles S. Whiting, of the Springfield (Mass.) _Republican_.” - -[The fourth volume of the first series will soon be announced.] - -This series of four volumes will constitute a special course, for the -reading of which the Garnet Seal (a new one) will be given to all -graduates, and may be won by those undergraduates who are able to do more -than the Required Reading for each year. - -The Chautauqua Press will soon have on hand a rich library of cheap but -handsomely printed and bound volumes with which every Chautauquan will -desire to decorate and enrich “The Chautauqua Corner.” - -Now we are on the eve of another summer of rest, of convocation, of -Assembly reunions. From these retreats comes much of inspiration which -keeps the Chautauqua movement in operation during the remainder of -the year. Let me urge all members who can possibly do so to attend -the nearest Assembly. Go to the Round-Table. Record your name on the -list kept by the local secretary. Show your colors, and thus lend your -influence to the Circle. - -In behalf of the administration, the president, the counselors, the -secretaries, I extend to all members of the Circle a hearty salutation; -and to all of you who read these lines who have for any reason grown -remiss or apathetic in C. L. S. C. service, I give an earnest invitation -to come back, resume your readings, join the class of ’89, and make sure -of a successful four years’ course. - -You will join me, I am sure, in one universal Chautauqua salute to the -honored editor of THE CHAUTAUQUAN and his competent associates and -contributors as our tribute to the ability with which our monthly has -been conducted. - -And now, as we “study the word and the works of God,” may our Heavenly -Father be “in the midst,” and “may we never be discouraged” in pursuing -the high and beautiful ideal of the C. L. S. C.: The attainment of -symmetrical and practical culture which will fit us the better to serve -our fellows upon the earth, and to enjoy the blessings promised by our -Father in the heavens! - -PLAINFIELD, N. J., May 21, 1885. - - - - -GLIMPSES OF THE CHAUTAUQUA PROGRAM. - - -A part of our creed of late has come to be that we need change in summer. -If our homes are in cities, we need it because we can not have there the -requisites of good health—fresh air, pure water, quiet; if we live in the -country, we want and need a change which will give us social advantages; -if we are teachers or students, we want opportunities to see, to get new -ideas, to observe new people and their customs. This theory of summer -living makes the demand for summer resorts. It is rare, however, that -any place offers with any degree of completeness health, society and -opportunities. It is claimed for Chautauqua that all three may be found -there; that it is, in short, an ideal summer resort, open to all classes -of people. The outlook for Chautauqua in 1885 confirms this claim, and -gives to its admirers most satisfactory glimpses of what is in store for -them during the coming season. - -Chautauqua is fortunate in having had candid, disinterested men examine -its condition and management, and pronounce their verdict as to its -healthfulness. One of the most critical examiners of public places in -America, Hon. B. G. Northrup, made his visit to Chautauqua last summer -a kind of inspection tour. He pried into every corner and cranny, and -publicly denounced every abuse he found. With “courage indomitable,” the -Chautauqua “powers that be” attacked the enemy, and “they are ours.” This -summer there is no pestilential spot, not one vault nor cess-pool nor -wet spot to poison the water and breed disease. The determination of the -management to have perfect sanitary arrangement at any cost—even if all -other improvements are abandoned—is producing a condition unparalleled. -This result, and the means taken for its accomplishment, are worthy of -close study by every visitor at Chautauqua, particularly by those who are -property owners, or are interested in the government of towns. - -Chautauqua is a _safe_ resting place. But it is more. It is preëminently -a social place. Its social life is as pure and wholesome and natural as -the air and water. Simple, unaffected manners, free, kindly intercourse, -characterize the daily life of the people. “How very democratic you -are here,” said a visitor last year, “and I don’t see a particle of -snobbishness.” And it is true. The simple reason, perhaps, is that -Chautauqua brings out of every one the best in them. People literally -live too high there for snobbishness. They can run out in the morning -for their milk or bread or steak; they can carry their bundles or do -their own washing, and the high, clear, mental atmosphere of the place -forbids them minding who sees them at their duties, forbids any one who -sees them feeling that the work is menial. This mental and social air is -indeed one of the most exhilarating things about the place. You do live -socially above your ordinary level—live so because it is “in the air.” -You can not help it. - -How wonderfully good health and good company contribute to making a good -_working place_. Above all things else Chautauqua is that. Its pure air -stirs your blood until you feel like working; its social life stimulates -you; its opportunities are a constant temptation. Of course Chautauqua -temptations begin with the platform. There are at least two features of -the program for the platform of 1885 which deserve special attention. -Of these the first is—it is timely. The questions which are interesting -society are the questions it discusses. Note what a prominent place -“Mormonism” holds. Miss Kate Field makes it the subject of two lectures: -“The Mormon Creed” and the “Political and Social Crimes of Utah,” and -Mr. W. L. Marshall takes up “Utah and the Mormon Question” in a third -lecture. Temperance, our knottiest social problem, is elucidated by -Miss Frances Willard in the “Evolution in the Temperance Reform,” by -Mrs. Ellen Foster, by Hon. G. W. Bain, by a National Temperance Society -Day, by temperance bands, by conventions, and by every attraction -which Chancellor Vincent can devise and valiant Chautauqua temperance -workers carry out. Missions, too, have a brave array of talent to plead -their claim. The first four days of August are mission days, on which -are discussed means of increasing interest and improving methods of -evangelizing both foreign and home heathens, of raising funds, and of -securing workers. One of the leading mission workers of 1885 will be -the Rev. Wm. F. Johnson, of Allahabad, India. Mr. Johnson has been in -the field nearly twenty years. He will fill the place this summer that -Ram Chandra Bose and the Rev. Mr. Osborne filled in the missionary -conferences of last year. - -A second characteristic is—the program is practical. Every day is full of -hints; every exercise is suggestive. As an illustration, no profession -is attracting so much attention to-day as is journalism; a successful -journalist is to discuss it. Such a subject will be of practical benefit -to numbers of young men and women who will be listeners to Mr. Carroll. -Practical Christian ethics and Christian work form prominent subjects; -as, for example, the three days’ examination of “Parish Work in Cities,” -by Edward Everett Hale, and the interesting meetings of the Society -of Christian Ethics. The tours abroad, while they are so bright and -entertaining, are brimful of suggestions. This summer is to be unusually -rich, the time being given largely to Italy. One pleasing variety will be -a tour around the world with Philip Phillips. - -The special features of the summer will be strong. The Teachers’ Retreat, -which begins its sessions in July, is arranged to do for teachers one -peculiarly necessary work, to show them how to use the best methods, to -lessen the friction which is incident to all school work. It is ably -manned to produce this result, Prof. J. W. Dickinson, of the State Board -of Education of Massachusetts, being at the head of the department of -Pedagogy, and nearly a score of successful specialists assisting in -expositions of their peculiar methods. The terms for the C. T. R. are -very low. - -Persons holding the $5 ticket of the Chautauqua Teachers’ Retreat will -be entitled to the following privileges: All general exercises in the -Amphitheater, including lectures, concerts, recitals, and entertainments, -during the sessions of the Retreat; fourteen lessons in Pedagogy; -fourteen lessons in Practical Application of Pedagogical Science; -four Tourists’ Conferences; two Expositions of Method in Chemistry; -one Exposition of Method in Penmanship; two Expositions of Method in -Elocution; one Exposition of Method in Phonography; one Exposition of -Method in Stenographic Reporting; two admissions to each of the several -classes in the Schools of Language; two lectures on School Methods by -Prof. Edw. E. Smith, Superintendent of Schools, Syracuse, N. Y.; ten -Half-hour Drills in School Calisthenics. Special classes are arranged as -well for those who can find time to take in more than the full program, -or who desire special instructions. - -Each summer, since the idea of a summer school was conceived, there -has been a steady growth in the opportunities given to students. The -coming season keeps up the record for improvement. The C. S. L. stands -preëminent among Chautauqua institutions. In its departments of Greek, -Latin, Hebrew, English, French, German and Spanish, the practical benefit -to be derived in six weeks is altogether inconceivable to those persons -who are unacquainted with the teachers directing the studies, and with -the methods used. To two or three features we would call particular -attention—features which serve merely as samples of work being done daily -in all classes. In the Anglo-Saxon room there is a class which studies -“Hamlet” for four weeks, a series of lessons rich in illustrations and -full of facts. A particular beauty of this class is the free discussion -and analysis of character which Professor M’Clintock encourages. - -Professors Worman and Lalande have many novel devices for fascinating -their students. As interesting study as there was at Chautauqua last -summer was the children’s hour in German, conducted by Professor Worman; -as a lesson to teachers it was unsurpassed, as a drill for children it -would teach them German if anything would. As for the French, the weekly -lectures, the French receptions, and now this year, the “French table” -which Professor Lalande has arranged for, are prominent features. - -Not content with reading Latin, Professor Shumway proposes that his -students talk it. For many students at Chautauqua last summer a tree -became _arbor_, the forest _silva_, the shade _umbra_, the dead alive—a -result, by the way, that very often is accomplished at Chautauqua. The -successful introduction of a School of Microscopy was accomplished in -1884; 1885 will see the work enlarged. This department is under the -direction of an able teacher, Professor Hall. His outfit for observation, -and for preparing and mounting objects is most complete. - -It is said that when the Egyptians moved the huge rocks which form the -pyramids, musicians were stationed among the workmen, and every motion -was made in time to music. Chancellor Vincent seems to have profited by -this suggestion in preparing the Chautauqua program for 1885, for it is -all set to music of the rarest kind. To begin with, the great organ is -handled by a skillful master, Mr. I. V. Flagler. His series of recitals -contain selections from the greatest masters. The chorus will be led by -our old favorites, Professors Case and Sherwin. The Fisk Jubilees, the -Meigs-Underhill Combination, a new quartette—the Schubert, of Chicago, -vocalists with rare voices, and with a splendid _repertoire_—and Miss -Dora Henninges, of Louisville, a superb mezzo-soprano, will complete the -musical program for 1885. - -These are but hints of what the six weeks’ session holds in store for -visitors to Chautauqua this season. The entire program, with all its -specialties, has been prepared with consummate care and with close -regard for popular needs. The management has striven honestly to make -Chautauqua a perfectly healthy place, with abundant social life, and with -opportunities suited to the needs of all classes of people. The verdict -of its thousands of visitors is that in the past they have succeeded. The -outlook for 1885 declares that this year will be still more abundantly -successful. - - - - -LOCAL CIRCLES. - - -C. L. S. C. MOTTOES. - -“_We Study the Word and the Works of God._”—“_Let us keep our Heavenly -Father in the Midst._”—“_Never be Discouraged._” - - -C. L. S. C. MEMORIAL DAYS. - -1. OPENING DAY—October 1. - -2. BRYANT DAY—November 3. - -3. SPECIAL SUNDAY—November, second Sunday. - -4. MILTON DAY—December 9. - -5. COLLEGE DAY—January, last Thursday. - -6. SPECIAL SUNDAY—February, second Sunday. - -7. FOUNDER’S DAY—February 23. - -8. LONGFELLOW DAY—February 27. - -9. SHAKSPERE DAY—April 23. - -10. ADDISON DAY—May 1. - -11. SPECIAL SUNDAY—May, second Sunday. - -12. SPECIAL SUNDAY—July, second Sunday. - -13. INAUGURATION DAY—August, first Saturday after first Tuesday; -anniversary of C. L. S. C. at Chautauqua. - -14. ST. PAUL’S DAY—August, second Saturday after first Tuesday; -anniversary of the dedication of St. Paul’s Grove at Chautauqua. - -15. COMMENCEMENT DAY—August, third Tuesday. - -16. GARFIELD DAY—September 19. - - * * * * * - -The present number closes Volume V. of THE CHAUTAUQUAN and interrupts -for a time the pleasant monthly visits with Local Circles. A review of -the year’s work must be satisfactory to all. It has been a progressive -year for the circles; few have fallen out of line; numbers of new -organizations have been formed; almost all have increased their -membership; the circle work has been done more thoroughly than ever -before; new methods have sparkled on every page of reports; the social -life has been quickened and intensified; the circle evening has become -the most important evening of the week; it has been made the occasion of -practical discussions and of intelligent conversation; a stronger feeling -of union exists; the local circle has become a permanent institution. -There is much encouragement in the review, but there is much for each -circle to learn in a study of the reports of the past year. - -The present issue of THE CHAUTAUQUAN will contain all the reports -received up to the date of going to press; those received after that date -will necessarily be held over for the October issue. - -Very interesting and encouraging reports have been received from HALIFAX, -NOVA SCOTIA, where the local circles are prospering, and much earnest -work has been done. While their routine work and the required course of -reading and study are pursued by the several circles separately, their -occasional reunions are found profitable, and furnish much real enjoyment -for the members. One such was held on Longfellow day at Dartmouth, -across the harbor, which proved intensely interesting to an expectant -audience. Thorough preparation was made for this meeting, and the whole -arrangement was admirable. On Shakspere day an equally excellent program -celebrated the day. The programs for both were highly original. The -annual _conversazione_ of the “Central” circle, TORONTO, was held on -May 19th. The novel little arrangement for a program—three ribbon-tied -circles—looks most inviting. A half hour of orchestra music preceded the -address and concert, after which were stereopticon views and a promenade. -The guests were entertained at the Normal School building, where the -museum and picture galleries were thrown open to them. - -Among the MAINE circles is a goodly one at ROCKPORT, composed at its -beginning in 1882 of twenty-one ladies. They have clung together through -separation in a way quite remarkable. One of their number spent last -year at sea, but took her books along, and had her CHAUTAUQUAN sent -to meet her at various points. Another friend who has been around the -world during the past year missed her books at Antwerp, but writes -from San Francisco that she is ready to make up the year’s work. The -Rockport circle has the peculiar honor of having for its president a -lady over seventy years of age.——“Mountain Echoes” have reached us from -BRIDGETON—nineteen of them. This circle was formed in 1883, and for a -year met monthly; the success was so great that they have doubled their -number of meetings. A sufficient proof of their statement that “good -work is being done.”——Fifteen members of a circle at BANGOR write us -that they have enthusiasm quite sufficient for a class much larger. It -is the steady variety, too, we fancy, for since 1881 they have met, with -few exceptions, every Monday night from October to July. The studying is -done on this evening, and time has been faithfully used, for they have -succeeded in reviewing several books. A talented young physician in their -midst has favored them this winter with lectures on Animal and Vegetable -Biology, with microscopic illustrations.——A spirited circle, the -“Whittier,” of twenty-five members, is working at NORTH BERWICK. Debates -are frequent features of their programs, and they have adopted the -sensible habit of choosing timely questions. Shakspere day was observed -by a reading of the “Merchant of Venice,” the characters being assigned -by a committee. At North Berwick the circle is fortunate in having -members of different denominations who mingle in perfect cordiality. The -result of their work together has been, they write, “an improvement of -mind and broadening of ideas.” - -A pleasant gathering of C. L. S. C. folks has been carrying on local -circle work since October last at MEREDITH VILLAGE, NEW HAMPSHIRE. -Some fifteen members are in the company. A gentleman interested in the -work kindly furnishes them a room, lighted, warmed, and furnished. The -memorial days are held in honor, and recently they have had “an extra” in -a talk on chemistry from a teacher of the town. - -VERMONT is represented this month in a lively letter from MONTPELIER: -“Our circle is not dumb, as might be inferred from our silence, neither -are we deaf to the appeals for reports from local circles. The trouble -is this: Though an organization of about twenty members since October -last, we have until this month been nameless. One name after another was -suggested until ‘The Idea Hunters’ was proposed, and met with general -favor. I think our motto should be, ‘Hunt until you find,’ for we are -constantly hunting in reference books for settlements to the many -questions proposed. We are learning, of course, and getting no little -amusement out of our researches as well.” - -From the “Chautauqua Quintette,” of CHELSEA, MASS., we have this cheery -report: “We are a little company of five ladies, all intensely interested -in the C. L. S. C. work. We derive great benefit from our work, and -some of our programs would be creditable to a larger organization.”——A -slightly discouraged circle, finding it “hard to exist,” is the -“Thaxter,” of ATTLEBORO. The small membership troubles them. It should -not, it seems to us, especially since they have five members who write -“fine essays.” We surmise that if the “Thaxter” has five good essay -writers it is better off than many a large circle, and from the program -of their Longfellow entertainment it is evident that some one of their -number knows how to manage such things. Cheer up, friends.——A really -joyous letter comes from MELROSE, where the secretary of the “Alpha” -has been delaying her report because the new members would not cease -coming in, and she wanted to get them all. She writes: “Every member is -enthusiastic, and I believe that excellent work is being done. This is -my last year—that is to say the last of my _first_ four years’ course. -Please accept the most cordial greetings of our circle; we hope to send -annual greetings for many years to come.”——A dainty hand-painted souvenir -of the Shakspere evening of the “Alpha,” at UXBRIDGE, accompanies their -report of good, strong work. The circle is small, but, says one of -their number, “Chautauqua means a good deal with us.” The “Alphas” are -to be congratulated on the success of the memorial exercises they have -held this year.——Twenty-eight “Pilgrims,” of DORCHESTER, with their -pastor as leader, are pursuing their course up the hill of knowledge -courageously. Their meetings are well attended and interesting. Their -verdict is: “We certainly feel that our circle has been a great benefit -to us all the year, though it has been our first attempt at such work. -We have no reason to regret starting, and look to next year for greater -results.”——At LYNN the “Raymond” circle carried out a very taking list -of exercises in celebration of April 23d. It was the first entertainment -of the kind the circle has ever given, and certainly they ought to -be pleased with their success. Their program has that unusual merit, -originality.——The “Vincent” circle, of NEEDHAM, was organized early in -the fall, and has been flourishing since. Nearly forty members are in the -class, and next year additions are expected. The “Vincent” is going to do -what we wish every circle in existence would do, have a representative -at their nearest Assembly—if you can not go to Chautauqua. The ideas -and stimulus gained would be worth many times the cost and fatigue.——A -suggestion comes from “Clark” circle, of JAMAICA PLAIN, that deserves a -comment. It is that THE CHAUTAUQUAN print more of the programs which it -reports. Did we not furnish at least four programs each month for the use -of circles we should certainly do this. As it is, we prefer to take the -many good suggestions which we get from the programs sent us, and use -them in our monthly programs. We do this because the programs sent us can -not be printed until so long after the performance has taken place that -they are of no practical use to circles; by readapting them we can give -them to circles in a way in which they will be of use. The “Clark” itself -has sent us a program that deserves reprinting, only of what practical -good would be a March program in THE CHAUTAUQUAN for July?——“Although but -a very small part of the great Chautauqua army, we have caught something -of its spirit, and wish it ever increasing success.” So writes the -secretary of the correspondence circle of “Earnest Workers,” of which -Alice C. Jennings, of Auburndale, is president. The circle has a thorough -and systematic plan of work. Frequent letters from the president offer -counsel and hints. At each monthly meeting memoranda from the students -are read. These memoranda contain answers to a list of printed questions, -such as: “What books have you read in connection with the C. L. S. C.? -What three subjects in them have most interested you? Have you met with -any difficulties, and if so, what?” etc. The whole plan of their work -is admirable——The “Acadia” circle of FRANKLIN, MASS., was organized in -1882. It has now sixty members. The president, although pastor of a large -church, has been absent but five times since the circle’s organization. -One of their great helps has been the pronouncing matches on Greek names -and common English words. On Shakspere day the circle had the pleasure of -listening to a lecture from Dr. R. R. Meredith, on “Leisure Hours.” - -From WOODBURY, CONN., comes a plea: “Pray receive into your host of -local circles the ‘Lone Star,’ for we are alone. There were others with -us who are not faded, but gone.” Marriage and going west has robbed the -circle of its members, until but one is left to keep the fire burning on -the shrine. We are glad to find a corner for that one here—certainly in -these columns there is plenty of company and no need to grow lonely.——The -“Newfield” circle of WEST STRATFORD is still “marching on.” On Shakspere -day the circle read “Merchant of Venice” and “Julius Cæsar” with hearty -appreciation, closing their celebration with a C. L. S. C. experience -meeting. Many were the stories told of what Chautauqua had done for -them.——MANSFIELD CENTER, a rural village in a dear old fashioned -Connecticut street, is the home of a circle of eleven members. It was not -begun until January last, but has shown its colors by having quite caught -up. Two of the professors of the neighboring Agricultural College have -given them very interesting lectures, and on Longfellow and Shakspere -days recitations and music furnished pleasing entertainments. - -A report of a successful first year comes from AUBURN, RHODE ISLAND, -where the “Clio,” of fourteen members, was formed in October last. The -new circles are all, like the “Clio,” promising to start next fall with -fresh vigor.——Our thanks are due the “Esmeralda Bachelor” circle for the -program of the first memorial services under the auspices of the Rhode -Island Chautauqua Union. Great credit is due to Prof. John H. Appleton, -the president of the Union, for his efforts to make the occasion a -success.——The _Sentinel Advertiser_, of HOPE VALLEY, devoted almost -a column to a Shakspere evening, at which the “Aryans” of that town -entertained the “Pawcatuck” circle of CAROLINA. Some twenty-six of the -guest circle were present and were greeted with elegant hospitality by -the home circle. - -They are always doing something new at OCEAN GROVE, NEW YORK. The last -has been a Tree Planting Day. On April 15 the C. L. S. C. planted a -beautiful maple for each class respectively of ’85, ’86, ’87, and ’88. -Representatives of each class were present, the largest number, of -course, being for 1888. There was a short address by Dr. Stokes, prayer -by the Rev. A. E. Ballard, and an appropriate song for each tree set out -in Bishops’ Grove. In the evening a “service extraordinary” was held; -trees and tree planting were the topics of talks, of songs, reading -and reminiscences.——The PALMYRA C. L. S. C. has enjoyed two evenings -in chemistry recently, Prof. J. C. Norris, of Walworth Academy, kindly -explaining dark points to them, and performing many fine experiments. -The circle is very warm in its praise of the lecture and lecturer.——A -Chautauqua circle consisting of fifteen members was organized at -UNION SPRINGS in January of this year. The members make their lessons -interesting and profitable with music, questions, and readings.——The -“Philomathean,” of LANCASTER, has a capital way of working in its -inexperienced members. “Questions, criticisms, and commendations are -interspersed through the whole evening. We aim to draw out the silent -ones, to make all interested and feel themselves responsible; try to -have every one feel that he _must_ take every appointment, and allow no -one to escape his turn at getting up question lists and easy work, and -so seek to train them for the more difficult work.” This circle is not -yet a year old, and numbers fifteen members.——We are happy to introduce -the first C. L. S. C. inventors. The “Unique” circle, of LOCKPORT, claim -that honor. Their invention is a game made up from the questions and -answers in THE CHAUTAUQUAN, and is intended to form a comprehensive -review of the year’s work. “The Unique” is the title of it. Would it -not be generous in the Lockport circle to share their discovery with -the rest of us?——The “Argonaut” circle, of Buffalo, entertained a large -number of invited friends at a special meeting held in April. The affair -was a decided success. The “Argonauts” deserve special credit for the -efforts that they are making to awaken interest in the affairs of the -C. L. S. C. by extra meetings.——At YONKERS there is a circle now in -its third year which has never reported to THE CHAUTAUQUAN before. In -all it numbers twenty. Their work during the past three years of their -existence has been in regular programs of essays, readings, and questions -and answers, with an occasional variation to suit necessity. This year -they held a very successful memorial service in honor of Longfellow’s -day, and more recently have had a valuable lecture, with experiments, on -chemistry.——Fourteen persons are reading the Bryant course in connection -with THE CHAUTAUQUAN, at MUNNSVILLE. The circle did not undertake work -until January, so adopted a short course for the rest of this year rather -than try the regular course. We hope to find them at work on the regular -course next fall, with their hopes of a larger membership gratified. - -“Our Junto” is a circle within a circle. Five young men of the “Broadway” -circle, of CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, form it. Their program for the spring -(of which they ought to be very proud) is a little book rather than a -single page, containing the work laid out for the “Juntonians.” The -plan is admirable. Each member has something to do at every meeting, -and he knows what it is to be so long beforehand that he has ample -opportunity to gather material. All circles will find it to their -advantage to give attention to “Our Junto’s” plan.——Last October a few -of the many students in the C. L. S. C. in NEWARK, organized a local -circle. By the perseverance of these few others have been persuaded -to join until the circle numbers about twenty. They have taken the -name “Arcadia.” Memorial days in particular find pleasant observance. -The last celebration, Longfellow day, was especially interesting. The -chemistry is furnishing an excellent opportunity for experiments, which -the “Arcadia” is fortunate enough to have a chance to carry on in an -academy laboratory.——For the sake of northern New Jersey, which they are -sorry not to see often reported in THE CHAUTAUQUAN, the members of the -“Hawthorne,” of HACKETTSTOWN, a circle of five members, formed in April -last, has sent us thus promptly its report. The “Hawthorne” plunged _in -medias res_ and celebrated the Shakspere memorial almost as soon as its -organization was complete. Such a vigorous start promises well for their -progress next year.——The “Round Table” circle of JERSEY CITY is a band -of twenty enthusiastic workers. A great deal of genuine hard work has -been done by them the past year. The memorial days are celebrated, and -every incentive used to foster the true Chautauqua spirit. Experiments -have recently been given the class at the high school under the direction -of the teacher of science.——The “Ionic,” organized in DOVER, in January -last, grows in interest with each meeting. There are nine members, whose -happy experience thus far has been never to be discouraged. But why -should they be? “Each member does his part.” - -The “Kensington,” of PHILADELPHIA, is a circle of eleven members who are -much in love with their readings. Such a success has their circle become -that the members are willing to sacrifice other things to be present, and -the president writes that he has received great benefit in going over -again the fields of study that he harvested years ago.——A letter from -the secretary of the “Pleiades,” of PHILADELPHIA, says: “‘Pleiades’ is -now nearly two years old. We began the present school year by increasing -our membership from nine to eighteen. We took the advice given in THE -CHAUTAUQUAN on simplicity of government, adopting such rules only as -would systematize matters, and having as little formality as possible. -It is a success. The meetings are so profitable that we think of -continuing them all summer. Two of our members have taken college courses -in chemistry, and they have been giving us some practical experiments -in this delightful study. Greetings to our sister circles, and praises -to our _alma mater_.”——The “Emanon” circle, of WEST PHILADELPHIA, has -sustained a sad loss in the death of Mr. John S. Rodgers, to whom the -circle ascribes its success. He had been the instructor of the class for -a long enough time for its members to appreciate his worth and sincerely -mourn his death.——A similar sorrow has come to the circle of WEST -BELLEVUE, where Mrs. Dr. W. G. Humber, a loyal member of the C. L. S. -C., died on the morning of May 3d.——The Chautauquans of PITTSBURGH make -more of Special Sunday than any other circles that we know of. Our last -reminder of this is a tiny vest-pocket program of the exercises carried -out by the “Duquesne” and “Mount Washington” circles on the second -Sabbath in May.——The circle at UNIONDALE writes us that it has chosen -for its name “Meredith,” in honor of Samuel Meredith, first Treasurer of -the United States, and for their motto they have selected “Spare minutes -are the gold dust of time.”——What better proof of the efficiency of the -course than this testimony from the “Tennyson” circle of thirty members, -at ROCHESTER, PA.: “We think generally that our most pleasant evenings -are spent at our circle. One thing that deserves to be especially noted -is that light reading among us is being superseded by solid study and the -reading of standard authors.”——A circle of ’88s, at ALLEGHENY CITY, bears -the popular name of “Wallace Bruce.” Starting with eighteen members they -have grown to twenty-eight, a sign, we hope, that next year they will -increase with the same rapidity. Their program of Shaksperean exercises -is before us, and it bears some excellent numbers.——The “Carbondale” -circle reports a prosperous year. The interest and enthusiasm of the -members is increasing. The memorial days are all observed, and by -devoting ten to fifteen minutes of each session to singing the circle is -becoming familiar with Chautauqua songs. Mr. and Mrs. G. R. Alden gave -the circle some very happy talks on their return from their recent trip -to the Florida Chautauqua and New Orleans Exposition. The circle closed -its first year with a trip to England; this year it closed with a “Greek -night.” Going direct to France they propose to visit Paris, Switzerland, -Italy and Greece. Arrived in Hellas, the manners, customs, home life and -amusements of the Greeks are to be described in short essays. Each member -intends to constitute “thonself” a committee of one to secure a new -member for next year’s circle.——An appreciative letter reaches us from -SPRINGBORO, where a circle now numbering fifteen has been in existence -since 1881. The president writes: “While we are nearing the goal of -graduation we look back with gratitude at our rich feast with kings and -princes, with masters of art, of science, and of literature. Best of all, -we find that we have been made to more clearly understand the wonderful -power of the Infinite in all things. With our motto ‘Invincible’ still -before us we hope not only to finish the course, but keep climbing with -the Chautauqua brotherhood while life lasts.”——Let all good Chautauquans -congratulate the fraternity at MONTROSE. Thus the secretary writes: “It -has long been a wish that we might have a branch of the C. L. S. C. -in our ‘City on the Hill.’ Four attempts were made, but to no avail; -finally a few who were especially enthusiastic endeavored to push ahead -once more. The result has been more successful than we anticipated. We -organized in January with nine members, and now have grown to sixteen. We -trust that July will find us with the desired amount of work fully and -well accomplished. There is a most encouraging prospect of doubling the -membership another year.” - -Twenty-seven enrolled members make up the circle at ERIE, PA. The circle -meets in the Y. M. C. A. parlors, and the informal, pleasant meetings -have proved a great attraction to the members. The Shakspere memorial -was observed very successfully, by a parlor session. The literary part -of the program consisted of a discussion on the authorship of Shakspere, -followed by readings, then came refreshments and the evening was closed -by a half hour of Chautauqua songs. Not many evenings ago an address was -delivered by the president on Emerson, followed by an hour of practical -observation through the telescope. The Erie circle claims that they have -interesting meetings, and as a proof say that a non-member, a blind man, -is in almost constant attendance.——About 100 members of the C. L. S. C. -Alumni Association of PITTSBURGH met in a social way at the parlors of -the Seventh Avenue Hotel on April 20th, to enjoy the pleasures attendant -upon the third annual reunion of the society. Arrangements had been -partially made for the reception of Dr. Vincent, who had been expected, -but the following letter was received instead: - - To the Annual Reunion of the Pittsburgh C. L. S. C. Alumni - Association, Pittsburgh, Pa.: - - MY DEAR FELLOW-STUDENTS—I sincerely regret the engagement which - had been made prior to the invitation to meet you this evening. - The original engagement it was impossible to break. I am - therefore denied the privilege of your feast of reason and flow - of soul. The Chautauqua work increases in expansion and power. - The later classes are steadily growing. I have the good hope that - the classes of ’89, already forming, will be the largest and - most flourishing of all. I am more and more convinced that there - are multitudes of people who would hail with joy the provisions - of the “C. L. S. C.” if they were simply informed concerning - them. Are you doing all you can toward the enlightenment of the - great public with regard to the C. L. S. C. and other branches - of the Chautauqua work? Let me urge you to renewed zeal in this - direction. Bidding you “a hearty God speed,” I remain your - servant in this goodly work. - - J. H. VINCENT. - -The banquet passed off most pleasantly. - -At a recent meeting of the “Evergreen” circle, of GREENVILLE, S. C., the -circle expressed in a series of fitting resolutions the sorrow of the -members at the death of Mr. Richard Grant White, and their appreciation -of the value of his recent work for THE CHAUTAUQUAN. - -A letter from PETERSBURG, VIRGINIA: “We organized our circle last -October, but it was almost January before we got fairly started. We -follow closely the work laid out in THE CHAUTAUQUAN, occasionally having -a public meeting. Our observance of the Longfellow and Shakspere days was -as creditable as any literary exercises ever presented in our vicinity. -Our desire for books has been so much increased by the C. L. S. C. that -we have resolved to establish a library for the reading element of our -city, and we have begun by the purchase of a few works as a nucleus.” - -ORANGE CITY, FLORIDA, has the beginning of, we hope, a large circle, in -six readers who are taking the C. L. S. C. with their general reading. -They use the questions and answers and make the general news of the week -a feature of every program. The “Orange City” circle is looking forward -to an assembly some day at Mount Dora. - -OHIO comes in with a letter too good to lose: “I discover in your May -number that a Kansas member of the C. L. S. C. class of ’85 says he is -the oldest of that class and was born (1815) in the year of the great -battle of Waterloo. I hope he will persevere and enjoy the exercises -until he reaches the age of at least three of the ‘Irrepressibles of -’84,’ two of whom are 75 years of age and one 84. The last is still -reading for another seal and hopes to be at Chautauqua in August. Hope -the member from Kansas will press on in the work he has begun, for -there are great possibilities before him which can only be attained by -perseverance. He will retain his mental faculties fresh and vigorous as -in youth. Press on, good brother, and you will reap your reward here and -hereafter.”——The C. L. S. C. of CINCINNATI and vicinity held their _Sixth -Annual Reunion_ on May 5th in the parlors of the First Presbyterian -Church. A goodly number were present from “Alpha” circle, “Cumminsville,” -“Christie,” “Mt. Auburn,” “Cheviot,” “Grace M. P.,” “Third Presbyterian,” -“Emanuel,” “Covington,” “Newport,” “Madisonville” and “Walnut Hills.” -The program consisted of an address of welcome by J. G. O’Connell, Esq.; -prayer by Rev. S. N. Spahr, followed by music, readings, and recitations. -The room was brilliantly decorated with mottoes and class emblems, and -a profusion of choice and fragrant flowers. From the chandeliers were -suspended the class dates, ’85, ’86, ’87, and ’88, and the letters S. H. -G. and under these were grouped merry companies, who took part in the -collation, which was not the least enjoyable feature of the program. The -quarterly vesper service was held on Special Sunday, May 9th, at Grace -M. P. Church. It was ably conducted by Mr. E. F. Layman, President of -“Grace” circle. Rev. S. N. Spahr gave a very excellent address to the -members upon knowledge rightly directed.——The “Young Men’s” circle of -CINCINNATI has been doing good work this year. The circle is composed -of companion workers in church and Sabbath school, and the bounds of -union have been strengthened by the united study of the “Word and Works -of God.” The Chautauqua studies were taken up by them with an earnest -desire to better fit themselves for successful work. Their faith and -courage has been severely tried by the death of one of their active, -earnest members, Mr. George E. Wilcox—a sorrow which they are struggling -to make a blessing.——The class of ’88 has a live section at MORROW, the -“Irving.” There are over thirty regular attendants in the band and their -fortnightly meetings are conducted like college recitations, a pastor -being the instructor. May the “Irvings” prosper and multiply. - -A friend writes from NORWAY, MICHIGAN: “We wish to be recognized by our -fellow-workers as a prosperous circle, although a small one, and we are -very glad we have joined them.” The “Norway” has made a splendid record -in its year’s existence, having met every week since last October. It -need not fear a lack of cordial welcome here.——“Thornapple” circle, of -NASHVILLE, boasts a history very similar to that of the “Norway.” It -was first organized a year ago, and its membership is ten. The members -are all workers, and kindly report themselves highly pleased with the -Chautauqua Idea.——A letter full of the Chautauqua characteristics comes -from DECATUR: “Our ‘Pansy’ circle of twenty-five members have held -regular meetings since October. We are enthusiastic, and have done -genuine work. But it has not all been work. We have had a ‘question -match’ upon Greek History and Mythology, the winner of the contest -receiving as a prize an original poem. On Founder’s day the question -box was on ‘What has Chautauqua done for me?’ On Longfellow’s memorial -the circle visited a neighboring class, spending a merry evening. But -the red-letter day of the year was April 23d, when a dinner party was -tendered the members and their husbands by one of the circle. It was -generally pronounced the most enjoyable affair the town had had in many -a day and served as a good advertisement of what the C. L. S. C. does -for its members. Few of our guests knew how much we had done or could -do.”——An unusually good joint meeting took place at FLINT in honor of -Shakspere. Two circles of the C. L. S. C. and one of the Spare Minute -Course united. We like one thing on the program particularly. After -taking up in essays Shakspere’s Character, Home Life and Contemporaries, -the essays were all studies of one play—“Macbeth;” thus the plot of -“Macbeth” was outlined, then followed “Macbeth’s Character,” “Lady -Macbeth,” “Who was Duncan?” “Witches and Ghosts,” and “Moral of Macbeth.” -This is a much more satisfactory method than several disjointed readings -or studies. The evening was closed by conversation and readings, -conducted by an able Shaksperean scholar, Hon. E. H. Thompson. - -Shakspere himself would, we wager, have been nothing loath to have taken -part in the celebration given in his memory at GOSHEN, INDIANA; for -“Kitchen Science” illustrated took up the first part of the evening, and -the supper, we are told, was not confined to the articles on which THE -CHAUTAUQUAN has tried to instruct its readers this past year. In the -evening, after these gastronomic exercises were finished, a literary -program was carried out.——Here is a circle “of the first magnitude.” Read -its record. “The FRANKLIN C. L. S. C. of INDIANA has increased during the -past three years from a membership of twelve to forty-five. We have never -failed in having our regular meetings every two weeks since we first -organized. During the past winter the circle managed the lecture course -of our city, and as one of the results cleared nearly $100. Chancellor -Vincent was one of the lecturers, and the members of our circle were -delighted to meet him after hearing ‘That Boy.’”——The C. L. S. C. at -LIMA, representing classes ’85, ’86, ’87 and ’88, is one of the brightest -and most wide-awake circles in the State. The circle was organized -three years ago, and now has a pleasantly furnished room with piano, -library, etc.; meets every Friday evening, and observes all memorial -days.——SHAWNEE MOUND has a Chautauqua class of twenty-three members. We -are pleased to notice that the circle passed, at a recent meeting, a -resolution of respect in memory of Richard Grant White, expressing their -sorrow at the loss which American scholarship, and in particular the -C. L. S. C. have sustained.——We are pained to record the death of Mr. -Hermon St. John, at SALEM, on May 1st. The Chautauqua work loses in him a -faithful friend. - -It has been remarked in these columns already that “Alpha” of QUINCY, -ILLINOIS, is famous for its novelties. Their latest sensation was the -very practical illustration of a subject given before the circle by the -secretary. This gentleman is a native of Hibernia, and so was chosen for -a paper on dynamite. When called upon to perform he produced a package -of the explosive, much to the consternation of the members.——There died -at RUSHVILLE, on April 18th, the oldest member, without doubt, of the -C. L. S. C. in the world, Mr. Van Rensalaer Wells. Three years ago his -daughter began reading to him the books of the course. He took a lively -interest in these readings, and finally joined the class of ’86. Had he -lived it was his intention to have visited Chautauqua at the graduation -of his class.——A good woman from CHICAGO writes: “I went about from house -to house among my friends, and finally succeeded in inducing three young -persons, all earning their own living, to begin the readings with me.… -We sit around a table socially, and discuss freely our literary repast.… -I forgot to say that I am a very busy woman, the mother of three boys. -My best reading is often done after nine at night, when the little eyes -are closed in sleep.”——The announcement of a new C. L. S. C. arrival -is made from OREGON, where the “Ganymede” of twenty members appeared -in October last. Busy people, but they feel that they can not afford -to miss the Saturday evening meeting. The meetings are to be continued -through the summer for the purpose of review.——Another Illinois addition -made to the C. L. S. C. last fall was at SAVOY, where a club of eighteen -was gathered. Notwithstanding the very severe weather and deep snow, -and the fact that the circle members are farmers, living far apart, the -sessions are full and wide-awake. A very good plan has been tried by -the circle in chemistry, the blackboard being used for exercises. Every -circle ought to have a blackboard.——The history of the class at BUCKLEY -began in 1882, when six members met in informal meetings for discussion. -In 1884 it was thought wise to organize formally. Since that time the -circle has been making a decided impression upon the community. Two -public meetings have been given, which have attracted general attention. -At the last, the closing session of the year, thoughtful remembrance was -made of the president by the gift of a beautiful chair.——A band of nine -join the ranks from WARREN. It is only of late the class has found a -name. It is “Meridian,” from the fact that the town is situated on one -of the meridians. The circle has been following THE CHAUTAUQUAN in its -plan of work, using the published programs, with slight variation.——“It -takes three to make a circle,” writes a lady from FARINA, “and we are -three; one ‘Invincible,’ one ‘Pansy,’ and one ‘Plymouth Rock.’ We are -scattered as to time, but are united in interest, in enthusiasm, and -in determination. Our circle was organized in November, 1881, only a -dot—myself—but though alone, and unsuccessful in securing readers, -and hindered in every way from doing the best of work, there was a -satisfaction in doing the readings that nothing had ever brought into my -life. What we shall accomplish as a circle, the future will reveal, but -there is no ‘giving up’ to any of us.”——A Chautauqua circle of MOLINE, -not yet a year old, and a Shaksperean circle, under the same direction -as the former, have been coöperating the past season in a series of -parlor meetings of great interest. In January it was a dinner party; on -Founder’s day a literary performance with brief essays on Chautauqua -subjects; and on Shakspere day a decidedly new thing—a Shaksperean -quotation contest. No one was allowed to give a quotation that had been -given by another, and the successful competitor took the prize on his -ninety-fifth quotation.——We are in receipt of the Longfellow program of -the “Oakland” circle, of CHICAGO; an excellent and varied list of numbers -it is. The “Oakland” is a wide-awake circle. - -From MARKESAN, WISCONSIN, the secretary of “Climax” circle writes: “We -are still in a flourishing condition. Although some who were with us last -year have gone to new homes, we have new members to make up those we have -lost. There are no very young students in the class, but one has to wear -two pairs of spectacles to see. We have observed most of the memorial -days, and found the programs in THE CHAUTAUQUAN very useful.”——What one -zealous reader did is told in a note from DARLINGTON: “Last year myself -and daughter read the course alone. Before the beginning of the present -year I put a short article explaining the C. L. S. C. scheme into our -local paper, and called a meeting of all those who would like to take the -course. The result is that we now have a circle of thirteen. There will -probably be an increase next year.” - -A beautiful souvenir of the Longfellow celebration of the “Vincent” -circle at MILWAUKEE, MINN., has reached our table. The memorial was a -perfect success, and with justice the members felt very proud of it. The -“Vincent” is another circle sprung from the faithfulness of a single -reader, a lady who in 1883 began the course, and in 1884 had gathered a -circle of twenty-two about her, each one of whom responds promptly and -faithfully to all calls for class work.——The “Quintette” of “Plymouth -Rocks” at DULUTH have been doing the regular work since October, in -informal meetings led by the different members in turn. They expect soon -to change their name to suit an enlarged membership.——The “Gleaners,” -of ZUMBROTA, with a goodly number of their friends were treated to an -interesting program of exercises on Shakspere day. The “Gleaners” are -a power in their community, and have, they say, “enough enthusiasm to -fill up an evening without refreshments.”——At HASTINGS a circle began -life in October with sixteen regular members, besides several local -members. The class has had a sad break in its ranks by the death of Miss -Kate Stebbins, a bright young woman who had undertaken the C. L. S. C. -studies.——ST. PAUL bids fair to become exactly what its Chautauquans are -aiming to make it, a great C. L. S. C. center. To this end a “Central” -circle has been formed in the city, composed of six circles, the -“Wakouta,” “Itasca,” “Dayton’s Bluff,” “Plymouth,” “Canadian American,” -and “Pioneer,” and numbering in all over an hundred members. The -“Central” circle celebrated Longfellow’s day by a very enjoyable program, -and is trying to make arrangements for other joint entertainments. The -St. Paul friends are proud of having two of their number prominent at -Lake de Funiak, Mrs. Emily Huntington Miller, one of the founders of -the “Pioneer” circle, and Dr. L. G. Smith, pastor of the First M. E. -Church.——The home of the Minnesota Summer Assembly, WASECA, is the center -of a stirring circle of twenty members. The increase in the circle is -largely due to the efforts of the Rev. A. H. Gillet and his colaborers at -the Assembly, which met at this lake for the first time last year. The -“North Star,” of Waseca, offers a very attractive plan of work. - -The IOWA friends come in as strong as ever. WINTERSET reports a new -circle of twenty-five members, with a weekly program published in the -local paper, and growing zeal.——DUNLAP reports another which is in its -second year, and which numbers twenty-three. An especially good program -was arranged by these friends recently. A number of their members -visited New Orleans the past winter, and an evening of sketches of -Exposition sights was arranged.——“Sunny Side Straight Line,” of HAMBURG, -is composed of two school ma’ams. They meet whenever and wherever it is -convenient; after five p. m., before eight a. m., at the gate or in the -kitchen. Pleased with the course, they are looking forward to joining -the “Pansies” at Chautauqua in 1887.——The AFTON circle had the pleasure -of celebrating its first memorial day on April 23d. They succeeded so -admirably that Addison day was observed as well. The Afton circle pays a -kind tribute to the work: “We are glad the Chautauqua Idea struck us, but -sorry it failed to reach us sooner. It has been of untold benefit to us, -opening to our view new fields of thought, and arousing new resolutions -for the future.”——At BLANCHARD the “Pansy” class gave an entertainment -not long ago for the benefit of their work. An elocutionist was secured -and after the performance the C. L. S. C. and its aims were presented to -the audience. The circle realized a nice little sum from their venture, -which they propose to turn into maps, charts and the like for their room. -An excellent idea.——Kindly mention we must make, also, of the DECORAH -circle. Like all Iowa circles, it “grows.” The secretary writes: “We -began last year with quite a small number, but have kept adding to our -numbers until there are eighteen now who are reading the course. Our -circle is composed entirely of ladies, the most of whom have work that -takes up the greater part of their time. We have very pleasant meetings -and derive much pleasure and profit from them.”——WASHINGTON, IOWA, has a -circle of thirty members. It has been holding weekly meetings for over -two years. At the close of last year this circle held a picnic with -the Fairfield circle, and this year they have distinguished themselves -by an elaborate Longfellow entertainment. “Miles Standish” was read -and illustrated by tableaux. The Washingtonians certainly displayed -extraordinary artistic ability in arranging one, at least, of these -tableaux. They wanted “Priscilla” led in on her “Snow-white Bull,” but -how to manage the “palfrey” was a question. Here is how they did it: A -long narrow table was padded, the legs wrapped, a head with suitable -horns constructed, and the whole thing finally wrapped with white -cotton-flannel. “Necessity is the mother of invention.”——A beautiful -memorial comes from one of the members of the circle at HUMBOLDT. “My -mother, aged eighty-one years, died March 4th. She was the first one in -this county to become interested in the C. L. S. C. She made her eldest -grandson a member, bought the books for the first year’s course, and -read them first, marking whatever she wished him to notice. At our class -meetings she always selected from the Bible the chapter to be read at -the opening exercises.… A grand helper has left us.”——At KEOSAUQUA a -circle was organized as long ago as ’82. Of the original eight members -only three are left, but the circle has more than held its own, now -numbering twelve or more members. They are fortunate in having as a -leader a teacher of unusual ability.——At TABOR a circle was organized -last September, which, with a goodly membership of interested members, -is doing excellent work. A Professor from Tabor College has helped this -circle much by performing for them chemical experiments. - -The Chautauqua work has lost one of its strongest members in COOPERSTOWN, -DAKOTA, this year, in the sad death of Mrs. H. G. Pickett, who -accidentally shot herself in her husband’s bank in that town. She was an -ardent admirer of the Chautauqua work, and her life a true exposition of -the truths that the C. L. S. C. is striving to bring into the practical -every-day life of its members.——A spirited Shakspere anniversary was -celebrated at FAULKTON. The parlors where the circle met were filled to -overflowing with delighted guests, and full exercises of tragedy, song -and jest were carried out. - -The “Kate F. Kimball” circle, of MINNEAPOLIS, KANSAS, started on its -career in October last with a membership of thirteen. Their plan is -simple and practical—a sure way of introducing conversation. Each member -is required to prepare five questions on the readings, which are given -to the circle, and which are then discussed. This method would serve a -good purpose in the _conversazione_.——The _Kansas City Journal_ suggests -that Tuesday night in that city ought to be called Chautauqua night, as -nearly a dozen circles meet there on that evening.——The “Clytie,” of -ARKANSAS CITY has had a severe trial of its loyalty this year. Malarial -fever has broken their ranks so that they have been able to hold but a -few meetings. It does not dampen their ardor though, and they express -all honor and gratitude to Superintendent and Counselors for their wise -help. The “Clytie” joins another Kansas circle in protesting against -the name “Plymouth Rocks.” This is the “Greenwood,” of EUREKA, which -declares, “We can not become reconciled to it.” The “Greenwood” does not, -however, allow its pleasure in the reading to be spoiled by the class -name, for it writes: “Chautauqua gives us a broad departure from our -daily cares and ruts which is very refreshing, and we trust it will be of -benefit to us.”——Here is a five-year-old Kansas town, EVEREST, of five -hundred inhabitants, with a circle of sixteen members. Here is certainly -a chance, with such a start, to grow up with the country.——Greetings -to the class of ’86, and to all Chautauquans, come from the circle at -LEAVENWORTH. This circle has ten members. Its chief circle interest is -the question box, which frequently leads to a lively discussion. They are -favored in having secured an excellent leader, the Rev. J. A. Monteith. -Several of this class are reading the White Seal course. - -There are in NEBRASKA nineteen circles of the C. L. S. C. A strong -effort is being made to secure at the Assembly at CRETE, in July, -a full attendance of representatives from all these organizations. -Accept a word of advice from THE CHAUTAUQUAN. Go to Crete if you can -get there. It will pay you in more than double measure to take part in -the exercises of C. L. S. C. day. Of the nineteen circles of Nebraska, -the one at LINCOLN takes the lead, we believe, in numbers. It has -reached forty-seven, with an average attendance of about forty. In -recognition of the literary character of the circle the Superintendent -of Public Instruction in Lincoln has kindly opened a room in the new -State House to the circle. The Lincoln circle, as befits its location -at the capital of the State, is taking active measures to make the C. -L. S. C. day at Crete a success. Already they have attracted public -attention by a unique Shaksperean festival, at which a number of guests -were entertained.——Another of the nineteen is at FALLS CITY, an ’88 -offspring. The circle has seventeen members. An executive committee of -three appoints instructors for the review of each meeting, following -the plan in THE CHAUTAUQUAN. The class observed Longfellow day with -appropriate exercises. Our Falls City friends have chosen a name with a -meaning—“Misselts”—“I will surmount all difficulties.” Not an easy name -to take, by any means, but the “Misselts” is made up of school teachers -mainly, and what can they not do?——An addition to the Nebraska circles -is made at HOLDREGE. It came about in this way, writes a friend: “I left -my home circle in Indiana in December last and started out to ‘try my -fortune in the far West.’ I first stopped at Odell, Nebraska, and tried -to introduce the ‘Chautauqua Idea’ there. I found it was already being -talked of, and by the efficient efforts of a gentleman interested in the -movement, a grand, earnest circle was organized. In February I came to -Holdrege, the ‘Magic City,’ as it is called, naturally expecting every -one to be interested in the C. L. S. C. I had almost decided to give up -the course, because I was so busy, when I met a teacher of the town—a -‘Pansy.’ We have formed a circle, and next year instead of having the -smallest number possible, expect to compare favorably with any in the -State.”——BLAIR has a circle of twenty-two members this year. A small -circle has been at work in the town for two years, but this year its -membership has increased in remarkable proportions. Blair is situated -within sight of the Missouri River, and from this noble stream the circle -calls itself the “‘Souri.” Occasional parlor meetings for invited friends -are enlarging the work rapidly in Blair. - -Already we have given our readers hints of the noble way in which -Professor Spring has been representing Chautauqua at NEW ORLEANS. His -last public exploit was the Shaksperean Anniversary. From a local paper -we learn of the success of the undertaking: “The thirty-first birthday of -the Stratford-on-Avon bard was celebrated last evening at the Exposition. -The ceremonies were gotten up almost entirely by Prof. Edward A. Spring, -director of the Chautauqua classes in sculpture. It was hoped that Judge -Braughn and other local gentlemen learned in Shaksperean lore would have -been present, but a heavy storm prevented. The ceremonies, however, -were very successful, though briefer than had been intended. They were -presided over by ex-Governor Hoyt, from far-away Wyoming, chief of the -jury on education, who made a brief but eloquent oration in commencing -the proceedings. He dwelt on the incomparable greatness of Shakspere -and the immense influence his writings have had on the many millions of -people speaking the English tongue, and showed how, as the centuries roll -on and as the English speaking peoples grow and multiply, the luster -that attaches to his name must grow brighter and brighter. Following -Governor Hoyt, Professor Spring made a neat little speech, setting forth -the benefits accruing to those connected with the great educational -institutions with which he was connected, and how appropriate it was for -the Chautauquans to include in the fifteen great events they commemorate, -the birth of Shakspere. Mr. Spring then introduced Mrs. Florence Anderson -Clark, of Bonham, Texas, a member of the C. L. S. C., who closed the -evening by reading an original poem on Shakspere.” - -From the far western frontier of TEXAS, at ALBANY, comes this letter: -“Three of us associated ourselves together the first of October to read -the Required Readings of the C. L. S. C. In January we were joined by two -more. Our method of study has been to have each member originate twenty -questions, to present at each weekly meeting to the members, who on the -following week take them up to answer and discuss. The circle has been -quietly but seriously working. The benefit of having a certain course of -reading has already been felt, and we believe that many others will be -influenced to join us the next year.” - -COLORADO is represented by a circle of seventeen at DELTA, a growing -young town blessed with many people of culture and refinement. The circle -belongs to the ranks of the ’88s, and is proceeding with the vigor -characteristic of the class. They luckily can introduce good music as a -part of each evening’s program. By the secretary of the Delta circle a -word of experience is added: “After pursuing the course of study nearly -four years, I can add my testimony as to its great inspiration to all who -are systematically keeping it up.” - -CARSON, NEVADA, has the “Sierra Nevada” circle of twenty-five ’88s, a -vigorous young life that, in spite of delays in getting books, and the -discouragements in starting, is getting along famously. The spread of the -C. L. S. C. in the West depends very largely upon the organized circle. -The “Sierra Nevadas” have a summer work of bringing in recruits, as well -as of making up back lessons. - -The flags are flying from the “Green” circle, of PORTLAND, OREGON, and -“we are getting along splendidly,” is their watchword. They write that -they are growing more and more enthusiastic, and that the circle is -becoming “a joy and a feast of good things” to them all. “Green” circle -had a brilliant Longfellow celebration last winter. The feature of it -was a Longfellow picture gallery, representing the principal heroes and -heroines. A good idea to remember when we come around to February 27, -1886. - -The remarkable Floral Festival held in SACRAMENTO, CALIFORNIA, on May -5th, in honor of Mrs. M. E. Crocker, to whom that city owes so much for -her munificent charities and endowments, was participated in by two of -the local circles of that city. The “Sacramento” circle sent an elegant -tribute to the festival. On a bust about three feet high, decorated -with flowers and bearing the letters C. L. S. C., was erected a gateway -with gates ajar; within was an open book. The “Vincent” circle sent one -equally unique—a pyramid of flowers surmounted with a flower-wreathed -pole, from which was suspended a banner of flowers. - -The “Alma” circle of SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA, consists of seventeen members -of the class of ’87. Longfellow’s day was a very pleasant occasion with -them. The president tells us: “The good effects of the reading are -already to be seen among our numbers; a desire for good and profitable -reading being manifested more and more as we pursue the course.”——The -Chautauquans of SAN JOSÉ had a very interesting meeting in celebration -of the “Bard of Avon.” A most excellent program was rendered. One of the -leading features was a very able critical review of “As You Like It,” -read by a lady of the circle. - - - - -THE C. L. S. C. CLASSES. - - -CLASS OF 1885.—“THE INVINCIBLES.” - -“_Press on, reaching after those things which are before._” - - -OFFICERS. - - _President_—J. B. Underwood, Meriden, Conn. - - _Vice President_—C. M. Nichols, Springfield, Ohio. - - _Treasurer_—Miss Carrie Hart, Aurora, Ind. - - _Secretary_—Miss M. M. Canfield, Washington, D. C. - - _Executive Committee_—Officers of the class. - - * * * * * - -There will be excursions from Chautauqua to Niagara Falls every few days -during the season, and there will be no difficulty in securing ample and -satisfactory accommodations for the class of 1885, or any portion of it. - - * * * * * - -The challenge of our classmate in Kansas brings forth the following from -Maryland: “I see in the May CHAUTAUQUAN a chivalric old gentleman hailing -from Kansas, claiming to be the oldest member of the class—being born in -the year the battle of Waterloo was fought. Now, I have entered on my -seventy-fifth summer, and remember distinctly the battle of Waterloo. -But, he claims also to be the _youngest_. Now, if I shall have the -pleasure of meeting him at Chautauqua, and he is so disposed, we will -run a foot race. But, really, this is the time for ‘grave and reverend -seigniors’ to speak out. Who comes next?” - - * * * * * - -NEBRASKA.—I trust that I shall be numbered with those who shall “pass -under the Arches” at dear Chautauqua this summer, thereby proving that -I am one who is earnestly striving to “Press on, reaching after those -things which are before.” The C. L. S. C. means a great deal to me. These -magic letters are the key which unlocks all the enthusiasm of my being. -These four years have been a new revelation to me, and have been of -deep, abiding interest, and a well-spring of joy. Last year my dearest -friend, a devoted Chautauquan, a member of the class of ’85, a thorough -“Invincible,” in every sense where right was involved, went on before. -Since that time I have read alone, but hope to be one of the successful -many who shall pass under the Arches and “begin” again, instead of ending -on Commencement day. - - * * * * * - -An earnest society lady writes: “The whole bent of my life is changed by -the C. L. S. C. Next to being a Christian, it is the greatest blessing of -my life. I read and listen to sermons and lectures more intelligently, -and have been led into a spiritual life.” - - * * * * * - -ONTARIO.—I have often felt it my duty to express my thankfulness to the -C. L. S. C. for the information I have received from their well chosen -books. Words are inadequate to express my gratefulness to Chancellor -Vincent and his coadjutors for the great and lasting benefit I have -received from this course, although being unable to do the work as -thoroughly as I would if time permitted. I complete my four years this -summer, and I am more anxious than ever to explore other books which -I have not read. This circle of reading has created a desire for some -branches that hitherto was dormant, and revived the desire for others. -From the first I have been anticipating a trip to Chautauqua, but will be -unable to gratify my desire this summer. I hope to be able to receive my -diploma at home. I think our class motto is excellent, and hope we will -all prove worthy of our name—“Invincible.” - - -CLASS OF 1886.—“THE PROGRESSIVES.” - -“_We study for light, to bless with light._” - - -CLASS ORGANIZATION. - - _President_—The Rev. B. P. Snow, Biddeford, Maine. - - _Vice Presidents_—The Rev. J. T. Whitley, Salisbury, Maryland; - Mr. L. F. Houghton, Peoria, Illinois; Mr. Walter Y. Morgan, - Cleveland, Ohio; Mrs. Delia Browne, Louisville, Kentucky; Miss - Florence Finch, Palestine, Texas. - - _Secretary_—The Rev. W. L. Austin, New Albany, Ind. - - * * * * * - -From all quarters there comes up the assurance from members of ’86 that -they mean to be at Chautauqua or Framingham this summer. Attendance at -an Assembly, with its enthusiastic “Round-Tables,” conferences upon -literature, art and science, new lights upon past reading, and new -outlooks for the future, well nigh doubles the value of the course. Come, -earnest readers of ’86, and see. - - * * * * * - -Plans are already being formed for the graduation exercises at Chautauqua -next year, and the hardly less interesting observances at the New England -Assembly. Any suggestions bearing upon this important matter may be -freely made by letter to the president or secretary, by those who can not -be present at the Assemblies. The class of ’86 is the first _large_ class -to graduate; it has done grand work in the course, and it means to honor -Chautauqua and itself by suitable exercises and observances, when its -thousands shall come up to receive from the University their diploma in -August, 1886. - - * * * * * - -We shall hear, personally or by letter, at the Assemblies, from our -honorary members, of whom the class of ’86 is justly so proud. - - * * * * * - -Will members of ’86, in New England, remember the new Hall of Philosophy -at Framingham, now under way, and to be completed by July 1st? Send your -subscription, if you have not done so; subscribe and send at once if you -have not yet taken a share in this grand enterprise, and induce your -friends to lend assistance, that the few hundred dollars needed to finish -and furnish the building may be at once forthcoming. Remit to N. B. Fisk, -Woburn, Mass. - - * * * * * - -It is hoped that there will be a large number of the New England members -at the Framingham Assembly in July. - - * * * * * - -Let your light shine! hold the torch on high! let every one see that the -class of ’86 is true to its name—“Progressives.” - - * * * * * - -Miss Alice C. Jennings, ’86, whose poems from time to time have appeared -in THE CHAUTAUQUAN, writes as follows: “A severe sickness in childhood -deprived me entirely of the sense of hearing. This has been more -effectual than bolts and bars in excluding me from all institutions of -learning. You can easily imagine how precious to a person so situated -must be the opportunities of the C. L. S. C., and of the ‘Society to -Encourage Studies at Home.’ At least four of my deaf friends have joined -the C. L. S. C. on my own solicitation. We have tried to have a circle -among ourselves. We live in five different places, but our headquarters -are at Boston Highlands, and we send reports there every month.” - - * * * * * - - “We study for the light,” we would not be - Like the black hue, absorbing every ray, - But like the white, gladly reflecting all, - That we may be true children of the day. - “Blessing with light,” as we have each been blessed, - For wisdom makes the weary earthway bright, - And walking in its ways we soon shall rest - With _Him_ in realms of everlasting light. - - —_Mrs. E. J. Richmond._ - - * * * * * - -To the New England Branch a suggestion is made in the interest of the -class, and in behalf of the excellent Secretary of the New England -Branch. Will not _every_ member not able to attend at Framingham this -summer send (July 15-28) to Miss Mary R. Hinckley, South Framingham, -Mass., a postal card with postoffice address, and bearing, if nothing -more, “Yours for ’86”? To ascertain those who and how many are affiliated -with “the good class of ’86” in New England, is most desirable for -weighty senior and graduation interests. - - * * * * * - -Reports from various quarters lead to the conclusion that, compared with -the whole number at any time enrolled in the class of ’86, the number -entering upon the Senior year will be exceptionally large. It ought to be -large—larger than any class preceding, more thorough, more enthusiastic. -We have the advantage of the experience of all who have gone before. Let -us rise to our privileges. - - -CLASS OF 1887.—“THE PANSIES.” - -“_Neglect not the gift that is in thee._” - - -OFFICERS. - - _President_—The Rev. Frank Russell, Mansfield, Ohio. - - _Western Secretary_—K. A. Burnell, Esq., 150 Madison Street, - Chicago, Ill. - - _Eastern Secretary_—J. A. Steven, M.D., 164 High Street, - Hartford, Conn. - - _Treasurer_—Either Secretary, from either of whom badges may be - obtained. - - _Executive Committee_—The officers of the class. - - * * * * * - -At a great camp meeting near Indianapolis, in the first week of August, -the Rev. Frank Russell, President of the class of ’87, is to set forth -in an address, the nature of the C. L. S. C. as an educational and moral -force. - - * * * * * - -The wake of a C. L. S. C. class is found to kindle a bright way for the -next. Much correspondence of the officers of the class of ’87 has been -toward the interest of the class of ’88, and is now extending even toward -that of ’89. Each succeeding class seems to promise increasing numbers -and power. - - * * * * * - -A member of ’87 has succeeded in forming a circle at Jefferson, Ohio, of -ten members. She writes: “I can not tell you all the good our circle is -doing for us individually. We have enjoyed our chemistry very much. We -were very pleasantly entertained and instructed by experiments given by -Professor Perry in April.” - - * * * * * - -From St. Johns, N. B., Mr. G. A. Henderson sends the following account of -the C. L. S. C.: “We organized with five ‘Pansies,’ and were joined this -year by seventeen ‘Plymouth Rocks.’ We were the means also of influencing -the formation of another circle of ’88, over twenty in number. At present -there are about sixty reading the course in our city. We look forward -with deep interest to the publication of the book by our chief ‘Pansy,’ -and although we have not contributed to it, we hope to meet and march -with you through the Gates in ’87.” - - * * * * * - -Hannah Percival Hamer, a member of the “Pansy” class, died at her home in -Taunton, Mass., April 24, 1885. She was a most faithful worker and firm -advocate of the Chautauqua course. - - * * * * * - -On the 9th of April Miss Maggie B. McKnight, of Chambersburg, Pa., a -member of the “Pansy” class, died. She was a devoted and enthusiastic -Chautauquan, and looked with great pleasure toward the time when she -could visit Chautauqua. She was reading with another member of the class, -who intends, however, to keep on, saying that she “could not do without -it now.” - - * * * * * - - “Pansy—a tender thought!” - A happy prophecy was that, to send - That one bright flower of our class to hide - Behind this modest emblem, while she penned - Her strong, sweet thought. A prophecy fulfilled; - For pansies—tender thoughts of her—are found - Within the garden of our hearts in bloom - The whole year round.—_J. B. Stuart._ - - * * * * * - -Westfield, N. J., is the home of a “Pansy” circle, calling itself by -the cheerful name of “Hope.” It began with three sisters reading the -course together. It was very fitting that they should receive their -first inspiration from reading “Four Girls at Chautauqua.” The “Hope” is -working hard to increase its membership. - - -CLASS OF 1888.—“THE PLYMOUTH ROCKS.” - -“_Let us be seen by our deeds_.” - - -CLASS ORGANIZATION. - - _President_—The Rev. A. E. Dunning, D.D., Boston, Mass. - - _Vice Presidents_—Prof. W. N. Ellis, 108 Gates Avenue, Brooklyn, - N. Y.; the Rev. Wm. G. Roberts, Bellevue, Ohio. - - _Secretary_—Miss M. E. Taylor, Cleveland, Ohio. - - _Treasurer_—Miss M. E. Taylor, Cleveland, Ohio. - - All items for this column should be sent, in condensed form, to - the Rev. C. C. McLean, St. Augustine, Florida. - - Class badges may be procured of either President or Treasurer. - - * * * * * - -The following are among the circles not yet reported in our column. I -first give name of circle, then place and number of members: “Gradatim,” -Kennebunk, Me., four; Bloomfield, Ind, seven; Niobrara, Neb., eight; -“Master” (motto, “Labor is the price of mastery”), Ionia, Mich., eleven; -“Peripatetics,” Chicago, Ill., twelve; “Magnolia,” Marianna, Fla., -fourteen; “Philomathean,” Lancaster, N. Y., eighteen. The last named has -by quotations, recitations, readings and essays celebrated the “memorial -days.” For six months none but ladies composed the circle. They, however, -so charmed three gentlemen that they sought admission and became -enthusiastic students. The members of this circle so dislike the class -name that they have refused to adopt it. They are among the others who -express their enjoyment of the class reports in our ’88 column. - - * * * * * - -The circle at Hastings, Minnesota, twenty-three members, has instructed -its secretary to write their objection to our name. Among other things -is the following: “In THE CHAUTAUQUAN we read of one class talking of -establishing a ‘Heliotrope Bed’ at Chautauqua, and another a ‘Pansy Bed.’ -We might send a coop of ‘Plymouth Rocks,’ but we fear they might demolish -the beds of flowers.” We have received encomiums of praise of the name. -One from Mount Carmel, Connecticut, says: “Our name, like every other -worthy thing, in spite of its ‘fowl’ associations, needs no defenders.” -One from Toronto, Canada, writes: “I am satisfied with our name, for -although it represents a speckled bird it will ‘crow’ a good deal when -four years old.” Another from Marine, Ill., after thanking Chancellor -Vincent for “How to Read Alone,” protests against a change of name or -motto.—A member of our class, a boarder in a Young Women’s Christian -Association of New Haven, Connecticut, writes: “I think as one takes up -Chautauqua books he loses the relish for stories, e’en though written by -good authors. What an opportunity for gaining knowledge of the highest -order!”—“Angle” circle, North Groton, N. H., is bereaved in the loss of -one of their earnest workers, Mrs. E. E. Merrill, a lady who read much -and well, and yet in the five short months had become so fascinated with -the C. L. S. C. that almost her last words were those of appreciation of -the same.—The East Norwich, L. I., circle is likewise bereaved in the -death of a devoted member, Miss Lizzie Franklin.—A class of unmarried -ladies complains that they have not been noticed. If they will send us -another letter, writing the name of their circle so we can decipher it, -and also give the town, or city, and state in which they live, we will -gracefully and gladly bow our recognition. - - * * * * * - -“Among the Indians: Osage Agency, Indian Territory.—Our circle consists -of six members—five teachers and one bookkeeper. Although each lives -a busy life, we have had weekly meetings, kept up with the required -reading, and celebrated two authors’ days, Bryant’s and Longfellow’s. -Surrounded as we are by Indians, who still wear blankets instead of -citizen’s dress, and who are not far advanced in the arts of civilized -life, we feel doubly thankful for the benefits arising from such a course -of reading.” - - * * * * * - -In Bingham Cañon, Utah, a mining camp situated about twenty-eight miles -southwest of Salt Lake City, the New West Education Commission has a -school established. One of the teachers proposed taking the Chautauqua -course alone, but, mentioning it to several, organized a circle of six. -Of the name she writes: “I like it so much. My home is in Plymouth, Mass.” - - * * * * * - -Half of the members of “Carleton” circle, Hudson, Mich., live out of town -from two to six miles, yet they are numbered among the most enthusiastic -and faithful. They have had full programs at every meeting, and have -observed all memorial days. They number thirty-seven, twelve being of our -class. The ’88s wear on their hats a symbolical badge (a _fac-simile_, in -brass, of the pedal extremity of a Plymouth Rock). They like the _motto_, -but not the _name_. - - * * * * * - -One from Gilbert’s Mills, N. Y., writes: “I can not longer refrain from -expressing how much I enjoy the reading of the course, although I am -pursuing it alone, occasionally meeting with the circle at Fulton, five -miles from here, which I much enjoy. The more I read and learn, the more -anxious I am to go on, that I may be no disgrace to our grand class name, -that takes me back to dear New England, and home. I would prove myself -worthy of it and of our motto.” - - * * * * * - -The “Chippewas” is the name of a circle of twenty-two members, formed at -the city of Eau Claire, Wis., October of 1884. Four of the members belong -to the class of ’86, the others to that of ’88. The society has met once -a week, and has observed the memorial days. In addition to the prescribed -course, the class is reading the two volumes of Timayenis’s History of -Greece. - - * * * * * - -“Mountain City” circle, Frederick, Md., very appropriately and -enthusiastically celebrated “Shakspere Day.” The program consisted of a -“Sketch of his Life,” and the reading of “The Merchant of Venice,” the -members taking the different characters. - - * * * * * - -Mrs. F. B. Edwards, who with her daughter joined the class of ’88 last -fall, and was a faithful and diligent member, died at her home in -Hartford, Conn., March 14, 1885. She was a lady of excellent education, -and had also the culture of much foreign travel and residence in Europe. -She was delighted with the C. L. S. C. plan, and especially with the -opportunities it offers for mental and moral growth. - - * * * * * - -One of the most earnest and beloved members of the “Pierian” circle, -of Brooklyn, N. Y., Morgan Morgans, has lately died. Mr. Morgans was a -young man of but twenty years of age—a member of the class of ’88, and a -zealous Christian. - - * * * * * - -So much having been written _pro_ and _con_, respecting our class -name, it is proposed to have the entire class vote for or against the -name. The circles will send their vote, giving the number in favor and -against present name. Those who are not in circles can send their votes -as individuals. The vote should be sent to the Rev. C. C. McLean, St. -Augustine, Fla., at as early a date as possible. - - * * * * * - - Thoughts are but the seeds of truth ready for the ground, - Promises of future good that will within be found; - Yet, with purer, truer thoughts the words have purer sound. - - Words are slender saplings, growing in the earth, - Starting from the very spot where the thoughts had birth, - But the noblest words can never tell the deed’s great worth. - - Deeds are mighty forests, towering and grand, - Not results of thoughts that were planted in the sand, - But deeply rooted, broad-leaved trees that will forever stand. - - Thoughts are truly noble, yet their work lasts but a day, - Words are often mighty, still their power may not stay, - But the influence of noble deeds can never pass away. - - —_Emily G. Weegar._ - - - - -THE SUMMER ASSEMBLIES. - - -FRAMINGHAM, MASSACHUSETTS. - -The writer of this article has visited, in different years, most of the -Sunday-school Assemblies, and he has found none, not even Chautauqua -itself, where the wave of C. L. S. C. enthusiasm runs higher than at -the New England Assembly, South Framingham, Mass. Every class has its -headquarters, trimmed with greens and flowers, with the class-motto -wrought upon its walls; and every class has its anniversary, with toasts -and cream. The Round-Table is crowded at every session with intelligent -students, who can both ask and answer questions. If a reporter could have -taken down and printed all the replies given one afternoon last summer -to the inquiry, “What good is the C. L. S. C. doing?” it would have -furnished a valuable document for the use of workers in the cause. The -camp-fire is always crowded; last year the ranks, arranged by classes, -counted over five hundred members; and this year it will be greater. - -The traveler on the railway sees already a white columned building -gleaming among the trees on the summit of the hill. If he be a -Chautauquan, he needs no one to tell him “The Hall of Philosophy,” for -he recognizes it at once as the copy in every detail of the building at -Chautauqua. This Hall will be dedicated by the Chancellor during the -coming session of the Assembly, when from all New England the faithful -will rally to participate in the great occasion. Its dedication will take -place on Wednesday, July 22d, and the address will be delivered by the -Rev. Edward Everett Hale, D.D., one of the Counselors of the C. L. S. C. - -The Recognition day services will be held on Thursday, July 25th, when an -address will be given by the Rev. Luther T. Townsend, D.D., of the Boston -University. - -Among the leading lecturers (and lecturesses) of the Assembly during the -present season will be the Rev. F. E. Clark, D.D., Prof. W. N. Rice, -Dr. E. C. Bolles, Dr. R. R. Meredith, Dr. Geo. C. Lorimer, Robert J. -Burdette, Miss Kate Field, and Mrs. Mary A. Livermore. - - -MONTEAGLE, TENNESSEE. - -Monteagle is in the State of Tennessee, upon the Cumberland Mountains, -2,200 feet above the sea-level. We have here the most invigorating, -health-giving atmosphere, the purest water, the most beautiful wild -flowers, the grandest mountain scenery, the most picturesque views of -the valley lying hundreds of feet below, the loveliest vales, the most -magnificent forests of native trees—indeed, a combination of all the -desirable natural conditions for a pleasant summer resort. - -This is the place which has been selected by the Christian people of -the South, of broad views, of liberal hearts and generous impulses, of -intellectual culture and refinement, for the location of the Monteagle -Sunday-school Assembly. This Assembly is permanently established by a -charter granted by the State of Tennessee. For two years they have been -very successful. - -If there is virtue in faithful and capable teachers and honest work, no -one in 1885 will go away from Monteagle dissatisfied. - -These schools offer to teachers and intellectual people a place where -they can spend the heated term of each year, combining study with rest -and recreation, in a delightful and inexpensive mountain resort, free -from all social dissipation. It is proposed to furnish in the summer -schools of Monteagle the best instruction in every department open. All -who seek absolute rest on these mountain heights will be free to take it; -those who shall seek only lighter courses will find entertainment; and -those who wish thorough instruction will not be disappointed. - -The summer schools open June 30th. The Assembly opens August 4th, and -closes August 28th. Among the lecturers will be Dr. B. M. Palmer, -President Chas. Louis Loos, Dr. D. M. Harris, Bishop Walden, Sau Ah-Brah, -the Rev. Sam Jones, Dr. Lansing Burrows, Wallace Bruce, and Hon. G. W. -Bain. - - -ISLAND PARK, INDIANA. - -The Island Park Assembly will hold its seventh annual session on the -beautiful grounds of the association near Rome City, Indiana. The -Assembly will open July 14th, and remain in session until July 30th. The -Tabernacle Lecture Course will be unusually brilliant and attractive. -Among the speakers will be Bishop Foster, Bishop Bowman, Prof. C. E. -Bolten, Wallace Bruce, Dr. Geo. C. Lorimer, Dr. H. H. Willets, Dr. John -Alabaster, the Rev. John DeWitt Miller, and Miss Lydia Von Finkelstein. - -The music will be under the general management of Prof. C. C. Case. The -Goshen full band and orchestra, and the Hayden Quartette will be in -attendance. The Sunday-school Normal Class will be under the personal -instruction of the Superintendent of Instruction, and will be one of -the most important features of the coming Assembly. The course will be -identical with the Chautauqua course, and graduates will be entitled to -the Chautauqua diploma. - -The visitor finds the Island, some twenty acres in extent, a few -minutes’ walk over a bridge and through a shady avenue from the railroad -station, Rome City, with the village at an equal distance westward. -The Island is naturally beautiful, always fanned by cool breezes, with -hills and miniature valleys, romantic nooks, a beautiful beach, and a -drive partially surrounding it, many fountains and wells, and a plaza -surrounded by hotels and offices. Beyond the rustic bridges of the canal -are a Tabernacle seating 3,000, a building containing the Model of -Palestine, and the Art Hall with its large lecture rooms. - -From the north is to be seen, a mile across the Lake, “Spring Beach,” a -well appointed hotel in an elaborately improved park, containing mineral -springs and the famous trout ponds. - -South of the Island, across a bridge, are the Assembly lands, containing -the Amphitheater, and laid out in lots and avenues, with a high bluff -to the Lake. Here are opportunities to tent in perfect quiet or in the -liveliest streets of the Assembly City. - -Two steamers ply on Sylvan Lake, between the Island, the head of the Lake -and Spring Beach. Two hundred row boats are kept. - -Postoffice, telegraph, bathing and laundry facilities on the ground. -Ample hotel and boarding arrangements in the village. - - -MONTEREY, CALIFORNIA. - -The sixth summer Assembly of the Chautauqua Literary and Scientific -Circle will be held at Pacific Grove, near Monterey, California, opening -with an address Monday evening, June 29th, and closing Friday, July 10th. - -This Assembly, in spirit and purpose, resembles the famous Assembly held -each summer at Chautauqua Lake, New York. The course of lectures during -the coming session will include in its subjects not only scientific -themes, but those of art, history, and general literature. - -Microscopes, stereoscopes and other apparatus will abundantly illustrate -the lectures. The managers also intend to add to each evening’s lecture -the attraction of beautiful music, illustrative tableaux, recitations, -etc. - -The Assembly will open on the evening of June 29th, with an address by -Dr. C. C. Stratton, of San José, President of the Pacific Branch. - -A few of the speakers and subjects will be as follows: The Rev. Dr. -Wythe, Oakland, “Scenes in Great Britain and the Continent;” Prof. H. -B. Norton, San José, “The Knights of the Temple;” F. B. Perkins, San -Francisco, “Wit and Humor;” Dr. C. L. Anderson, Santa Cruz, “Diatoms;” -Edward Berwick, Carmel Valley, “World Federation;” Adley Cummins, Esq., -San Francisco, “The Sanscrit Language and Literature;” the Rev. Dr. E. G. -Beckwith, San Francisco, “School and Skill.” - -Sunday-school Normal Work will receive its due share of attention. - -The music of the Assembly will be in the very competent hands of Mrs. -Helen M. Cushman, of San Francisco, and will be artistic and delightful. - -The morning of Friday, July 10th, will be occupied with the interesting -exercises of the Third Graduating Class of the Pacific Branch C. L. S. C. - -Pacific Grove is situated on the beautiful Bay of Monterey, and connected -with the ancient capital of the State by a pleasant drive of one and a -half miles, over a macadamized road lately constructed. In beauty of -location it can not be excelled—its graceful pines, extending to the -water’s edge, affording a delightful refuge from the heat of the sun. As -a healthful place of resort, it is not surpassed by any locality in the -State. The value of the Assembly held here has been fully assured by the -delightful sessions of the past five years. - -The well known facilities for studying Natural History at Pacific Grove -have made that one of the important topics of study, and much enthusiasm -has been aroused on the coast by the work of the C. L. S. C. in this -department. - - -LAKESIDE, OHIO. - -The prospects for the work of 1885 in this beautiful and healthful -summer resort are commensurate with the energy displayed by the zealous -management. The grounds are charmingly located on the northern shore -of the Peninsula, opposite Sandusky, Ohio; accessible by an hour’s -delightful steamer ride from this city, and will probably be connected -with the Danbury station of the Lake Shore Railroad by rail this season. -The Encampment sessions begin on Tuesday evening, July 21st, the brief -enthusiastic “Reunion” to be followed by one of the spicy and wise -lectures of the Rev. P. S. Henson, D.D., of Chicago. There will then -follow for nearly two weeks a rare program under the superintendency -of the Rev. B. T. Vincent, of Philadelphia, Pa., assisted by the Revs. -F. Russell and E. Persons. Mrs. B. T. Vincent will have charge of the -Primary Teachers’ Department, and also the Boys’ and Girls’ Meeting, -assisted by the Rev. J. S. Reager, of Ohio. The Models of the Tabernacle, -Jerusalem, etc., will be explained daily by the Rev. Dr. Hartupee and -Mr. Tannyhill. Miss Ross, of Chicago, will give daily instruction in -Kindergarten work, and Professor Trueblood, of Delaware, Ohio, in -Elocution. Daily devotional meetings will be conducted by the Rev. W. H. -Pearce, of Erie, Pa. Lectures and sermons are announced from Bishop R. S. -Foster, Drs. Henson, Alabaster, Nelson, Bayless, Parsons, Rev. Messrs. -Young, Pearce, Russell, Reager; Colonel Bain, of Kentucky, Wallace Bruce -and Leon H. Vincent. Brilliant stereopticon exhibitions, with lectures by -the Rev. Mr. Young and Professor Bolton. Oriental exhibitions by Miss and -Mr. Von Finkelstein, with their gorgeous collection of Oriental costumes, -etc. The Meigs Sisters and Professor Underhill will give concerts and -elocutionary readings; Professor Trueblood will also give popular -readings. Mr. French, of Chicago, a racy and instructive Chalk-talker, -will “draw.” The music will be under the able direction of Professor -Brierly, of Erie, Pa., and Miss McClintock will delight the crowds who -gather at Lakeside. The C. L. S. C. will, of course, have a large place -in the attention of the people, as Lakeside is a center of a large field -of workers in this line. There will be “Round Tables,” etc., and a public -Recognition service for the class of ’85, all of whom who desire it may -secure this privilege there, and receive their diplomas, which will be -there for distribution, if they inform the Rev. B. T. Vincent in time to -see that the diplomas are sent to him for them. A Soldiers’ day, with war -songs and a lecture on “Echoes from Round Top,” by the Rev. J. B. Young, -of Harrisburg, Pa., will form one of the enthusiastic features. The -promises of Lakeside, one of the finest of Chautauqua’s daughters, were -never so good, nor so sure of rich fulfillment. - - -CRETE, NEBRASKA. - -The Nebraska Sunday-school Assembly Grounds consist of one hundred and -nine acres on the banks of the Blue River, at Crete, Nebraska. Its first -session was held in that town in July, 1882, under the direction of the -Rev. J. D. Stewart. Last year, at its third session, a splendid tract of -land was donated to the Assembly. It extends along the river bank, with -admirable opportunities for boating, contains a beautiful grove and ample -grounds for buildings, walks, drives, and other purposes. Two lecture -halls and a dining hall have already been erected, and some hundreds -of tents provided; while a Normal Hall, several cottages, and other -buildings are proposed. - -The Normal Department will be in charge of Prof. R. S. Holmes, who has -been for many years a teacher of this department at Chautauqua. - -The Primary Normal Department will be in charge of Miss Lucy J. Rider, -who will also conduct a children’s class daily. - -Dr. J. H. Vincent, President of the Circle since its commencement, and -Chancellor of the Chautauqua University, will be present and give two -lectures. Others who have had wide experience in literary pursuits will -give their counsels on the ways of spending time most profitably in -reading and study for the people. - -Among the lecturers engaged are: The Rev. R. R. Meredith, D.D., of -Boston; the Rev. O. H. Tiffany, D.D., of New York City; the Rev. -Robert Nourse, of Washington, D. C., and the Rev. H. M. Ladd, D.D., of -Cleveland, O. - -A course of musical instruction will be given by Prof. J. E. Platt. Prof. -W. F. Sherwin will give a lecture and conduct concerts. - - -OTTAWA, KANSAS. - -By the time that this reaches the readers of THE CHAUTAUQUAN the -Inter-State Assembly of Kansas and Missouri will be in session at its -home in Forest Park, in the city of Ottawa, Kansas. No other assembly -is entertained with such hospitality, for the people of Ottawa throw -open to it their public park, in the limits of their city, on the banks -of the historic Marais du Cygne, “The Swamp of the Swan,” celebrated -by Whittier’s pen in the border days of Kansas. Among the orators -whom they expect to hear are many whose names are well known to all -Chautauquans, as Wallace Bruce, Dr. Henson, Robert Nourse, Dr. Tiffany, -Sau Ah-brah, and our own Chancellor, Dr. Vincent. Indeed, it will be -quite a transplanting of the Chautauqua Idea to the western prairie, -for as at “the Mecca of us all,” we shall hold daily a Round-Table; the -Commencement service will be fulfilled, the Chancellor will deliver the -address to the graduating class and confer the diplomas of the C. L. S. -C.; Prof. Sherwin will wave the baton before the chorus on the platform; -Prof. Holmes will teach the Normal class; Sculptor Spring will instruct -the class in clay modeling; and the general Superintendent of Instruction -will be Dr. J. L. Hurlbut. - -Last year, the C. L. S. C. interest showed a great increase. In 1883, -the number of C. L. S. C. members who clasped hands around the camp-fire -was twenty. In 1884, it was nearly ninety, and if we could count those -who joined before the close of the Assembly it would reach a hundred. -We look for twice as many on Tuesday evening, June 30, when we expect -to be entertained with stereopticon pictures of “Sights and Insights -at Chautauqua” by the Rev. O. S. Baketel, of New Hampshire, and at the -close of the lecture, march in procession to the camp-fire, and sing and -talk together. We expect also a great day on July 1st, which is given -to the “Grand Army of the Republic.” Perhaps no other State went into -the war with quite the enthusiasm of Kansas; certainly no other has as -large a proportion of veterans settled within its borders. Every year -the Assembly recognizes these old heroes, and “Old Soldiers’ Day” always -draws a multitude. We shall have a concert of war songs in the morning, -and a lecture by General O. O. Howard, U. S. A., in the afternoon, when -the Governor of Kansas is expected to preside. - -No gathering in Kansas is complete without a Temperance meeting, for -Kansas is the banner State in constitutional prohibition. Let it be said, -all stories to the contrary notwithstanding, that there is no defection -in the ranks of the prohibition army, and no retreat. The cause is as -strong as ever, and no one thinks of rescinding or re-submitting the -Amendment. We hold “Temperance Day” on July 2, when Dr. Philip Krohn -and Col. Geo. W. Bain will speak, and various conferences on different -aspects of the work will be held. - -The Ottawa Assembly extends a welcome to all Chautauquans who may enter -its gates, and gives its assurance that they will find themselves at home. - - -MOUNTAIN LAKE PARK, MARYLAND. - -This delightful summer resort is situated on the Baltimore & Ohio -Railroad, in Garrett County, Maryland. It is 2,800 feet above sea level, -in the midst of sublime scenery. The place itself is enough to attract -all lovers of the true, the beautiful, and the good, but besides the -feast for the eyes and lungs, there is a feast of reason and a flow of -soul prepared to profit, entertain, and inspire the hosts who gather to -the Assembly. - -The principal lecturers are Prof. H. L. Baugher, D.D., of Pennsylvania -College; the Rev. G. W. Miller, D.D., of Philadelphia; the Rev. C. P. -Marsden, D.D., of St. Louis; the Rev. Z. Warner, D.D., of Parkersburg, -West Virginia; the Rev. N. L. Reynolds, of Mt. Pleasant, Pa.; the Rev. -J. B. Van Meter, D.D., of Baltimore; J. B. Phipps, Esq., Secretary of -Maryland Sunday-school Union and author of pictorial designs for the -Berean Lesson Periodicals. - -“Thorough Normal Work” is the motto of Mountain Lake Park Assemblies. The -Assembly Normal Union course of study will be pursued during the session, -and diplomas awarded on Normal Union day, August 19th. - -The C. L. S. C. Department was organized two years ago, and Monday, -August 17th, has been set apart to this interest. A lecture on -“Self-help” will be delivered by the Rev. J. T. Judd, A.M., of Lewisburg, -Pa., president of the circle, with special C. L. S. C. exercises. -Round-tables, vesper services, class unions, and camp-fires will be -enjoyed during the Assembly session. - -New Testament Greek will be made a specialty. The Rev. C. E. Young, of -Baltimore, instructor. - -Geology will receive the attention of the Rev. N. L. Reynolds, who -inspires enthusiasm in this noble study. - -Elocution classes will be formed as last year, and Amateur Photography -will be the pleasant recreation of lovers of the art. - -The Assembly meets August 6th and closes August 19th. For further -information address the Rev. W. Maslin Frysinger, D.D., Baltimore, Md., -or the Rev. Jesse B. Young, Harrisburg, Pa. - - -ROUND LAKE, NEW YORK. - -The management of the Round Lake, N. Y., Sunday-school Assembly sends -greetings to its hosts of old friends and to many others whom it hopes to -make warm friends in the near future. The last year was one of the best -in its history. Numbers, meetings, speakers, work and workers, influence -and the divine blessing, all combined, made it a power for good, -wide-felt and lasting. It is the aim to make the coming Assembly better -than ever. They have planned on the same generous breadth and scope of -the last season, and are confident their work will merit approval. - -The program already completed is full and rich and varied. On July 9th -and 10th there will be a reunion of chaplains and soldiers. The meeting -is most vigorously planned for. There will be a large gathering of the -old soldiers; Col. G. A. Cantine will act as Grand Marshal. Gen. John -A. Logan has been secured as speaker. The Sunday-school Assembly will -hold a longer session this season than ever. Beginning July 14th, it -will continue fourteen days, and each day will be packed with varied and -most profitable exercises. They have a larger variety of specialties -than formerly, viz.: French, German, Painting, Drawing, Clay Modeling, -Oratory, Vocal Music, Kindergarten, Calisthenics, Phonography, etc., etc. - -On C. L. S. C. day, Tuesday, July 21st, Dr. John H. Vincent, the -originator of the Idea and developer of its plans and inspirer of its -growing work, will be present and address the graduating class, who -will pass the “golden gate” and from his hand receive their well-earned -diplomas. - -The following is a partial list of the lecturers: The Rev. J. H. Vincent, -D.D., the Rev. John P. Newman, D.D., the Rev. H. A. Buttz, D.D., the Rev. -S. W. Dike, A.M., the Rev. A. D. Vail, D.D., the Rev. Geo. L. Taylor, -D.D., the Rev. I. J. Lansing, A.M., Prof. J. L. Corning, the Rev. D. H. -Snowden, the Rev. C. C. McCabe, D.D., Senator James Arkell. - -The Trustees, with great care and cost, have given special attention to -every part of the grounds, draining, cleansing and beautifying, rendering -the grounds, if possible, more healthful than ever. - -Never was this “charming spot of nature and art” more beautiful and -health-inspiring than to-day! Never was it more sought for as a FAMILY -SUMMER HOME than this spring. - - -MONONA LAKE, WISCONSIN. - -The Sunday-school Assembly at Monona Lake, Madison, Wisconsin for 1885, -will hold its session from July 28th to August 7th. The specialties -are: Music, Prof. Sherwin; Grand Chorus of 300 voices; Goshen Band and -Orchestra; Sunday School Normal; Children’s Class. Some of the speakers -are: Bishop R. S. Foster, Wallace Bruce, Miss L. M. Von Finkelstein, the -Rev. George C. Lorimer, D.D., Prof. William I. Marshall, Prof. W. C. -Richards, Ph.D., the Rev. O. C. McCulloch, D.D., the Rev. D. Read, D.D., -the Rev. G. H. Ide, D.D., Meigs Sisters Vocal Quartette, C. F. Underhill -reader. - - -WASECA, MINNESOTA. - -The Assembly at Maplewood Park, Waseca, Minnesota, opens June 30th, and -continues in session until July 10th. - -Thursday, July 9th, will be Chautauqua day, and on that day a public -recognition service of the graduating class will be held. There will be -an address suitable to the occasion, and the recognition service as used -at Chautauqua will be used here. In the evening there will be a camp-fire. - -The names of Prof. H. B. Ridgeway, D.D., the Rev. Frank Bristol, Miss L. -M. Von Finkelstein, the Rev. C. A. Van Huda, D.D., and the Rev. J. F. -Chaffee, D.D., are found in the list of lecturers. No one has visited -Maplewood Park without feeling that Nature has done her part in providing -here a delightful retiring place for tired people and for those who are -in danger of becoming so. - -A dense grove rises forty or fifty feet above the lake. The lake itself -is a beautiful sheet of water, around which is a magnificent carriage -drive. All so quiet that the busy world seems shut out, while all Nature -seems to say, “Come and rest.” - -Besides, there are the attractions of the Assembly, calling the mind -into new channels and awakening new thoughts and kindling new and noble -desires for intellectual and moral improvement. - -The time at which the meetings are to be held this year has been -selected, with special reference to the convenience of the people. - -Bro. Gillet, superintendent of the Assembly, never needs an introduction -to the Northwest. He will make the occasion one of lasting good to the -interests he represents. - - -MAINE CHAUTAUQUA UNION. - -Arrangements are being made by the officers of the Maine Chautauqua -Union for a grand meeting at Fryeburg, to begin July 27th, 1885, and -to continue one week. The grounds at Martha’s Grove are being put in -order and beautified by Mrs. Nutter, the prime mover in this matter, and -everything will be done for the comfort and enjoyment of all Chautauquans -who visit this lovely spot. There is soon to be erected on the grounds a -“Hall in the Grove,” after the style of the one at Chautauqua. - -The program for this season is an attractive one and will consist of -illustrated lectures, vocal and instrumental music, essays and readings. -Some part of each day is to be devoted to the Round-Table, question box, -discussions and reports of circles. As a result of our meeting last year, -circles have sprung up all over the State. In Portland alone, there are -_three hundred_ Chautauquans where there were only _nine_ last year. - - - - -EDITOR’S OUTLOOK. - - -VICTOR HUGO. - -The greatest of the French writers of this century has passed away from -earth, after eighty-three years of a life which was, like Carlyle’s, full -of work to the very end. Victor Hugo’s greatness is difficult to measure -at this hour; we are too near to know whether this is an Alp or only a -hill. That it has attracted the attention, the admiration, the homage of -mankind for half a century would seem to mean that this was one of the -three or four great lives of the nineteenth century. Victor Hugo came of -a union of aristocratic and plebeian blood. His father’s tribe had been -of the nobles since 1531; his mother was the daughter of a seafaring -race. The current sketches of his father omit the most dramatic incident -of Colonel Hugo’s career. We refer to his long chase and final capture of -Fra Diavalo—the brigand hero of the opera which bears his name. In the -whole history of brigandage in South Italy, there is no more exciting and -romantic story than that of his hunt and capture of the “Friar-Devil” by -the father of Victor Hugo. In the blood of the poet the plebeian mother -triumphed at length over the Monarchist father, and Victor Hugo’s pen -has rendered the Republicanism of France more valuable service than his -father’s sword gave to the Napoleonic crown. - -His genius was fortunate in the poverty which compelled him to work for -bread, and the banishment which in 1853 threw him into exile, and again -forced him to take up the severe literary labor which brought forth -“Les Miserables” in 1862. This son of the aristocracy might have lived -a life with out fruit if he had not abandoned the ideals of his father -for those popular sympathies which made him the most dangerous enemy of -Napoleon III. The change in his views came slowly. He was a Royalist -under Louis Phillippe, and that king created him a peer of France in -1845. It was not until 1849 that he changed his political attitude, and -he was then forty-seven years of age—so that he divided his life pretty -evenly between the aristocratic and popular causes. His works show the -influence of his political thoughts, and the differences between the -earlier and later are very marked. The earlier works gave him the ears -of the great world; the later won him the hearts of the people. Whether -in prose or in verse, all that he ever wrote was poetry. His later prose -is a collection of poems of human aspirations. It is idle to seek in -them any system, they are emotion rather than thought; but the emotion -is the throbbing of the universal human heart. He believed in God and -in man. He rejected the religion of his people less under the stress of -conviction than through the force of his hostility to the organized human -world in which he saw men suffering. It was not his office to resolve -the riddles of human pain; it was his to gather men’s tears into God’s -bottle. It may be called a one-sided life; but it was on that side where -great lives are too seldom found. It may be said that emotion is blind, -passionate, dangerous, as Frenchmen have abundantly proved; but it is -still true that the emotion which rouses men from lethargy is necessary -to beneficent change, and that even though the wail of human misery -must go up forever, we must honor the great souls who seek solutions of -the mystery of evil in a happier ordering of human society. We need not -become socialists to reverence Victor Hugo’s socialistic philanthropy. -Its aim was high, and it has its great uses. Though only God’s bottle -be large enough to hold the tears of his children, it is a noble poetry -which considers the sorrows of the earth and seeks to pour the sunshine -or hope into the low valleys of humanity. Hugo’s way may be the wrong -way—probably it is—but it is good for men to hold fast the hope that -there is _some_ way through the sea to the promised land. There is a -desert beyond the sea; but somehow we shall cross the desert into the -Canaan of humanity. - -It is, therefore, as a poet of the sorrows and aspirations of our race -that we shall most profitably think of Victor Hugo. He was somewhat -too French in spirit to be a poet of mankind; he was too egotistic to -be on the heights of his human song; he would have been greater if his -knowledge of Jesus of Nazareth had been deeper, and his imitation of -him perfect in the measure of his great capacity; he would have left -something unsaid which wounded men whose purpose was as high as his own, -if he had been more Christian and less Hugoist. But why do we ask all -things of all men? Victor Hugo did a great work in his own great way. -A dangerous socialism has temporarily profited by his denunciations of -society, but in the end of the account it will probably appear that he -has advanced Christian socialism by the uplift he has given to human -aspirations. Men are not so willing to go back to the fleshpots of Egypt, -not so much in danger of leaving the bones of the whole race in the -desert, more anxious to move on to their promised land. - - -THE REVISED OLD TESTAMENT. - -It required fifty years of the Elizabethan age to introduce that revision -of the English Bible which has so long been the standard edition of -the Holy Scriptures in our tongue. It would be strange if the revision -of that standard Bible which has just been completed were to come into -immediate and general use. The New Testament revision met with a harsh -reception from the critics of conservative temper; and it certainly -has some defects, though the _sense_ of the original is more obvious, -to use the mildest term, in the new than in the older revision. The -revised Old Testament has consumed fourteen years of the labor of the -English and American committees, and the most obvious fact is that it is -a more conservative piece of work than the revised New Testament. The -committees probably profited by the buffetings of their New Testament -revision brethren; but they had a simpler task, since they had not to -settle the text of the original Hebrew, whereas the Greek text of the -New Testament is still a battle ground of criticism. After all, however, -the two revisions constitute one “revised Bible,” and must stand or -fall together. The general judgment may probably run to the effect that -the New Testament is revised too much and the Old too little. There -is a special defect, however, in the New Testament English—it is not -idiomatic, and it is not always intelligible. There is a rumor that it -will be re-revised into harmony with the conservatism which characterizes -the new Old Testament. It is not to be overlooked that there are various -demands made upon a revision. Those who most earnestly desire one have -in view a more plain and understandable text for popular use. Wycliffe’s -great thought, “a Bible understonden of the people,” is their desire. -But the literary demands upon the revisers exclude intelligibility by -the people as a governing rule. This group of demands defies the skill -of any revision committee. They ask for improvements; but they object -to any changes. The Bible as an Elizabethan classic is their admiration -and they seem not to be willing that the people should have any other -Bible. There would seem to be ample room for both revisions; let the -literary people have their English of 1611, while the people have English -of this century. We are not yet, however, sufficiently advanced in the -thinking which revision requires to qualify even the critics among us -to distinguish between a classic text for scholars and a plain text for -the millions. A modern English Bible will come by and by; we can afford -to wait, and meanwhile to study the fruits of the labors of a Revision -Committee loaded down with a great weight of conservative environments. -For it is not the classicist alone who stands guard over the old English -text; conservative theologians regard that old text as too sacred to be -modernized, and distrust modernizing as involving changes in the moral -and religious influence of the Bible upon mankind. The intelligibility of -the Bible is not, to such thinkers, a leading requisite; reverence for -its mysteries ranks all other considerations. We are probably outgrowing -this view of Holy Scripture; but it is an opinion strong enough yet to -keep utterly dead English locutions in the revised Old Testament of 1885. -This conservatism is much stronger in England than in this country; the -American Committee desired to substitute modern for obsolete words. - -That any changes have been made under such respectable and imposing -auspices is a great gain to Christian knowledge. The thing is done; the -grand old text has been subjected to a revision. It is quite possible -that we are entering an age of biblical revision; and it should be -remembered that the Bible of 1611 closed an age of revision. It was -the last in a series of revisions, each of which contributed to the -perfection of the English text. We can not be content with an English -Bible which employs _which_ for _who_, _wist_ for _knew_, _earing_ -for _plowing_ and _ouches_ for _settings_. The American Committee was -thoroughly right in desiring to use modern words in these and other -cases. If any revision is to stand, it must contain such modifications -of the old text. A satisfactory English text can not be attained so long -as the English Christians insist upon retaining archaic forms of such -insignificance as the foregoing; there must be an agreement to make an -English text on Wycliffe’s principle of popular intelligibleness, before -a revision can be of very high utility. The present revision breaks the -ice; we have begun; some time or other we shall go on to the logical -conclusion of the movement—a modern English Bible for all who use our -mighty speech. The assent of the conservative to a single change concedes -the principle of revision; his assent to many changes prepares the way -for all that are necessary to the modernizing of the Book of Books. - - -SUMMER HEALTH AND PLEASURE. - -The summer is looked forward to with eager desire and it is dismissed -without regret by the residents of the temperate zone. The explanation -lies partly, if not mainly, in our defective adaptation of ourselves -to the hot season. Charles Lamb once wrote, “The summer has set in with -its usual severity.” The wit covers a truth; we adjust ourselves so -imperfectly to the heated term that we suffer from the high temperature. -The art of living must include devices and cautions through which we -get the good and shun the evil of each season. Men are slowly learning -that to “enjoy life” on this planet one must pay the same price as for -liberty—“eternal vigilance.” The summer of the North ought to be our -golden time of health and enjoyment. We have the whole of the atmosphere -to breathe from—not bits of it let into artificially heated spaces. -There is shade for the noonday heats, and the evenings and mornings -for exercise and refreshment of muscular energy. But the hot hours are -often dangerous and the atmosphere may be poisoned by our own neglect -of decaying vegetables or animal matter. We must aim to keep clean and -keep all things about us clean; food should be lighter than in winter -(less heat-producing); exercise should avoid the hours of fervent heat; -the occupations should take a more leisurely pace; the scene of life -should, if possible, be shifted for some week or weeks so as to diversify -our mental interests and break the dreary monotony of long days spent -in one environment of body and soul. The word which describes the art -of summer life is _moderation_; but moderation is not indolence, though -there is a natural tendency to drop into the laziness which characterizes -barbarian humanity in hot lands. To be healthy and happy one should -resist the disposition to be idle. Neither health nor happiness come to -lazy people in any desirable measure. The best forms of both depend on -activity; but in summer it must be moderate and regular. If, then, one -has constant occupation, he should cultivate moderation of interest and -exertion, shun the blazing noontide, and take his food as well as his -exercise in reduced doses. Too much food, care, exercitation, these are -our northern summer dangers. Our civilization is yet very imperfect in -this region of art. We have attained to food, clothing, shelter. We do -not quite understand how to use them all wisely; but beyond these lie -the adjustment of exertion, rest, air, water, electrical and chemical -instruments of vitality, and the inner forces of our own being. Happiness -is the result of a complex mass of conditions and instruments of life -acting upon the spirit and reacted against by the spirit. Our knowledge -grows; but while it is growing we have to take for our text moderation, -and elaborate the sermon each man for himself. - -The great opportunities of the year come to us in summer. Nature is all -alive to please and instruct us—to give us the delights of the eye and -the inspiration of study. The world has been dressed with infinite art, -to afford us a holiday which shall be full of instruction. We need travel -to widen our vision of God’s modern Edens dressed by human art. We need -an active intelligence, to see and understand the Eden world of summer. -But all depends upon our care of our bodies. Health is the condition of -all summer pleasures. Is it not strange that we will spend months and -years learning how to use lifeless tools, and yet will not spend needed -time to learn the management of this vital tool by use of which all -happiness comes to us? Let us all try this time to keep the instrument -of life in tune for the music of the summer; to make of the season of -highest opportunity all there is in it for ourselves. Starting with that -selfish purpose, we shall soon find that we need social food, and that -here also, “it is more blessed to give than to receive.” Helping others -to enjoyment is the healthiest of “health movements;” for no tonic is so -spiritually exhilarating as the sight of other people’s happiness which -we have made. The man who sends a child out of the city suffocation -of summer time has a poor imagination if he can not enjoy the gambols -of that child in the country meadows and groves as he never enjoyed a -banquet in his own house. Doing as many generous actions as possible is -one way to get both health and pleasure out of the summer. - - -SCIENCE AND PRACTICAL LIFE. - -It is somewhat remarkable that at a time when science is indubitably -failing to justify the exalted hopes of those who looked to it for a -solution of the deepest questions of being, it is enlarging our sense -of its value to practical every-day life. The mystery of the molecule -is insoluble, but the usefulness of chemistry is rapidly increasing. -Professor W. Mattieu Williams proposes to use maltose as a cooking agent -to produce foods which are both more palatable and more easily digested. -Those who attend the cooking school at Chautauqua this summer will -probably learn how this work is to be done, and what results will follow. -The theory sprang out of attempts to feed cattle on malted grain. It was -found to be too expensive for cattle, and also hardly necessary, because -cows have good digestive apparatus. Human beings have impaired digestion, -and can afford more expensive food than the beasts have need of. The -maltose cooking carries graniverous foods up into an advanced stage of -nutritive condition, lessens the labor of weak stomachs, and tickles -dull palates with new flavors. There is no near limit to the possible -fruits of this thought. The chemist may render us incalculable services -along this line. We have suffered something from the chemistry of men -who adulterate our food; it is a comfort to know that the good uses of -chemistry are coming forward to render us most valuable compensations. - -It is a matter of course that in this field we shall often be -disappointed; but so many solid gains are secured that we shall readily -excuse some fanciful experiments. In lighting public streets and -buildings, electricity has made it possible to turn night into day; -chemical studies have perfected the grinding of flour; a hundred more of -small and great practical advances in scientific living are secure. We -shall go on. It is very noticeable that the conveniences of modern life -have triumphed in unexpected ways over natural difficulties. The zone -of comfort for human life has been widened toward the pole and toward -the equator. The gains are more slowly harvested southward; any reader -who feels the languor of this season will know why we do not march so -triumphantly toward the equator as we do toward the north pole. Moral -energy is in larger demand, as we go south, to resist the tendency to -idleness. The north wind puts spurs into us and whips us into action. -We shall therefore find the northward limit of vigorous life before we -find the south boundary of it. And naturally our science, invention and -discovery bear upon cold rather than heat. We have the means now of -living in higher latitudes, in full moral and mental activity, than were -good for body or brain a hundred years ago. We know how to build for -warmth in zero weather, and we have cheap fuel and cheap light for the -frosts and the dark of the North. - -An enthusiastic writer says that natural gas is to be the fuel of the -immediate future—the next fuel. We have as yet found it only here and -there on the earth; but we are not done searching for it. Imagine, then, -that we have found this gas all round the shores of Hudson’s Bay, and -calculate the consequences. A new Mediterranean is opened in a region -which has always been reckoned uninhabitable. Poets and philosophers -flourish far up toward Doctor Warren’s original Eden! For what but a -cheap and abundant fuel and light is needed to make possible a large and -flourishing empire around Hudson’s Bay? Migration, which is said to move -on parallel lines, has been trending northward for twenty-five years. The -wheat fields of America are a hundred and fifty miles nearer the pole -than they were fifty years ago. The Dakota and British Northwest which -we were willing to leave to the Indians fifty years ago, are eagerly -coveted for the plow of the wheat farmer. We are undeniably moving north; -the limit of that movement will be fixed for us by devices, discoveries, -sciences, which will enlarge our fields toward the eternal ice—on -principles similar to those which have already extended our domain in -that direction. For several generations the silk grown in Lombardy has -been packed on the backs of horses or in carts and transported across -the Alps to be spun and woven in Switzerland. Why should not our cotton -travel by sea to the shores of Hudson’s Bay to be spun and woven? Give -them power, heat and light in one natural agent, and the people of the -American Mediterranean might excel in any industry. And in default of -natural gas, who will now dare to say that the chemist may not solve the -problem in a more intellectual way than by the use of the drill? We write -here only of a _possible_ expansion of the human domain by the services -of science. - -A more practicable matter is that the age of steam, out of which, into -something better, we are probably to pass at a day not distant, has been -a very prodigal one. Waste is its great fault. It wastes three fourths -of the coal it consumes; it therefore wastes infinite sums of human -energy. It wastes everything, nature and man, the streams, the forests, -the vitality and the hopes of men. Its motto is _concentration_. It -herds human beings in towns; it makes transit laborious and long. The -age of economies has begun, and new agents, such as electricity and gas, -have for their mottoes _disperse_ and _distribute_. It is probably not -extravagant to say that mankind are wasting every week enough of natural -bounties to sustain them for a month, perhaps for a year. If science, -then, shall only barely help us to the economic use of all natural -bounties, it will have enriched human life (for the mass of mankind) -at least four-fold. It will probably be well for us if this enrichment -comes gradually and is preceded by a moral preparation for the use of -abundance. We have never, as a race, been good enough to be safely rich. -We have no poets from the equatorial regions. It may be many generations -before we are good enough to grow philosophy and high bred cattle in the -torrid zone. Perhaps we do not any where keep up in moral training with -the march of science. - - -THE COURSE OF READING FOR 1885-86. - -The student about to enter college has scarcely a pleasanter task than -that of examining the course he is about to begin. The prospect of -future achievements, how fascinating it is! That Livy which he has heard -discussed by learned seniors and professors will soon be his property, -too. The problems that are historical among his big brothers and cousins, -and sisters as well, sometimes, he will soon grapple with. Whole fields -of unknown literature and science and art open to him in his brief -glance. He enjoys familiarizing himself with the names of the authors -of the text-books, in marking among the elective studies his choice, in -looking up the old text-books in the library, in preparing note-books -for the next year, in picking up random bits of information. Getting -ready for his college course often becomes quite as engrossing as the -actual work. The C. L. S. C. student will experience this same interest -in looking over what he is going to do another year. The course is now -ready, and he will have the entire summer for contemplating his coming -conquests. Enjoy the prospect to the full; it is certainly a goodly -one. The bone and sinew of next year’s course is to be Roman History -and Literature. The place Greece and its men filled in the course of -1884-85 will be taken by Rome. While the subject is equally interesting, -the course of the coming year has one great advantage. Greece has no -modern history of particular importance, its heroes died with Corinth’s -destruction, its literature and art and philosophy faded with its loss -of patriotism. Where Rome stood, now Italy stands. The history of the -decadence of Roman rule and the growth of Italian freedom is one of the -most thrilling chapters in the world’s history. A literature, an art, and -a science belong to this new growth. In studying Rome’s life we have a -modern chapter that keeps up our interest. The course happily provides -for us papers on “Modern Italy” and “Italian Biography,” in addition -to the works on the History of Rome, the “Preparatory Latin Course in -English,” the “College Latin Course in English,” and “A Day in Ancient -Rome.” A practical turn is given to the work by a study of the relations -of Rome to modern history. - -The more general work of the course is selected from the wide fields of -philosophy, science, art and religion. Dr. Geo. M. Steele has prepared -a work on “Political Economy,” which will furnish some of the liveliest -reading for the year. This subject will be supplemented by two series -of papers on “Parliamentary Practice” and “International Law,” to be -published in THE CHAUTAUQUAN. - -Robert Browning in “Pomegranates from an English Garden” will be the -representative of English poetry. It will be seen that, as in the case -of Robert Browning’s poems, several studies are introduced to brighten -the more solid work; for this purpose we have “In His Name,” by Edward -Everett Hale, read in connection with a book by Dr. Townsend on “The -Bible and the XIXth Century,” and a series of studies, to appear in THE -CHAUTAUQUAN, on “God in History.” - -One work which will be a real treat to everybody is “Studies in Human -Nature,” by Dr. Lyman Abbott. The additional readings in THE CHAUTAUQUAN -are: “Wars and Rumors of Wars To-day,” “The Age we Live In,” “Religion -in Art,” “Art Outlines,” “Studies in Mathematics,” “Moral Philosophy,” -studies on “How to Live,” by Edward Everett Hale, papers on the past, -present and future of electricity, and “Home Studies in Physical -Geography.” A better course has never been presented to the members of -the C. L. S. C. - - - - -EDITOR’S NOTE-BOOK. - - -The July issue of THE CHAUTAUQUAN closes the fifth volume of the -magazine. In October the sixth volume will begin. The outlook for THE -CHAUTAUQUAN for 1885-86 is much brighter than ever before. We shall offer -our friends a much improved magazine. The place of THE CHAUTAUQUAN will -be taken in the summer by the _Assembly Herald_. The _Herald_ for 1885 -will contain full reports of the work of the Assembly for the summer. A -glance at the elaborate program printed in this impression will convince -the reader of the value of a paper containing such a course of lectures -as that of the Chautauqua platform. Besides the lectures many suggestive -and useful reports will be printed, which members of the C. L. S. C. in -particular will find helpful. Those who may wish to subscribe for both -THE CHAUTAUQUAN and _Herald_ will find it profitable to take advantage of -our COMBINATION OFFER, found in another column of this impression. - - * * * * * - -The war rumors of a month ago have subsided almost as quickly as they -were aroused. The cries of “On to Khartoum” and “Smash the Mahdi” have -died out. Instead of running the frontier below the Soudan, the English -have been content to fix it at Wady Halfa. After all the excitement over -Afghanistan, peace has been established between Russia and England. -The Americans, most of them, have come home from Panama. Riel has been -captured. The comparatively easy settlement of misunderstandings between -nations is our best hope for the future. Each new victory of arbitration -over “bad blood,” even if it be at the sacrifice of a little of our pride -and possessions, is so much of a stride toward the millennium. - - * * * * * - -For the third time Mr. James Russell Lowell has been called upon to speak -in Westminster Abbey. This time at the unveiling of the bust of the poet -Coleridge. In summing up his remarks he said: “Whatever may have been -his faults and weaknesses, he was the man of all his generation to whom -we should most unhesitatingly allow the distinction of genius, that is, -of one authentically possessed from time to time by some influence that -made him better and greater than himself. If he lost himself too much in -what Mr. Pater has admirably called ‘impassioned contemplation,’ he has -at least left us such a legacy as only genius, and genius not always, can -leave. It is for this that we pay him this homage of memory.” - - * * * * * - -A series of statistics most suggestive to those interested in the -temperance question have of late been published. According to this -table there was drunk in the United States twenty-five years ago over -86,000,000 gallons of spirituous liquor, while now, with a population -almost doubled, the consumption is decreased by about 15 per cent. To -balance this comes in the enormous consumption of light liquors, nearly -six times as great as in 1860. But it must be remembered that a large -proportion of the latter is consumed by the foreign element introduced -since 1860. - - * * * * * - -The tragic fate of the town of Plymouth, Pennsylvania, is one more -melancholy example of the result of breaking Nature’s laws. There is -no doubt but that an epidemic of typhoid fever is a crime traceable to -somebody’s neglect. In Plymouth the refuse from a house situated at the -head of the stream which supplied the village with drinking water was -allowed to poison the water. This outrageous state of affairs is to be -seen in many other towns, and in parts of our cities. If after Plymouth’s -suffering a repetition occurs in any part of the country, public -sentiment ought to be strong enough to hunt down and punish the guilty -authorities that will hold human life and God’s law so lightly. - - * * * * * - -There is one sure way of securing sanitary reform in every city or town -with dilatory health board or indifferent council. Arouse the women. The -Ladies’ Health Protection Society, of New York City, has done work in -that community during the past six months, before which its large Board -of Health seemed perfectly helpless. If cleanliness and purity are not -to be secured by the civil authorities, there is no more suitable public -work for women than to constitute themselves the guardians of the health -of their home towns. - - * * * * * - -At the recent commencement of the Union Theological Seminary, of New -York, the alumni association elected as president an Indian of pure -Choctaw blood, now a pastor in the Indian Territory. His son was a member -of the graduating class of this year. We are growing broader. - - * * * * * - -The position that Mr. Phelps will take at the Court of St. James has -been agitating the English correspondent of one of our great dailies. -He finds that being a minister merely, Mr. Phelps must come in among -the ministers, after all the seven ambassadors; and that, alas! he -will be literally at the foot of this class of twenty-three. Ministers -take social rank according to the length of time they have held their -positions, so Mr. Phelps and the stars and stripes trot along after -Guatemala and Columbia and Siam and Hayti. - - * * * * * - -The teachers who tried Chautauqua last summer for their vacations, found -the spot so suitable for their uses, so delightful for recreation, that -they have spread abroad the rumor of her beauty, and in July of the -coming summer two State Teachers’ Associations—that of Ohio and that of -New York—will meet there. - - * * * * * - -There are very few people unfamiliar with law and its phrases, who have -not been bewildered over the complicated expressions and seemingly -useless repetitions found in almost all documents. This “iteration in -law” has lately been made the subject of some interesting computations by -David Dudley Field. By his counting every deed contains 860 superfluous -words, and every mortgage 1,240. The people of New York State, he -calculates, pay every year $100,000 for the recording of useless words. -The next reform in law should be rhetorical. - - * * * * * - -Mr. John Ruskin, of Oxford, and Prof. J. Rendel Harris, of Johns Hopkins, -have resigned their professorships in their respective universities -because, it is stated, vivisection is practiced in the institutions. -There is no reason in such hyper-sympathy. The abuse of vivisection is -quite probable, but that does not lessen the force of the fact that -vivisection has done much to alleviate human misery, and will in the -future undoubtedly do more. The question is, if man or beast must suffer, -which life is the more precious. - - * * * * * - -Houghton Farm, the headquarters of the Chautauqua Town and Country Club, -has an interesting history. Several years ago 1,000 acres of land lying -about nine miles from Newburgh, N. Y., were purchased by a Mr. Valentine -as an experimental farm. About thirty buildings, adapted to every kind of -farm work, were erected; the best of stock, the most skillful laborers -were secured. The farm soon became a kind of educational institution. -Farmers were invited to inspect its work, and to listen to lectures from -the learned managers; children had days set apart for their enjoyment. -Orange county has been educated by the Houghton Farm. Now its generous -hearted proprietor has extended the work by opening its advantages to all -those who will join the Chautauqua Town and Country Club. - - * * * * * - -The strange fascination lurking in dangerous feats which so powerfully -affects some minds, was never more forcibly manifested than in the case -of Robert E. Odlum, who jumped from the Brooklyn bridge not long ago. -For some time the thought had been a passion with him, and although the -police were watching to prevent the attempt, he escaped their vigilance -and took the fatal leap. His body was three and one-fourth seconds in -making the descent of 140 feet, thus corroborating almost exactly the law -of falling bodies. He breathed only a few times after he was picked up, -being inwardly literally “mangled to death.” His is only one more name -added to the list of those who, by their folly, may teach others lessons -of wisdom, and so, perhaps, have not died utterly in vain. - - * * * * * - -Although war-like preparations have ceased in the Soudan, and no -more troops are to be transported thither to help “smash the Mahdi,” -the railroad across the desert is progressing slowly but surely. The -correspondent of the _Times_ telegraphs the following: “The construction -of the railway is a curious and interesting sight. In advance is a -picket of cavalry, while far off on either side the videttes scout in -the bush. At the immediate head of the line is a battalion of infantry -echeloned, and advancing as the rails are laid. Streams of coolies carry -the sleepers from the trucks, and teams of four artillery horses drag up -the rails, two at a time, to the navvies, who lay them in a twinkling, -and drive the spikes. In the rear are gangs who complete the line, and -further back the ballasting parties.” - - * * * * * - -Visitors to Niagara Falls this summer will enjoy their trip as never -before. Everything that tends to mar the beauty of the natural scenery is -to be removed, and after July 15th, access to all points of interest is -to be free of charge. To bring about this happy consummation which during -so many long years past has been devoutly wished by all right-thinking -men, required a long and hard-fought battle against willful ignorance and -greed of gain. - - * * * * * - -General Gordon’s “Life and Letters,” recently published, prove him to -have one accomplishment of rare beauty and usefulness, but too often -nowadays neglected. He was a good letter writer, and that under -circumstances the most trying. Here is the picture his biographer draws -of the surroundings under which many of his letters were written: “The -temperature is over 100°; the ink dries on the pen before three words are -written; books curl, as to their backs; mosquitoes are busy at the ankles -under the table, and the hands and wrists above; prickly heat comes and -goes. How one realizes, for instance, the whole scene in the over-wakeful -traveller’s night: ‘I am writing in the open air by a candle-lamp, in -a savage gorge; not a sound to be heard. The baboons are in bed in the -rocks.’” The letters which the most of us write under the most favorable -circumstances are limited to the narrowest space possible. What we would -do in Gordon’s place it is difficult to say. - - * * * * * - -The most beautiful celebration of the month of June is Children’s day. -With every season Protestant churches give more time and money to their -preparations for it, and it bids fair to take rank in importance with -Christmas and Easter. Certainly no day comes at a season when it is more -easy to decorate, it being the very heyday of the flower season, and no -cause is more worthy our efforts than the children’s. - - * * * * * - -An important discussion has been going on for a few weeks in the New -York papers, concerning the advisability of closing the dry goods -stores on Saturday afternoons. Clerks have no day for recreation or for -improvement except Sabbath. The same is true of nearly all classes of -laboring people. The result is that the Sabbath, instead of being a day -of religious rest, is turned into one of pleasure, and often of extra -work. A half holiday would enable busy workers to prepare for Sabbath. It -is a reform in the arrangement of time that is worthy the attention of -Christian people particularly. - - * * * * * - -There is a capital hint in the following story, told by a lady prominent -in mission school work in one of our large cities: “We had some of our -Chinese pupils at a church sociable a few nights ago, and we had at -supper some candies which are rolled up in paper with printed couplets -inclosed—some of them extremely silly. The Chinese boys read them and -looked surprised, but were too polite to say anything. Soon afterward -they gave an entertainment, and the same sort of candies were provided; -but when we unrolled the papers we found they had taken out the foolish -verses and had substituted texts of Scripture printed on little slips of -paper.” - - * * * * * - -Here are a few of M. Bartholdi’s interesting figures about his great -Statue of Liberty: “The forefinger is 96½ inches in length, and 56½ -inches in circumference at the second joint. The nail measures 17¾ -inches by 10½ inches. The head 13¾ feet in height. The eye is 25½ inches -in width. The nose is 44 inches in length. About forty persons were -accommodated in the head at the Universal Exposition of 1878. It is -possible to ascend into the torch above the hand. It will easily hold -twelve persons.” Compared with other colossi it far outstrips them all, -being about three times the height of both the statue of Bavaria and -of the Virgin of Puy, and about 58 feet higher than the Arminius in -Westphalia. - - * * * * * - -The French Republic would not allow the remains of Victor Hugo to -be placed in the Pantheon until that celebrated structure was again -secularized. The priests were allowed just forty-eight hours to vacate -the sacred precincts which, as a church, they had held uninterruptedly -since 1877. This action plainly shows the position of the Republic toward -the Church. “French skeptics,” says _The Nation_, “are not content, like -English or German skeptics, with ceasing to go to church.… They insist -on proclaiming in every possible way their hostility to the clergy.” The -fact that the Pantheon is again restored to its primitive design as “a -last resting place for distinguished public men” can but be pleasing to -all. - - - - -TALK ABOUT BOOKS. - - -Among the books belonging to the “Famous Women Series,” the biography of -Harriet Martineau[B] takes a leading place. The life of this remarkable -woman is written by one whose clear insight into human character, and -keen appreciation of that which tends to make it noble and strong, -render her eminently qualified for such an undertaking. The style of -the book is simple, unadorned, direct. No step has been neglected which -could add to the author’s information, or, as she quaintly expresses -it, could help her “get touch” with her subject. That Mrs. Miller is -something of a hero worshiper is evident from the fact that, with but -one or two slight exceptions, she justifies all the facts of the life -she relates. The rigor of Harriet Martineau’s early home; the longings -of the young girl for freedom from a needless restraint, and the desire -to read and study, which led her to steal the time for it in the early -morning and late at night, might convey a lesson to many a mother who -now insists upon having her daughters follow the conventional methods of -living. One can but rejoice in the advanced position women have attained -as he reads of Harriet Martineau, the statesman, and sees that she is -as thoroughly understood and appreciated in this aspect of her life by -her biographer as in the more womanly elements and instincts of her -nature, which were never in the least violated by her study of political -interests. Excepting the skepticism which marked all the mature years of -Harriet Martineau’s life, one finds in her a good type of strong, noble -womanhood. Christian readers can but deprecate this fact, and also that -it is justified by Mrs. Miller. - -A volume of the prose writings of N. P. Willis[C] will be received by -the reading public in much the same manner as the work of a new author, -so little are they known. His reputation rests almost entirely upon -his poems and a few Scriptural sketches, which it seems natural to -think of as belonging to the early periods of American literature. It -will probably strike most people with a feeling of surprise to recall -that his death occurred so recently as 1867, and that he was therefore -contemporary with Bryant and Longfellow. Just why this recent oblivion -has fallen upon his writings is hard to tell, for the collection in this -volume shows that they deserve a better fate. The character sketches -are fairly drawn; and the bits of description indicate powers of a high -order in this particular. The personality of the author is manifest in -all the articles; the reader is conscious of constantly looking through -the writer’s eyes. The wild, unchecked bent of his imagination is shown -in such pieces as “The Lunatic’s Skate,” and “The Ghost-Ball at Congress -Hall,” somewhat resembling the more intense works of Poe. Aptness in -illustration, implying a delicate perception of resemblances, and a happy -faculty of associating ideas is a marked characteristic. He fails to -touch the deeper emotions of one’s nature, and there is a lack of both -strength and plot in all he writes. Whether Mr. Beers succeeds in making -Willis’s works live or not, he has by his selections and editing, and by -his introductory memoir, given to the public a very interesting work. - -Perhaps no one ever more perfectly caught the spirit of all things -Egyptian than Professor Ebers. The _genius_ of the country which brings -under its sway all that comes within its domain, affecting them to such -a degree that one can but fancy even the sphynx would be less gloomily -impressive in any other land, gained such an influence over him, and so -makes itself felt in his books, that it is almost impossible to imagine -him otherwise than as a man wrapped round with that somber, mysterious -air which constantly hints of the power to reveal things more and more -wonderful. From the beginning to the end of Serapis[D] one is conscious -of being under some spell that fascinates and charms. The little -party introduced at the beginning gives rise to a sense of the vast -possibilities hidden away in each life—even that of little Dada, the -merry-hearted, seemingly thoughtless, young girl—and the sequel reveals -in each one these possibilities realized. The story is laid in the times -of the Roman emperor, Theodosius I., and its interest centers in the -destruction of the Serapeum, the Alexandrian temple containing the statue -of Serapis, the great Egyptian divinity, which was also mutilated and -torn down. A description of the races is given in such a way as to render -readers virtually eye-witnesses of the scene, and it is with an effort -that one keeps himself from rising with the crowd as the decisive moment -nears, and shouting in the general frenzy of excitement. The author lacks -the power of putting his readers into nearer relation with his characters -than that of mere acquaintances, in whose welfare a general sympathetic -interest is taken. One prizes the book for its impressive historical -facts and beautiful descriptions. - -“Troubled Waters”[E] is a novel with a purpose. The question of capital -and labor is discussed, and the plan of coöperation is upheld as the key -which is to unlock the difficulties thickening fast and threateningly -around the business interests of to-day. The dangers lurking in the -fact of poorly compensated labor, as it watches the fast increasing -gains of capital amassed at its expense, are vividly set forth. In the -strike of the Tradelawn mill hands, will be seen a faithful picture -of what transpires in many a similar town. The style of the book is -vigorous, independent, and clear. The number of persons introduced, and -the characterization of some of them, particularly Mr. Thomas Street, -reminds one of Dickens. In the web of adverse circumstances enmeshing and -ever tightening about the really noble Robert Croft, until he is driven -to the very verge of desperation and crime, the greatest power of the -author is shown. Of course all ends well, and as one leaves all the hands -in the new mills, in which every worker is a stockholder, contented and -happy, there remains with him a conviction that coöperation is the right -principle. - -One of the most attractive of all the books of its kind is “The -Chautauqua Birthday Book”[F] just issued. Daintily bound, and containing -illustrations of the places so familiar and endeared to all Chautauquans, -it can not fail to receive a warm welcome at their hands. The “Prefatory -Note” is written by Chancellor J. H. Vincent. The selections made of the -best things said by the best authors. As one turns the pages bearing -the dates, the eye lights upon the names of many familiar friends, and -the pleasing memories that instantly arise make one glad for the happy -thought that originated so genial a souvenir. - -No undertaking more deserves the thoughtful consideration and hearty -support of every community than that of the introduction of a line of -classics for children into the public schools. Mr. Ginn has already -edited for the use of scholars of from nine to fourteen years of age, a -number of very attractive books, among which are “Tales from Shakspere,” -by Charles and Mary Lamb, and Scott’s “Tales of a Grandfather.”[G] The -original works have been changed very little. A few verbal alterations -were required, and the parts beyond the comprehension of a child were -omitted. A young boy or girl after reading these editions will have -practically the same knowledge that the older acquire from the unabridged -works, and they certainly will be equally as much interested in them. - -[B] Harriet Martineau. By Mrs. F. Fenwick Miller. Boston: Roberts -Brothers. 1885. Price, $1.00. - -[C] Prose Writings of Nathaniel Parker Willis. Selected by Henry A. -Beers. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons. - -[D] Serapis. By George Ebers. New York: William S. Gottsberger, 11 Murray -Street. 1885. Price, paper cover, 50 cents. - -[E] Troubled Waters. A Problem of To-day. By Beverly Ellison Warner. -Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott. 1885. Price, $1.25. - -[F] The Chautauqua Birthday Book. Arranged by Annie M. Cummings. Buffalo, -N. Y.: H. H. Otis. Price, $1.00. - -[G] Tales from Shakspere. By Charles and Mary Lamb. Tales of a -Grandfather, Vol. I. Being the History of Scotland. By Walter Scott. -Abridged and edited by Edwin Ginn. Boston: Ginn, Heath & Co. 1885. - - -BOOKS RECEIVED. - -Valeria. By the Rev. W. H. Withrow. New York: Phillips & Hunt. -Cincinnati: Cranston & Stowe. 1885. Price, $1.00. - -The Sentence and Word Book. By James Johonnot. New York: D. Appleton & -Co. 1885. - -Vain Forebodings. By E. Oswald. Translated from the German by Mrs. A. L. -Wister. Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott Company. 1885. Price, $1.25. - -Pestalozzi’s Leonard and Gertrude. Translated and Abridged. By Eva -Channing. Boston: Ginn, Heath & Co. 1885. - -Dante. A Rare Collection of Texts, Commentaries, etc., of Dante’s Divina -Commedia. Cincinnati: Anton Bicker. - -The Meisterschaft System for the Italian Language. By Dr. Richard S. -Rosenthal. Part I. Boston: Meisterschaft Publishing Company. - -General Gordon: The Christian Hero. By the author of “Our Queen,” “New -World Heroes,” etc. New York: Thomas Y. Crowell & Co. - -Pulpit and Easel. By Mary B. Sleight. New York: Thomas Y. Crowell & Co. - -Hearing and How to Keep It. By Charles H. Burnett, M.D. Philadelphia: P. -Blakiston, Son & Co. 1885. - -Dogma No Antidote for Doubt. By a member of the New York Bar. -Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott Company. 1885. - -Catechism on Alcohol. (In German.) By Julia Colman. New York: National -Temperance Society. 1885. - -Circulars of Information of the Bureau of Education. No. I.—1885. -Washington: Government Printing Office. - -Planting Trees in School Grounds and the Celebration of Arbor Day. -Washington: Government Printing Office. 1885. - -The Russian Revolt. By Edmund Noble. Boston: Houghton, Mifflin & Co. -1885. Price, $1.00. - -From the Golden Gate to the Golden Horn. By Henry Frederick Reddall. New -York: Phillips & Hunt. Cincinnati: Cranston & Stowe. 1885. Price, $1.25. - - - - -CHAUTAUQUA IN JAPAN. - -BY WM. D. BRIDGE. - - -Japan moves to the front, for _Chautauqua_ has taken firm root in Japan. -The Chautauqua Idea is an ecumenical idea, and it is the province of this -article to show the workings of this idea in Japan during the past six -months. - -Late in the summer of 1884 Mrs. A. M. Drennan (C. L. S. C. class of ’82), -a resident missionary in Japan, at Osaka, entered into correspondence -with Chancellor Vincent as to the possibility of translating valuable -English materials in the line of the “C. L. S. C.” into the Japanese -vernacular. Among the material tracts, papers, etc., sent, was one -which she put into the hands of an educated native, well versed also in -English, who said on reading it: “If that book can be put into the hands -of the young men, Tom Paine and other infidels must leave Japan.” - -Chancellor Vincent, on reviewing the necessities of the field, and -marking the wondrous developments of that newborn nation, arranged -with Mrs. Drennan for the translation of the “Required Reading” in THE -CHAUTAUQUAN into Japanese, guaranteeing a prescribed sum per month for -expenses of translating for one year. - -March 30, 1885, Mrs. Drennan writes: “I wish I could convey to you -something of an idea of the enthusiasm in reference to our Chautauqua -Society here. In much less than a week after the first advertisement in -the papers, our secretary had received nearly three hundred letters of -inquiry, and, on application, had given out every one of the first five -hundred copies of the ‘Hand-Book.’ A second edition of five hundred was -made, and now, in less than a week, only two hundred copies remain.” - -The “Hand-Book” referred to is the first number of a magazine, in book -form, containing articles from THE CHAUTAUQUAN, viz.: “Mosaics of -History,” “Africa,” “Alexander the Great,” “One Hundred Questions,” -“World of Science,” and “The Results of the Discovery of America.” - -Mr. C. S. Hongma, of Osaka, a native Japanese, President of the “Japanese -Literary and Scientific Circle,” writes to Chancellor Vincent, in good -English, a letter full of hope, and expressing his delight in aiding to -organize the circle, and asking help and prayers for its success. - -The laws of Japan require six months’ notice to be given of intention to -publish a magazine, and but one month’s notice for publishing a book. The -quotations from THE CHAUTAUQUAN are therefore given the book form. - -Mrs. Drennan says the natives will pay the expense of advertising -the movement in Japanese papers, and will, ere long, pay the cost of -translation. - -April 13, 1885, Mrs. Drennan writes: “It would take a long letter to -tell you the good things about our J. L. S. C. We have just received -to-day from the press our third edition of the ‘Hand-Book;’ this makes -twenty-five hundred printed. Our secretary is preparing to-night a list -of the paid-up members. There have been over three hundred applicants -for membership, but only one hundred and fifty have as yet paid all -dues. You know there is the house rent (for place of meeting of the local -circles), and the fixing up, lights, etc., to give us a comfortable place -of meeting. These, with most of the advertising and other expenses, have -been met by the members; and with your kind aid for a little while we -will have an influence that will spread over this entire land, doing -great things for this people. Our secretary has answered over _seven -hundred letters of inquiry_. Applications have come from several cities -for the privilege of organizing branch societies. - -“The first article in our ‘Hand-Book’ is an editorial by the editor -of the largest paper in this part of Japan. He is a very fine writer -and highly educated. He is perfectly enthusiastic over the work. It -is an argument for this plan, giving his views as to the good it will -accomplish in Japan. The second article explains the object and aim of -the Society. - -“My heart has been thrilled with delight on receiving letters and -applications for membership from some soldiers in a distant city. It -has been a punishable offense for any teacher of Christianity, or Bible -reader, to go into the army or among the soldiers. I thought, if this -course of reading spread among them, who can compute its influence, who -can tell the result of this silent teacher for Christ!” - -The new members are not satisfied with Japanese cards of membership, but -are anxious for enrollment at the Central Office of the C. L. S. C., -Plainfield, N. J., and for cards of membership from America. - -Mrs. Drennan, under date of April 14th, says: “One hundred and -seventy-five names of members have just been given me, fifty new names -being added last evening. [She sends for three hundred membership cards.] -I never saw such an interest created by anything in any country. Oh that -God may bless it to the good of this people, and make it a permanent -organization for all time! Pray for us.” - -That our readers may know of what “stuff” this earnest C. L. S. C. -worker is made, I will say that she has charge of a Girls’ School at -Osaka, teaches young men three hours per day, teaches a Bible class of -young men (twenty-five in number) on Sabbath evenings, and for a year -and a half has kept up a Chautauqua circle among the English speaking -people and others. In order to secure government permission to publish -the Chautauqua literature, permanent resident officers must be chosen; -therefore the existing local circle suspended, and was reorganized with -such officers as the government will recognize. - -One of the members is now translating “Outline Study of Man,” another -“Cyrus and Alexander,” and two others are at work on THE CHAUTAUQUAN. - -Mrs. Drennan sends an itemized financial statement, showing three eighths -of the expenses (total, $66.25) paid by the Japanese to date and five -eighths by the Central Office, with the assurance that hereafter the -heaviest part will be borne by the enthusiastic natives. God bless a work -like this in young Japan, and God bless Mrs. Drennan and her associates! - - - - -PROGRAM OF POPULAR EXERCISES. - -TWELFTH SUMMER ASSEMBLY AT CHAUTAUQUA. - - -_Saturday, July 11._ - - 10:00 a.m.—Organ Prelude, Mr. I. V. Flagler, of Auburn, N.Y. - - 10:30 a.m.—Opening Address before the “Chautauqua Teachers’ - Retreat” and “Chautauqua Schools of Language,” - by Chancellor C. N. Sims, of Syracuse University. - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilee Singers. - - 8:30 p.m.—Parlor Reception, C. T. R. and C. S. L. - - 10:00 p.m.—Night Songs—Flotilla on the Lake. - - -_Sunday, July 12._ - - 9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly. - - 11:00 a.m.—Opening Sermon, by Chancellor C. N. Sims. - - 2:00 p.m.—Platform Meeting—Addresses by Dr. C. N. Sims - and Dr. J. H. Vincent. - - 4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics. - - 5:00 p.m.—Vesper Service of the C. L. S. C. - - 7:30 p.m.—Evening Song, conducted by W. A. Duncan, Esq., - assisted by the Fisk Jubilee Singers. - - -_Monday, July 13._ - - 8:00 a.m.—Adjustment of Classes, and Beginning of C. T. R. - and C. S. L. Work. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. C. H. W. Stocking. Subject: “Venice, - the Faded Queen of the Adriatic.” - - -_Tuesday, July 14._ - - 11:00 a.m.—First Organ Recital, Mr. I. V. Flagler. - - 1:30 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilee Singers. - - 5:00 p.m.—First Tourists’ Conference. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. C. H. W. Stocking. Subject: “Florence, - the Athens of Italy.” - - -_Wednesday, July 15._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture: John Alabaster, D.D., “Michel Angelo.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilees. - - 7:00 p.m.—Vesper Service. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. John Alabaster: “Leonardo Da Vinci.” - - -_Thursday, July 16._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilee Singers. - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. John Alabaster: “Naples, Pompeii - and Vesuvius.” - - 5:00 p.m.—Second Tourists’ Conference. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. C. H. W. Stocking. Subject: - “Rome;” first lecture. - - -_Friday, July 17._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Second Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler. - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture: “From Chautauqua to Casamicciola,” - by Prof. J. C. Freeman. - - 7:00 p.m.—A Popular Lesson in Music, Prof. A. T. Schauffler. - - 8:30 p.m.—Lecture, C. H. W. Stocking. Subject: “Rome;” - second lecture. - - -_Saturday, July 18._ - -Excursion to Niagara Falls, at Reduced Rates, for Members of the C. T. R. -and C. S. L. - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture: “Around Vesuvius,” Prof. J. C. Freeman. - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilee Singers. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table. - - 7:00 p.m.—Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting. - - 8:00 p.m.—Readings, Prof. A. Lalande. - - -_Sunday, July 19._ - - 9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly. - - 11:00 a.m.—Sermon by —— - - 2:00 p.m.—Sermon by Dr. B. G. Northrop: “The Bible as an - Educator.” - - 4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service. - - 7:30 p.m.—Song Service, Fisk Jubilees. - - -_Monday, July 20._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Dr. B. G. Northrop: “Memory, and - How to Train It.” - - 7:00 p.m.—Latin Symposium. - - 8:00 p.m.—Spelling Match. - - -_Tuesday, July 21._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Third Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler. - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Meigs Sisters Vocal Quartette, and - Chas. F. Underhill, Elocutionist, all of New York. - - 5:00 p.m.—Third Tourists’ Conference. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Leon H. Vincent: “A Trip through Italy.” - - -_Wednesday, July 22._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Dr. G. C. Lorimer, of Chicago: “Philanthropy - of Humor.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Meigs Sisters Vocal Quartette, and - Chas. F. Underhill. - - 7:00 p.m.—Vesper Service. - - 8:00 p.m.—Parlor Soirée. - - -_Thursday, July 23._ - - 11:00 a.m.— - - 2:00 p m.—Fourth Organ Concert, I. V. Flagler. - - 5:00 p.m.—Fourth Tourists’ Conference. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. D. H. Wheeler: “Memories of Life - in Italy.” - - -_Friday, July 24._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Miss Kate Field: “The Mormon Creed.” - - 2:00 p.m.—The Rev. Dr. H. C. McCook, Lecture: “The - Homes and Habits of Ants.” - - 7:00 p.m.—Lecture on “The Oil Regions.” - - 8:00 p.m.—Pronouncing Match. - - -_Saturday, July 25._ - -Excursion to Oil City, Pa. - - 9:00 a.m.—Conference on “Visible Speech” and “Phonetics,” - Dr. J. W. Dickinson. - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Miss Kate Field: “Political and Social - Crimes of Utah.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Mr. A. T. Schauffler, of New York, conductor. - - 7:00 p.m.—Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting. - - 8:00 p.m.— - - -_Sunday, July 26._ - - 9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly. - - 11:00 a.m.—Sermon by the Rev. Dr. George Dana Boardman, - of Philadelphia. - - 2:00 p.m.—Sermon by the Rev. Dr. H. C. McCook, of Philadelphia. - - 4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service. - - 7:30 p.m.—Sermon by the Rev. George W. Miller, D.D., of - Philadelphia. - - -_Monday, July 27._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Geo. W. Miller, D.D.: “Martin Luther.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. G. D. Boardman: “The Graphic Art.” - - 3:30 p.m.—Public Exposition Chautauqua School of Modern - Languages and Methods. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. J. T. Edwards: “The Telephone and - Edison’s Inventions.” - - -_Tuesday, July 28._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Fifth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler. - - 2:00 p.m.—Public Readings, Prof. R. L. Cumnock. - - 5:00 p.m.—Public Chautauqua Teachers’ Retreat Question Drawer. - - 8:00 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilees. - - -_Wednesday, July 29._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Dr. George Sexton, of England. - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, the Rev. Robert Nourse: “Blighted Women.” - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table. - - 7:00 p.m.—Vesper Service. - - 8:00 p.m.—First Lecture on “Khartoum and the Soudan,” by - the Rev. Dr. Henry M. Ladd, with Stereopticon. - - -_Thursday, July 30._ - - 10:00 a.m.—Sixth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler. - - 11:00 a.m.—Sermon by Dr. J. M. King: “The Dignity of - Small Duties.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert—Fisk Jubilees. - - 8:00 p.m.—Second Lecture on “Khartoum and the Soudan,” - by Dr. H. M. Ladd, with Stereopticon. - - -_Friday, July 31._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Concert, A. T. Schauffler, conductor. - - 2:00 p.m.—Sermon by Dr. J. M. King: “Paris, and a Chapter - on Cæsarism.” - - 4:00 p.m.—Closing Exercises C. T. R. - - 4:00 p.m.—C. Y. F. R. U. Round-Table. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Philip Phillips: “Around the World,” - with Stereopticon. - - -_Saturday, August 1._ - -“Mid-Season Celebration.” Excursion to Panama Rocks. - - 9:00 a.m.—First Woman’s Missionary Conference: 1. “Best - means of creating an interest in missions.” 2. “How - can we increase the zeal and efficiency of present - methods of work?” - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture: “Wm. Carey,” by the Rev. J. W. A. - Stewart, of Hamilton, Ont. - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Fisk Jubilees. - - 4:00 p.m.—First General Missionary Conference: “How can - the work for Missions, being done in every church by - a minority of its members, be presented for the - consideration of the church _en masse_?” - - 7:00 p.m.—Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Philip Phillips: “Around the World.” - - -_Sunday, August 2._ - - 9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly. - - 11:00 a.m.—Sermon by the Rev. J. W. A. Stewart. - - 2:00 p.m.—Second General Missionary Conference: Addresses - by Dr. George Sexton, the Rev. C. C. Creegan, and Dr. - William Butler. Topic: “The Ability and Responsibility - of the Church to Evangelize the World.” - - 4:00 p.m.—Second Woman’s Missionary Conference: Mrs. - D. R. James, of Washington, D. C.: “The Future of - Our Country.” - Society of Christian Ethics. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service. - - 8:00 p.m.—Service of Song, Philip Phillips. - - -_Monday, August 3._ - - 9:30 a.m.—Third Woman’s Missionary Conference: “The - Immediate and Pressing Necessity for Home Mission - Work.” - - 11:00 a.m.—General Missionary Meeting: Address by the Rev. - Dr. Wm. F. Johnson, of Allahabad, India. - - 2:00 p.m.—Songs of the South, Fisk Jubilees. - - 4:00 p.m.—Third General Missionary Conference: “The - Present and Pressing Emergency for Increased Activity - in Home Missionary Work, how can we meet it?” - - 7:00 p.m.—Missionary Prayer Service. - - 8:00 p.m.—Anniversary “Chautauqua Missionary Institute:” - Addresses by the Rev. William Kincaid and Dr. - William Butler. - - -_Tuesday, August 4._ - -“OPENING DAY.” - - 9:00 a.m.—Fourth Woman’s Missionary Conference: 1. “The - Importance of Missionary Training, especially - for the young.” 2. “The Relation of Missionary - Literature to successful Missionary Work.” - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Mr. H. K. Carroll, editor New York - _Independent_: “A Lost Doctrine.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. George Sexton. - - 4:00 p.m.—Fourth General Missionary Conference: 1. “Active - Service,” Dr. William Butler. 2. “Systematic - Giving,” the Rev. C. C. Creegan. - - 7:00 p.m.—Chautauqua Bells. - - 7:30 p.m.—Chautauqua Vesper Service. - - 8:00 p.m.—Chautauqua Reunion: Addresses; Music by Fisk - Jubilees, Miss Dora Henninges, Mr. Hutchins, of - Chicago, cornetist, etc. - - 9:30 p.m.—Fireworks. - - -_Wednesday, August 5._ - - 8:00 a.m.—Early Lecture, Dr. George Sexton. - Bible Reading, Dr. John Williamson. - Normal Class, Dr. J. L. Hurlbut, the Rev. R. S. Holmes. - Children’s Class, the Rev. B. T. Vincent. - - 9:00 a.m.—Devotional Hour, Dr. B. N. Adams. - Intermediate Class, the Rev. B. T. Vincent. - - 10:00 a.m.—Primary Teachers’ Class, Mrs. B. T. Vincent. - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Colonel Homer B. Sprague, of Boston: - “Shakspere’s Youth.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, H. K. Carroll, Editor N.Y. _Independent_, - “Journalism.” - - 4:00 p.m.—First W. C. T. U. Conference. - C. Y. F. R. U. Round-Table. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table. - - 7:00 p.m.—Denominational Prayer Meetings. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture (illustrated), Miss Von Finkelstein and - Brother: “The Bedouins of Arabia.” - - -_Thursday, August 6._ - - 8:00 a.m.—Early Lecture, Dr. George Sexton. - - 10:00 a.m.—Eighth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler. - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Colonel Homer B. Sprague: “Shakspere - as an Author.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Henninges-Hutchins. - - 4:00 p.m.—Second W. C. T. U. Conference. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table. - - 7:00 p.m.—S. S. Normal Question Drawer—Dr. J. H. Vincents. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Miss L. M. Von Finkelstein and Brother: - “The Fellaheen of Palestine.” - - -_Friday, August 7._ - -“LOOK-UP LEGION DAY.” - - 8:00 a.m.—Early Lecture, Dr. George Sexton. - - 10:00 a.m.—First Session “American Church-School of Church-Work.” - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Colonel Homer B. Sprague: “Milton - as an Educator.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Miss Frances E. Willard: “Evolution - in the Temperance Reform.” - - 4:00 p.m.—Third W. C. T. U. Conference. - “Look-Up Legion Anniversary.” - - 8.00 p.m.—Lecture, Miss L. M. Von Finkelstein and Brother: - “City Life in Jerusalem.” - - -_Saturday, August 8._ - -“C. L. S. C. INAUGURATION DAY.” - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Colonel Homer B. Sprague: “Milton’s - Paradise Lost.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Prof. C. C. Case, conductor. - - 4:00 p.m.—Fourth W. C. T. U. Conference. - - 5:00 p.m.—“C. L. S. C. Inauguration Day.” Address, the Rev. - R. S. Holmes. - - 7:00 p.m.—Sunday-School Teachers’ Meeting. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. George Sexton. - - -_Sunday, August 9._ - - 9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly. - - 11:00 a.m.—Sermon, Bishop R. S. Foster. - - 2:00 p.m.—“Memorial Service:” Bishop I. W. Wiley, Mrs. - Victor Cornuelle, the Rev. Joseph Leslie, Hon. - Schuyler Colfax. - - 4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics. Lecture, Dr. George - Sexton. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service. - - 8:00 p.m.—Sermon, J. A. Worden, D.D. - - -_Monday, August 10._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture: “The Story of Two Brothers,” the Rev. - H. M. Bacon. - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Bishop R. S. Foster: “India and its - People.” - - 7:00 p.m.—Normal Council. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, the Rev. S. R. Frazier: “A Yankee in - Japan.” - - -_Tuesday, August 11._ - - 10:00 a.m.—Ninth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler. - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Mrs. Mary A. Livermore: “Wendell - Phillips.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Concert, Schubert Quartette. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table. - - 7:00 p.m.—A Question Drawer, Dr. J. M. Buckley. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, W. M. R. French: “The Wit and Wisdom - of the Crayon.” - - 9:30 p.m.—Music on the Lake. - - -_Wednesday, August 12._ - -“DENOMINATIONAL DAY.” - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Dr. J. M. Buckley: “The Peculiarities of - Great Orators.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Denominational Sunday-school Congresses. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table. - - 7:00 p.m.—Denominational Prayer Meetings. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Mr. W. M. R. French: “A Knack of - Drawing.” - - -_Thursday, August 13._ - -“ALUMNI DAY.” - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Mrs. Mary A. Livermore: “A Dream of - To-morrow.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Dedication of Normal Hall: Addresses by B. F. - Jacobs, Esq., the Rev. A. E. Dunning, and Dr. J. - L. Hurlbut. - - 4:00 p.m.—Conference, Chautauqua Alumni. - - 7:00 p.m.—Alumni Reunion, Annual Address: Dr. J. M. - Freeman, of New York. - - 9:00 p.m.—Illuminated Fleet. - - -_Friday, August 14._ - -“INTERNATIONAL SUNDAY-SCHOOL DAY.” - - 10:00 a.m.—Tenth Organ Recital, I. V. Flagler. - - 11:00 a.m.—Concert by the Choir of the Lafayette Street - Presbyterian Church, Buffalo, N. Y. - - 2:00 p.m.—International Sunday-school Meeting, B. F. Jacobs, - Esq., presiding. - - 4:00 p.m.—C. Y. F. R. U. Round-Table. - - 5:00 p.m.—Conference, “Chautauqua Baptist Circle.” - - 8:00 p.m.—Concert, Prof. C. C. Case, conductor. - - -_Saturday, August 15._ - - 11:00 a.m.—Anniversary “Chautauqua Baptist Circle,” B. F. - Jacobs, Esq., presiding. Address of Salutation by - Dr. J. H. Vincent. - Oration: The Rev. Dr. O. P. Gifford. - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Mr. W. M. R. French: “A Chalk Talk.” - - 3:00 p.m.—Concert, “Schubert Quartette.” - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table: “St. Paul’s Day.” - - 7:00 p.m.—Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting. - Lecture: “Sunday-schools in New England,” W. F. - Sherwin. - - -_Sunday, August 16._ - - 9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly. - - 11:00 a.m.—Baccalaureate Sermon, Dr. J. H. Vincent. - - 2:00 p.m.—Sermon, Dr. Charles F. Deems, of the “Church - of the Strangers,” New York City. - - 4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics. - Y. M. C. A. Conference, B. F. Jacobs, Esq. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service. - - 7:00 p.m.—Even-Song. - - 8:00 p.m.—Address, B. F. Jacobs, Esq. - - -_Monday, August 17._ - - 8:00 a.m.—Early Lecture, Edward Everett Hale: “Parish - Work in Cities.” - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Dr. Charles F. Deems: “A Scotch Verdict.” - - 2:00 p.m.— - - 4:00 p.m.—Public Exposition Chautauqua School of Modern - Languages, Methods. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table. - - 7:00 p.m.—“Look-up-Legion” Reception to the Rev. Edward - Everett Hale. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. A. I. Hobbs, of Louisville, Ky.: - “Poverty Amidst Plenty.” - - -_Tuesday, August 18._ - - 8:00 a.m.—Early Lecture, Edward Everett Hale: “Parish - Work in Cities.” - - 11:00 a.m.—Opening “Chautauqua Society of Fine Arts.” - - 2:00 p.m.—Lecture, Dr. O. P. Fitzgerald, of Nashville, Tenn. - - 4:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Class Reunions. - Meeting C. L. S. C. Counselors. - - 7:00 p.m.—Concert, Prof. W. F. Sherwin, conductor. - - 9:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Camp-Fire. - - -_Wednesday, August 19._ - -“C. L. S. C. RECOGNITION DAY.” - - 9:00 a.m.—Guards of “Gate” and “Grove;” Misses with - Floral Offerings; “Society of S. H. G.;” Glee Club - and Choir; Members of ’85. - - 10:00 a.m.—Chautauqua Procession; Passage of the “Arches.” - - 10:30 a.m.—“Recognition” in the Hall. - - 11:00 a.m.—“Public Recognition” and Commencement Oration, - Counselor Edward Everett Hale. - - 2:00 p.m.—Addresses, Counselor Lyman Abbott and others. - Presentation of Diplomas. - - 7:00 p.m.—Prayer Meetings. - - 8:00 p.m.—Athenian Watch-Fires and “Reception.” - - -_Thursday, August 20._ - -“NATIONAL TEMPERANCE SOCIETY DAY.” - - 8:00 a.m.—Lecture, Edward Everett Hale: “Parish Work in Cities.” - - 11:00 a.m.—Temperance Address, Hon. George W. Bain, of Kentucky. - - 2:00 p.m.—Temperance Address, Mrs. J. Ellen Foster, of Iowa. - - 7:00 p.m.—Temperance Address, Prof. J. C. Price, President - of Zion Wesley Institute, North Carolina. - - 9:00 p.m.—Lecture, W. I. Marshall—“An Evening in Wonderland, - or the Yellowstone,” with Stereopticon Illustrations. - - -_Friday, August 21._ - -“ROMAN DAY.” - - 8:00 a.m.—A Conference on the Study of Latin—Prof. Edgar - S. Shumway. - - 11:00 a.m.—Lecture, Francis Murphy. - - 2:00 p.m.—Readings, Prof. R. L. Cumnock. - - 4:00 p.m.—Closing Exercises C. S. L. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Round-Table. - - 7:00 p.m.—Normal Sunday-school Council, Prof. W. F. Sherwin. - - 8:00 p.m.—Lecture, W. I. Marshall: “Sierra’s Enchanted - Valley, or the Yosemite Valley and the Big Trees.” - - 9:30 p.m.—Songs by the Schubert Quartette. - - -_Saturday, August 22._ - -“HARVEST AND C. T. C. C. DAY.” - - 10:00 a.m.—Harvest Service, the Rev. R. S. Holmes, conductor. - - 11:00 a.m.—First Rally C. T. C. C. Addresses by Mr. Charles - Barnard, of New York, Major Henry E. Alvord, of - “Houghton Farm,” and Dr. J. H. Vincent. - - 2:00 p.m.—Grand Army of the Republic Reunion. - - 3:30 p.m.—Concert, Prof. W. F. Sherwin. - - 5:00 p.m.—Meeting “Chautauqua Society of Fine Arts.” - - 7:00 p.m.—Sunday-school Teachers’ Meeting. - - 8:00 p.m.—W. I. Marshall: “Utah and the Mormon Question.” - - 9:30 p.m.—Illuminated Cottages. - - -_Sunday, August 23._ - - 9:30 a.m.—Sunday-school and Assembly. - - 11:00 a.m.—Sermon, Bishop Cyrus D. Foss, D.D., LL.D., of - Minnesota. - - 2:00 p.m.—Sermon, the Rev. R. B. Welch, D.D., LL.D., of - Auburn Theological Seminary. - - 4:00 p.m.—Society of Christian Ethics. - - 5:00 p.m.—C. L. S. C. Vesper Service. - - 7:00 p.m.—Sermon, Dr. B. M. Adams. - - 9:00 p.m.—“Vigil,” Class of 1886. - - -_Monday, August 24._ - - 8:00 a.m.—“The Farewell.” - - - - -SPECIAL NOTES. - - -Readers of THE CHAUTAUQUAN, particularly if they do not expect to visit -Chautauqua this summer, will find a very useful and interesting paper -in the _Assembly Daily Herald_. The _Herald_ is the daily chronicler of -the proceedings at Chautauqua during the session of the Assembly. Its -most important work is to furnish to its readers stenographic reports of -all the leading lectures delivered on the platform. More than seventy -lectures appear in its columns during the nineteen daily issues of the -_Herald_. Among the lectures of the present season are to be several on -Italy. The Tourists Ideal Foreign Tour will be mainly located in Italy. -Now, for those who expect to read the C. L. S. C. course of 1885-86 -this will be particularly interesting and profitable, as a portion of -the course is to be on Italy and its life. A feature to which we would -particularly call the attention of readers of the C. L. S. C. is the -reports of special meetings and special classes, together with the daily -reports of C. L. S. C. news. Much of the best of the C. L. S. C. work and -planning is done at the Assembly, so that no one thoroughly interested in -the C. L. S. C. can keep abreast of the news of this institution without -the _Herald_. The first issue of Volume X. of the _Assembly Herald_ will -be on August 1st, and it will appear daily, Sundays excepted, in nineteen -numbers. Its price is $1.00 for the season, or in clubs of five or more, -90 cents. Subscribers to THE CHAUTAUQUAN will find it to their advantage -to accept our combination offer until August 1st of THE CHAUTAUQUAN and -_Assembly Daily Herald_ for $2.25. - - * * * * * - -Through the help of the C. L. S. C. Loan Library, a number of students -who would otherwise have been obliged to give up their C. L. S. C. -studies entirely, have been enabled to continue the course during the -past year. These books (about half a dozen sets) will be for sale at -reduced rates, at the Plainfield office after July 1st. - - * * * * * - -Another Chautauqua Idea of great practical importance is out. It has been -devised to meet the demand for competent training in phonography. Within -the last ten years shorthand writers of ability have become necessary to -business offices, courts and editorial rooms. For those young men and -women who would fit themselves for the numerous positions open to expert -phonographers, the “Chautauqua University” has opened a “College of -Phonography.” It is under the direction of W. D. Bridge, A.M., a reporter -of nearly thirty years’ experience, who has associated with him F. G. -Morris, A.M., one of the most successful and accomplished phonographic -teachers in the country. For circulars of the College of Phonography, -address the registrar, R. S. Holmes, A.M., Plainfield, New Jersey. - - * * * * * - -We are in receipt of the finely illustrated catalogues of the church -furnishers, Messrs. J. & R. Lamb, of New York City. The designs which -they are offering in Metal Work, Stained Glass, Church Upholstery and -Church Embroideries are all of them beautiful, many of them unique and -original. Churches that are contemplating refurnishing, or are building, -can not do better than to send for the Messrs. Lamb’s catalogue. They -will get good ideas, if nothing else. - - * * * * * - -The Chautauquans of Minnesota and the Northwest propose to hold this -summer a Chautauqua Assembly of the Northwest. The first step in -furtherance of this plan has been taken by the circles of St. Paul and -Minneapolis, best situated as they are for united action, and strong in -the presence of sixteen circles. On the 15th day of May, an association -was formed by representatives from ten of the sixteen circles, to be -known as the Central Chautauqua Committee. - -The first Assembly will be held at the “Enchanted Island,” a beautiful -place in Lake Minnetonka, Hennepin County, Minn., on June 26th. Reduced -rates have been obtained on all railroads leading into Minneapolis and -St. Paul. Circulars containing programs and full particulars will be sent -to all applicants. Let all Chautauquans of the Northwest be present at -the “Enchanted Island.” Address E. T. Brandeburg, Secretary, Room 14, -Webb Block, Minneapolis, Minn. - - * * * * * - -Reports from the following local circles have been received at this -office too late for the July issue of THE CHAUTAUQUAN: Osceola, Iowa; -“Thornapple,” Vermontville, Michigan; “Beta,” Milwaukee, Wis.; “Aryan,” -Hope Valley, R. I.; “Vincent,” Needham, Mass.; Jewett City, Conn.; -“Springhill,” Morris Cross Roads, Pa.; “King Philip,” Medfield, Mass.; -West Winsted, Conn.; Prattsburgh, N. Y.; “The Athenian,” Lanark, Ill.; -“Longfellow,” Cambridge, Mass.; “Pansy Quartette,” Oshtemo, Mich.; -Brantford, Ontario, Canada. Reports from local circles in the following -towns have been forwarded to THE CHAUTAUQUAN from Plainfield, but too -late for the July issue: Hope, R. I.; Luverne, Minn.; Rushville, Ill.; -Wellington, South Africa; Monroe, Iowa; Jonesville, Mich.; Jacksonville, -Ill.; Billerica, Mass.; Charlestown, Mass.; Wabash, Ind.; Amherst, N. -H.; Brookville, Ind.; Madison, Conn.; Minneapolis, Minn., from “Highland -Park,” “Alden” and “Vincent” circles. - - * * * * * - -Transcriber’s Notes: - -Obvious punctuation errors repaired. - -Page 566, “differents” changed to “different” (These facts from different -states) - -Page 572, “Onalashka” changed to “Unalashka” (the island of Kagamil, near -Unalashka) - -Page 576, “Helena” changed to “Helens” (an outburst of Mt. St. Helens) - -Page 581, duplicate word “by” removed (mercury may be frozen by this -means) - -Page 584, “in honor of the god of the gods of the under world” _may_ be a -misprint for “in honor of the god of the under world” or “in honor of the -gods of the under world”, but has been left as printed: it’s not obvious -which alternative might be correct, or indeed whether it’s an error at -all. - -Page 594, “Shakespere” changed to “Shakspere” (souvenir of the Shakspere -evening) - -Page 599, “eighteen” changed to “nineteen” (There are in NEBRASKA -nineteen circles of the C. L. S. C.) - -Page 605, “Monoan” changed to “Monona” (Assembly at Monona Lake, Madison, -Wisconsin) - -Page 609, “Gautemala” changed to “Guatemala” (the stars and stripes trot -along after Guatemala) - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Chautauquan, Vol. 05, July 1885, -No. 10, by The Chautauquan Literary and Scientific Circle - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CHAUTAUQUAN, JULY 1885 *** - -***** This file should be named 55444-0.txt or 55444-0.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/5/4/4/55444/ - -Produced by Emmy, Juliet Sutherland and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - |